While winter is a great time to get cozy and try to stay warm, it’s also the happiest time of year for skiers and snowboarders in the U.S. and Canada. With so many great slopes dotting the mountain ranges of North America, it can be hard to decide which are the absolute best. To find out the best ski resorts for this year, we consulted our most trusted experts: you, the TravelAwaits readers. Below is a brief guide to our readers’ picks for the best ski resorts on the continent.

1. Killington Resort (Winner)

Killington, Vermont

Killington Resort tops the list — likely because of the huge variety of amenities and activities it has to offer guests. In addition to skiing and snowboarding, Killington also offers mountain biking, golf, ATV tours, concerts, a spa, and a smattering of dining and shopping options. Busy parents and grandparents always appreciate the onsite childcare.

Occasionally referred to as the “Beast of the East,” this resort has a dedicated following because of the excellent slopes and comfortable resort setting. Though it isn’t the largest resort on the list, it makes up for what it lacks in size with a wide variety of terrains. Whether you are a seasoned pro or new to winter sports, Killington will have plenty for you to do. To fully immerse yourself before your first visit, explore the Killington podcast.

2. Palisades Tahoe

Olympic Valley, California

On the other side of the country, the place to be (and ski) is Palisades Tahoe. This is the kind of resort that guests never want to leave – there are just too many fun things to do. On top of that, online reviews frequently cite the friendly and helpful staff who make every visit a joy. Finally, the quality of lodging at Palisades Tahoe may be the largest standout factor.

The host of the 1960 Olympic Winter Games, Palisades Tahoe is known for its appeal to experts, but there are plenty of friendly instructors and accessible zones for beginners. The Village at Palisades Tahoe is the starting and ending point for a day on the slopes. You’ll find gear, coffee, drinks, food, and accommodations.

3. Breckenridge Ski Resort

Breckenridge, Colorado

Resorts in Colorado make up nearly half of the list of our readers’ favorite places to ski and that’s no surprise. The state is an outdoor wonderland, but Breckenridge is a cut above the rest. With over 2,908 skiable acres between 9,600 and 12,998 feet in elevation, this is a place for people who are serious about their sport.

What the numbers don’t show, however, is the atmosphere that the resort and its accommodations provide. Since it began operating in 1961, generations of experienced enthusiasts and jumpy newcomers have enjoyed the resort and the town. Whether it’s the full event calendar or the Five Peaks that brings you to Breckenridge, you’re sure to return again and again.

4. Sugarloaf Outdoor Center

Carrabassett Valley, Maine

Maine’s Sugerload Outdoor Center offers a slightly different experience from some of the other resorts on the list. With over 30 miles of Nordic skiing trails, Sugarloaf offers a change of pace and scenery for winter athletes.

For other changes of pace, Sugarloaf is home to an NHL-sized skating rink, fat bike and snowshoe rentals, and all of the other amenities that you would expect from a top-10 resort. Guests who prefer to experience the beauty of Maine during the summer will find an 18-hole golf course with stunning mountain views.

5. Aspen Snowmass

Snowmass Village, Colorado

Aspen is a name that draws attention from around the world for its famous four mountains: Aspen Mountain, Aspen Highlands, Buttermilk, and Snowmass. Extensive lifts and gondolas make moving around the resort a breeze and careful grooming keeps the guest experience safe and pleasant. Covering an area of 5,527 acres, and with 41 lifts, there is plenty to keep even the most energetic skier occupied.

The fun at Aspen doesn’t end when the sun goes down; watering holes like The Sterling Aspen, Escobar, Belly Up Aspen, and The Snow Lodge provide different vibes for different guests. Aspen is even home to its very own art museum, where you can explore ideas and aesthetics as you relax and recuperate from a day on the slopes.

6. Whistler Blackcomb

Whistler, British Columbia

By SKI magazine’s numbers, Whistler Blackcomb is the largest ski resort in North America. It also boasts a vertical drop of 5,280 feet with 200+ marked trails. With numbers like these, it’d be hard to visit such a vast area without having a little bit of outdoor fun. For even more excitement, guests can book helicopter tours or heliskiing experiences. Heliskiing allows dedicated skiers access to powder that hasn’t been touched by others.

7. Telluride Ski Resort

Telluride, Colorado

Telluride is unquestionably beautiful, but this resort isn’t just another pretty face; there’s plenty of substance to the mountain. PeakRankings estimates that 41 percent of the mountain is rated as Advanced/Expert, meaning there are great challenges to be found across the resort’s 3,650-foot total footprint.

Whether you choose to stay in Telluride itself or in the mountain village, guests appreciate the world-class apres-ski experiences available. Telluride itself recommends a margarita at Gorrono Ranch, champagne at Bon Vivant, or any of its other excellent food and drink options.

8. Beaver Creek Resort

Beaver Creek, Colorado

Yet another option in the great state of Colorado, Beaver Creek Resort is a perfect choice for beginner- and intermediate-level skiers who are looking for a balanced terrain variety and modern infrastructure. The resort manages crowds well, which can make or break a mountain experience. With a slightly more family-friendly vibe, Beaver Creek still offers plenty of luxury accommodations, good dining, and entertainment without as much of the wild reputation that other resorts may lean into.

9. Mont Tremblant Ski Resort

Mont-Tremblant, Quebec

Mont Tremblant offers a taste of the European skiing experience in Canada. The appealing Quebecois-style village is a sight to see and it offers a nice variety of drinking and dining options. The skiing and snowboarding themselves offer good variety as well, meaning that everyone can have a good time at Tremblant.

10. Banff Sunshine Village Ski Resort

Banff, Alberta

One major appeal of Banff Sunshine Village Ski Resort is the length of its seasons; by some reports, they can run from November to late May. With incredible views and solid value, it’s hard to say “no” to a balanced, accessible resort like Banff Sunshine Village. While the only option in the mountain village is the lovely Sunshine Mountain Lodge, visitors can also stay in Banff and explore the town for a change of scenery.

Read more from our 2023 Best Of Travel Awards, including:

From beaches to recreation areas and historical nature preserves, Fort Pierce has plenty to offer any outdoor enthusiast. With several tour companies offering visitors a chance to experience the outdoors up close and personal, this guide will help you find the perfect places to explore in and around town. So, without further ado, these are just some of the incredible things you can do during a weekend in Fort Pierce, Florida.

1. Navy SEAL Museum

Visit the National Navy SEAL-UDT Museum; it’s the only one of its kind dedicated solely to preserving the history of the SEALs. Before heading inside, take a turn on the obstacle course modeled after the BUD/S course in Coronado, California. Inside the museum, climb aboard the lifeboat where Captain Richard Phillips was held hostage for 5 days after the cargo ship Maersk Alabama was seized by Somali pirates on April 8, 2009. Gaze at the incredible memorial that honors Navy SEALs and frogmen, then check out the centerpiece of the memorial — a bronze sculpture of a modern Navy SEAL combat swimmer. You’ll also have a chance to see the Mark V Special Operations Craft — an 82-foot-long, 52-ton boat that was used as a medium-range insertion and extraction platform for special operations forces.

2. Get Up And Go Kayaking

One of the most unique opportunities in Fort Pierce is the Get Up and Go Kayaking excursion. Launch your 100 percent clear kayak into the water and prepare to be amazed at the beauty. Red mangrove trees and rich flora and fauna line the path to the bay. You might see dolphins, manatees, sea turtles, and various birds along your water journey.

Trips take kayakers to a sandy area, where they can hop out and explore in the shallow water. You’ll have a chance to see crabs, stingrays, and a variety of fish. Use the nets they provide or your hands to touch and connect with nature. You never really know what you are going to see on these tours!

Pro Tip: Book a GLOW tour, a night trip out with LED lights on the kayaks; you’ll get a whole otherworldly feel as you make your way in the dark through the mangroves.

3. Savannas Recreation Area

Savannas Recreation Area is nestled close to the Indian River and offers a plethora of things to do during trips for the seasoned traveler. Florida is a long state and pulling a camper can be a challenge. Rent an RV from Glampster RV for a stay and book a full hookup site. I can recommend location #43, ideally situated for all activities with laundry and a bathhouse. Every camping location offers a fire ring and picnic table.

Pro Tip: Site #43 gives a good dose of afternoon shade, which was appreciated in the hot summer sun.

One unique feature of this campground is how they offer rental kayaks and canoes. A perfect addition to a stay, walk from your campsite and take a paddle through the canals. The rental rates were reasonable and they had plenty of units available. 

Within the Savannas Recreation Area, you can fish the day away just a few steps from your site, with catches of many native fish. Anglers can find bull redfish and spotted sea trout in the river and its deep flats, where the system attracts a lot of shrimp and mullets for feeding. Grouper, snapper, snook, black drum, and tarpon can also be caught in the river. The recreation area offers a short paved hiking trail through the park; bike or walk along the path. Here, you can see the many birds that call Florida home or you might even get to see an alligator!

4. Donald B. Moore Heritage Preserve

Visit the Donald B. Moore Heritage Preserve; while it doesn’t look like much from the parking lot, you will be amazed at all the unique things along these short interpretive trails. Delve into the Orange Trail with its markers teaching about flora and fauna of the area. If you finish the Orange Trail and want a little more hiking, enjoy the Green Path. This trail offers a history of the site and plenty more lush views. If you’re going to wander a bit further, you can take the Blue Trail out to the Indian River and check out the kayak stopover and the lagoon kiosk.

This preserve offers plenty of recreational opportunities, which include volleyball, horseshoes, and disc golf. You can have a picnic in one of the various picnic areas, which include tables and charcoal grills. The boardwalks and trails are well-marked and easy to navigate; however, they would not be considered ADA-compliant.

Pro Tip: Want all the ADA accessibility in one location? Try Petravice Family Preserve with a 1.5-mile paved path, accessible bathrooms, and even an ADA-accessible kayak launch.

Hiking Recommendations

• Plenty of water to stay hydrated
• Bug spray for the pesky mosquitos
• SPF 50+ sunblock
• Snacks for energy
• Camera to snap pictures of all the beauty

5. Tours On Horseback

There’s nothing quite like the feeling of riding a horse on the beach. The wind in your hair, the sound of the waves crashing against the shore, and the steady rhythm of your horse’s hooves make for an exhilarating experience. As you gallop along the coastline, you feel a sense of freedom and connection with nature that is hard to find anywhere else. Whether you’re an experienced rider or a beginner, horseback riding on the beach is an adventure you won’t soon forget. 

Tours on Horseback offer the best beach excursions; pick one first thing in the morning for cooler temps.

6. Sail Aiki

Hop on board the Aiki with Captain Kyle for a trip out into the Indian River Lagoon. Before your trip, Kyle will coordinate how to make this trip out on the water perfect; choose from a sunrise or a sunset cruise.

The Aiki is a fully restored Condor 40 with three hulls that are 40 feet long and 28 feet wide. With the custom trampolines provided, slip off your shoes and settle into the big comfy pillows for you to recline on during your sail. Music of your choice will fill the air as Kyle and his crew get your trip underway. As you head out toward the Atlantic, close your eyes and let the sun and waves sway you into the perfect state of relaxation.

Blue waters allure you as the current takes you on its weaving path. While on board, keep your eyes open for dolphins, sharks, sea turtles, manatees, and tarpons. Take in the beautiful shoreline of the beach as you cruise along.

Pro Tip: Wear sturdy shoes for boarding; they will keep your footing sure until you are comfortably seated on the sailboat.

Restaurants On The Water In Fort Pierce

When it comes to dining by the water, there’s nothing quite like the experience of eating at a beachside restaurant. The sound of waves crashing against the shore, the salty sea breeze, and the stunning views make for an unforgettable meal. Whether you’re looking for fresh seafood or a casual burger, the beachside restaurants in Fort Pierce offer a unique atmosphere.

Curl your toes in the sand as you order the fresh catch of the day or seafood starters at On the Edge Bar and Grill, a family-owned local hangout. Looking for big flavor with a huge menu? Crabby’s Dockside has everything from landshark favorites to deep-sea treasures, and the Bairdi crab is a house favorite with 1.5 pounds served steamed or grilled with garlic butter and Old Bay seasoning.

Pro Tip: Hop in the car for a short drive to Hutchinson Island, where restaurants on the ocean combine fine dining with stunning views at Kyle G’s. Try one of the Maui poke bowls or the lobster fried rice; truly an experience you won’t forget.

Hotels In Fort Pierce

Some call the Treasure Coast the quiet side of Florida and the places to stay there are perfect for any beachgoer. Stay on the water at one of the plentiful condos located on a sandy beach, or reserve an Airbnb with a pool in one of the gated communities. If you are more of the hotelier, secure a full-service stay along the Atlantic Coast or in the historic Reno Hotel.

Pro Tip: Book your stay well in advance; waterfront hotels book up quickly.

Related Reading:

• 25 Best Florida RV Parks For Camping
• My 5 Favorite Vacations In Florida Perfect For The Entire Family
• I’m A Grandmother, Here Are The 7 Places I Love To Take My Grandkids In Winter Haven, Florida

From now through May 30, the popular outdoor adventure app AllTrails is offering half off its premium version — AllTrails+ — to celebrate Memorial Day.

Whether you’re an avid hiker, a trail runner, or simply someone who enjoys spending time in nature, AllTrails+ provides invaluable tools that enhance your outdoor experiences. Here are all the details!

AllTrails Who?

AllTrails has established itself as a leading platform that helps individuals find their way outside, offering detailed reviews and inspiration from a global community of trail-goers. With over 50 million avid trail-goers, more than 400,000 curated trails, and an astonishing 750+ million logged miles, AllTrails has become a trusted resource for outdoor enthusiasts seeking authentic experiences in nature. The platform boasts an impressive 900,000+ five-star reviews and fosters a vibrant global community.

Upgrade To AllTrails+ To Take Advantage Of These Perks

While AllTrails offers a free version of its app, AllTrails+ takes the experience to the next level with its premium features. Gain access to offline maps, immersive trail previews, and other outdoor adventure-enhancing tools for $17.99 a year (that’s a dollar and a half a month!).

Here are some key features AllTrails+ offers:

1. Save Time Finding Trails Near You

With AllTrails+, you can quickly and easily find trails in your vicinity. Whether you have just an hour to spare or an entire day, the app allows you to discover trails that fit your schedule, ensuring you can make the most of your available time.

2. Be Prepared With Extra Planning Tools

AllTrails+ equips you with additional planning tools that enhance your outdoor experience. From real-time weather overlays to trail difficulty ratings and user reviews, you can gather all the information you need to prepare for your adventure.

3. Never Miss A Turn — Even Without Service

Explore new trails confidently, knowing that you have access to detailed maps right at your fingertips. One of the standout features of AllTrails+ is the ability to download maps ahead of time. This means you can navigate trails even without cell service, ensuring you never miss a turn or lose your way. The ability to download offline maps ensures that you can navigate even in remote areas without worrying about losing your way. It provides peace of mind that allows you to focus on enjoying the beautiful scenery.

4. 3D Maps Help Plan And Visualize Your Adventure

AllTrails+ offers an immersive experience with 3D maps, bringing an exciting dimension to trip planning. By viewing the trail map in 3D, you can get a better feel for the terrain and elevation before you even set foot on the trail. Not only does this feature allow you to better prepare for your adventure, but it also helps you choose trails that match your fitness level and preferences.

5. Weather Overlays

Stay ahead of Mother Nature with AllTrails+ real-time weather overlays. Keep track of weather conditions along your chosen trail and make necessary adjustments to your plans, ensuring a safe and enjoyable experience regardless of the forecast.

6. Printed Maps Offer Convenience And Flexibility

For those who prefer to leave technology behind or want a backup option, AllTrails+ enables you to print maps directly from the app. Having a physical copy of the map can be a valuable resource, especially in areas with limited connectivity or when you want to minimize screen time.

7. Immersive Trail Previews Take Trip Planning To A New Level (NEW!)

Get a feel for the trail before you even set foot on it by checking out terrain details, specific elevation points, and an immersive preview of the trail. This valuable insight allows you to choose trails that align with your preferences and abilities, and make informed decisions about which trails to explore.

8. Wrong-Turn Alerts

The wrong-turn alerts feature is a game-changer for those who want to immerse themselves in the surroundings without constantly checking the map. By receiving notifications only when you veer off the intended path, you can focus on enjoying the breathtaking views and the tranquility of nature.

Kick Off Summer With Half Off AllTrails+

With AllTrails+, outdoor enthusiasts can unlock a whole new level of adventure and exploration. The Memorial Day sale is the perfect opportunity to upgrade to AllTrails+ and take advantage of these exclusive features. By subscribing to AllTrails+ during the Memorial Day sale, users can enjoy 50 percent off the regular price and embark on their summer adventures with confidence and convenience.

Don’t miss out on this incredible opportunity to save and upgrade your outdoor exploration. Visit the AllTrails website or download the app now through May 30 to take advantage of this Memorial Day offer. Embrace the beauty of nature, discover new trails, and make lasting memories with AllTrails+ by your side.

When it comes to exploring the great outdoors, state parks offer a plethora of recreational activities and natural wonders, from breathtaking waterfalls to stunning canyons and sandy dunes. Whether you’re an avid hiker, wildlife enthusiast, or simply seeking a peaceful escape into nature, our country’s diverse range of state parks cater to every adventurer’s taste.

Narrowing them down to the best of the best would be an impossible task, which is why we asked our readers to nominate and vote for the best state parks to visit in the U.S. in our annual Best Of Travel Awards. Showcasing the beauty and diversity of America’s landscapes, these 15 state parks are must-visit destinations according to TravelAwaits readers.

1. Franconia Notch State Park (Winner)

Lincoln, New Hampshire

Located in the quaint town of Lincoln in the heart of New Hampshire’s White Mountains, Franconia Notch State Park is a picturesque gem. The park boasts stunning natural formations, including the iconic Flume Gorge and the soaring peaks of the Franconia Range. Visitors can enjoy hiking, fishing, biking, and swimming in Echo Lake.

“This little lake, surrounded by mountains, is completely unexpected and looks like a painting. It’s absolutely gorgeous,” says TravelAwaits writer SJ Morgensen. With its stunning vistas and scenic trails, Franconia Notch State Park offers an unforgettable outdoor experience, especially during the fall!

2. Baxter State Park

Millinocket, Maine

Nestled in the wild of Maine, Baxter State Park is a paradise for outdoor enthusiasts. It is home to Mount Katahdin, the highest peak in the state and the northern terminus of the Appalachian Trail. Hikers can challenge themselves with the strenuous but rewarding climb to the summit, while wildlife enthusiasts can spot moose, black bears, and other native fauna in their natural habitat. Baxter State Park truly encapsulates the raw beauty of the Maine wilderness.

3. Niagara Falls State Park

Niagara Falls, New York

One of the most famous natural wonders in the world, Niagara Falls is a mesmerizing spectacle that attracts millions of visitors each year. Niagara Falls State Park, located in New York, offers a front-row seat to witness the power and grandeur of the falls. Visitors can take boat tours to feel the misty spray on their faces or explore the park’s numerous trails and viewpoints. It’s an awe-inspiring destination that should be on every traveler’s bucket list.

4. Custer State Park

Custer County, South Dakota

Located in the Black Hills of South Dakota, Custer State Park is a treasure trove of scenic beauty and wildlife. The park is known for its large population of bison, which can often be spotted roaming freely across the grasslands. Visitors can drive along the Wildlife Loop Road for a chance to see these majestic creatures up close. The park also offers hiking trails, picturesque lakes, and the iconic Needles Highway (one of the most scenic drives in the U.S.), making it a haven for nature lovers.

5. Red Rock State Park

Sedona, Arizona

Situated in Sedona’s vibrant red rock country, Red Rock State Park is a haven for outdoor enthusiasts and nature photographers. Striking red rock formations, meandering trails, and lush vegetation create a breathtaking landscape. Visitors can hike along the trails, enjoy birdwatching, or simply revel in the park’s serene atmosphere. Red Rock State Park is a must-visit destination for those seeking solace and natural beauty in the desert.

6. Pfeiffer Big Sur State Park

Monterey County, California

Perched on the rugged California coastline, Pfeiffer Big Sur State Park is a slice of paradise. Towering redwoods, picturesque trails, and the Big Sur River create an enchanting atmosphere. Hikers can venture along the renowned Pfeiffer Falls Trail or explore the park’s scenic coastal overlooks. With its serene camping spots and proximity to the iconic Highway 1, Pfeiffer Big Sur State Park is a must-visit destination for nature enthusiasts.

7. Turkey Run State Park

Marshall, Indiana

Located in west-central Indiana, Turkey Run State Park is a hidden gem for outdoor lovers. The park’s sandstone gorges, carved by the flow of Sugar Creek, offer picturesque hiking opportunities. Visitors can traverse scenic trails, cross suspension bridges, and even wade through the creek’s crystal-clear waters. With its unique geological features and diverse wildlife, Turkey Run State Park is a nature lover’s paradise in America’s heartland.

8. Monument Valley Navajo Tribal Park

Navajo County, Arizona

Situated on Navajo Nation land in the Four Corners region, Monument Valley Navajo Tribal Park is an iconic landscape known for its towering sandstone formations. Immortalized in countless movies and photographs, the park’s majestic buttes and mesas rise dramatically from the desert floor. Visitors can embark on guided tours by Navajo guides, ride on horseback through the valley, or capture stunning sunrises and sunsets against the iconic backdrop. Monument Valley is a true symbol of the American West.

9. Valley Of Fire State Park

Clark County, Nevada

Just a short drive from Las Vegas, Valley of Fire State Park in Nevada is a mesmerizing display of vibrant red sandstone formations and ancient petroglyphs. The park’s scenic drives, hiking trails, and camping sites allow visitors to immerse themselves in the surreal beauty of the desert landscape. The fiery hues of the rock formations, particularly at sunset, create a captivating visual experience that shouldn’t be missed.

“The Valley of Fire State Park glows with pink-and-beige-pinstriped waves, rainbow valleys, and crimson arches,” according to TravelAwaits contributor Cindy Barks. “And for some Vegas-style flare, there’s also a whimsical elephant, a fierce spear-thrower, and a beehive valley.”

10. Coral Pink Sand Dunes State Park

Kane County, Utah

Tucked away in southern Utah about half an hour northwest of Kanab, Coral Pink Sand Dunes State Park is a captivating natural wonder that stands in the shadow of the state’s plethora of national parks known as the Mighty Five. Its unique coral-colored sand dunes, formed by wind erosion, create a surreal and otherworldly landscape. Adventure seekers can explore the dunes on off-road vehicles, go sandboarding, or simply take in the serene beauty of the surroundings.

11. Palo Duro Canyon State Park

Canyon, Texas

Known as the “Grand Canyon of Texas,” Palo Duro Canyon State Park is a breathtaking testament to the state’s natural beauty. With its vibrant red cliffs, rugged trails, and abundant wildlife, this park offers a remarkable outdoor experience. It is also home to an iconic hoodoo known as “The Lighthouse.” Visitors can hike, bike, or horseback ride through the park’s scenic trails, or even catch a live performance at the renowned outdoor musical, Texas. Palo Duro Canyon is a true Texas treasure.

12. Deception Pass State Park

Anacortes and Oak Harbor, Washington

The most visited park in Washington State, Deception Pass State Park is about an hour and a half north of Seattle. This true natural gem celebrated its 100th anniversary in 2022. Spanning two islands, the park offers breathtaking views of the rugged coastline, towering cliffs, and the iconic Deception Pass Bridge. Hikers can explore miles of scenic trails, while boaters and kayakers can navigate the pristine waters of the surrounding Puget Sound. With its diverse wildlife, picturesque beaches, and stunning sunsets, Deception Pass State Park is a must-visit destination for outdoor enthusiasts.

13. Katy Trail State Park

Missouri

For cycling enthusiasts and nature lovers, Katy Trail State Park in Missouri offers a unique and immersive experience. Following the path of the former Missouri-Kansas-Texas (MKT) railroad, the park boasts over 240 miles of flat, crushed limestone trails. Spanning nearly the full width of Missouri, it is the nation’s longest continuous rail trail. Cyclists can pedal through picturesque farmland, quaint towns, and lush forests while enjoying stunning views of the Missouri River. Along the trail, there are charming bed and breakfasts, wineries, and local eateries that offer a warm welcome to weary travelers.

14. Bahia Honda State Park

Monroe County, Florida

A short distance south of Seven Mile Bridge in the Florida Keys, Bahia Honda State Park is a tropical paradise. With its crystal-clear turquoise waters, pristine sandy beaches, and abundant marine life, this park is a haven for snorkelers, swimmers, and beachcombers. Visitors can explore the park’s nature trails, kayak through the mangroves, or simply relax on the idyllic beaches.

“It has two campgrounds, one primarily for RVs, the other for tent campers,” TravelAwaits contributor Fred Mays shares in his article, 12 Amazing Outdoor Experiences From Key Largo To Key West. “There is a long, gently sloping beach which is great for families with small children. The water is shallow and protected by the offshore reef. You will also find the remnants of the Old Bahia Honda Bridge that spans the deepest channel in the Keys. Park visitors can walk the bridge to observe beautiful sunrises and sunsets.”

15. Starved Rock State Park

Oglesby, Illinois

Nestled along the banks of the Illinois River, Starved Rock State Park is an outdoor enthusiast’s paradise. Known for its stunning sandstone canyons, waterfalls, and towering bluffs, the park offers a diverse range of activities. Hikers can explore over 13 miles of well-maintained trails, leading to breathtaking viewpoints and hidden waterfalls. During the winter months, visitors can even witness the majestic frozen waterfalls. With its rich Native American history and abundant wildlife, Starved Rock State Park is a natural oasis in the heart of Illinois. Check out these places to stay nearby.

These state parks offer unique natural wonders, outdoor recreational activities, and breathtaking landscapes that showcase the beauty and diversity of America’s state park system. Whether you’re seeking adventure, tranquility, or a deeper connection with nature, these parks will surely leave you with unforgettable memories and a better appreciation for the great outdoors.

A nature preserve is, by definition, a natural habitat where animals and plants are protected, and kayaking is a great way to see the natural beauty, plant life, and wildlife that can be found there. But imagine, as you glide through the protected, peaceful waters in your kayak, if your view could include not only all of the natural beauty above the water but also what’s underneath your kayak as you paddle along.

That’s the beauty of clear kayaking in pristine Shell Key Preserve, a 1,828-acre preserve in the mouth of Tampa Bay about 12 miles south of St. Petersburg. The preserve includes a 195-acre barrier island known as Shell Key.

My husband Dean and I took a clear kayaking tour in February with our friends, Andy and Mary. Here are some tips to know when you go.

1. Go With a Guide

The advantage of going with an outfitter is that they take care of all the gear and provide a guide who can tell you all about the remarkable ecosystem of the surroundings as you paddle.

We booked a noon tour with Get Up and Go Kayaking, who says they are the first clear-kayak touring company in the United States.

The Tour

Our 2-hour tour took us to the launch point where we met our guide, Bria, got into our kayaks, paddled past a shoreline of expensive homes out into the key, and crossed clear waters along a shoreline of mangroves.

Our destination was the beautiful Shell Key Beach, where we had a chance to get out of the kayak for about 20 minutes to walk the beach or sit and relax. Then we continued our tour as we looped around through shallow waters to an amazing mangrove tunnel and back to the launch point.

Pro Tip: Get Up and Go Kayaking trips launch from Billy’s Stone Crab restaurant in Tierra Verde. On the drive there, you’ll need to pay a one-dollar toll using cash, coins, or SunPass.

2. Choose From Day Or Night Tours

As of this writing, Get Up and Go Kayaking offers five to 6-day tours per day, including a sunset tour, plus a night tour called a glow tour.

We selected a day tour because of timing, the distance from our lodging to the launch point (we were staying in central Florida and didn’t want to get back too late), and because we thought we’d see more wildlife that way.

The sunset tour offers a chance to see the sunset over the key and then turn on color-changing, waterproof LED lights. According to a video on the website, the glow tour is a tour run completely in the dark, again, with LED lights and a guide leading the way.

Pro Tips

• No previous kayaking experience is necessary.
• The outfitter will send you a waiver; to save time, sign it online before you go.
• The tandem kayaks have a weight limit of 425 pounds per boat and 250 pounds per seat.
• Wear comfortable, quick-dry clothes and bring sunscreen and a water bottle. If you take the night tour, Get Up and Go Kayaking recommends you wear a shirt with long sleeves, long pants, and apply bug spray underneath your clothes, because apparently, mosquitos like Shell Key Preserve, too.

3. Five Tandem Kayaks For A Small-Group Experience

Get Up and Go Kayaking tours are small and personal. They only take 10 people per time slot (five tandem kayaks) at one time. It’s great to go with a small group, but that also means tours can fill more quickly.

Keep this in mind when you make your reservation. Our first choice was a Saturday tour, but by the time we checked (the Wednesday prior), that date was sold out. Fortunately, the tour on Sunday still had room for us.

Our group of five kayaks meant we were always within earshot of the guide, and throughout the tour, we could easily stay together as a group.

4. Learn About Fascinating Red And Black Mangroves

Our guide, Bria, is a native Floridian who has been guiding tours for about a year. She told us about the mangroves and the important role they play in the delicate ecosystem of the preserve.

Red mangroves are the most salt tolerant of the three varieties in Shell Key and can be seen closest to the shoreline. Additional research tells me they have distinctive roots (fittingly called “stilt roots”). Black mangroves live just above the line of high tide. They build up the soil and help feed the ecosystem.

5. Watch For Wildlife And Sea Life

Part of the fun of this tour is the wildlife we could see above — and below — the water. The website tells me dolphins, rays, turtles, and even small sharks can be seen on these clear kayaking trips. There are also seasonal attractions: In summer, kayakers might see manatees and roseate spoonbills (birds), and in winter, white pelicans.

Unfortunately, we didn’t see any of that. Above the water, we saw cormorants floating, diving, and drying their wings. We also saw many other birds, including snowy egrets and terns. Shell Key Preserve is an important sanctuary for migrating birds that nest and winter there.

Jumping Fish and Underwater Sights

We also saw mullet (fish). Bria identified the mullet for us when we saw them jumping out of the water. Underwater, we saw seagrass (important food for migrating manatees), conch and intricate spiral, ruffled casings (their egg sacks), and various other small sea life.

The beauty of a natural setting is you never know what wildlife or sea life you are going to see.

6. Enjoy Shell Key Beach

We beached our kayaks at Shell Key Beach and got out. Bria hung back with the kayaks but told us to talk through a short path lined with trees to get to another more secluded beach where we saw a lone sunbather and a long stretch of beach. We walked along and enjoyed the view, beach treasures, the rhythmic waves, and the beautiful day.

Pro Tip: Shell Key is a small barrier island; there are no facilities here. Bring your essentials and as they say, “Take only photos, leave only footprints.”

7. Paddle Through A Mangrove Tunnel

If the tide is high enough, and it was for us, the tour takes you through a short but breathtaking mangrove tunnel. This is the place where we were told to “grab a root and stop,” and Bria told us more about the trees and water.

Since we didn’t see a lot of unique wildlife on our trip, this experience of kayaking through a mangrove tunnel made the tour. It was surreal to “park” our kayaks inside this natural tunnel where the mangroves had grown together, and the reflection of the trees and water was gorgeous.

I could have camped out here for much longer. But soon, it was time to head back, so we kayaked out of the tunnel to the other side and back to the launch point.

Post-Kayak Bonus: Eat At Billy’s Stone Crab Restaurant

After our tour, we decided to check out Billy’s Stone Crab restaurant. We hadn’t researched it, we just decided to try it because it was our meeting point for the kayaking tour, and that made it convenient. I must admit, I was skeptical, thinking it was a sub-par option that capitalized on their captive, kayaking audience. I was wrong.

Little did we know Billy’s has been serving up seafood for more than 50 years. Although we didn’t try their namesake stone crab (available October through May and caught in their own traps), our group of four enjoyed wild-caught jumbo gulf shrimp, zesty “dang-bang” shrimp tacos, large sea scallops, and a limited-time special: a whole Maine lobster. All delicious!

The Choice Is Clear

One of the joys of kayaking in a nature preserve is that you can never be sure what wildlife you will see, but you are sure to enjoy it all the same. If you get the chance to kayak in Shell Key Preserve, the choice is clear. Take it!

I hope these tips help you enjoy the clear kayaking awaiting you at the beautiful Shell Key Preserve.

Pro Tip: Only water vessels (private boats or public shuttles) are allowed in the preserve, but if kayaking is not your thing, you can check out the Shell Key Shuttle.

Related Reading:

• 10 Affordable Clearwater Beach Vacation Rentals With Incredible Ocean Views
• The One Experience Not To Miss In St. Petersburg, Florida
• 9 Fantastic Experiences In St. Petersburg, Florida, Plus Where To Eat And Stay

Are you ready to have an exhilarating experience? Imagine hiking to a canyon, descending to the bottom, and onto a gleaming river of ice, as walls of rock and ice stand guard on either side. Welcome to Maligne Canyon in Jasper National Park — home to one of Canada’s most incredible natural treasures.

I visited in early March with four other travel journalists. During our visit, we had the opportunity to explore the breathtaking Maligne Canyon on an unforgettable guided icewalk! Following a local guide along its frozen pathways and marveling at the spectacular formations that lurk within its depths was a journey through a winter wonderland! It was still winter but warmer than the previous months.

Pursuit Collection hosted my Banff/Jasper experience. All opinions are my own. 

Jasper National Park’s Natural Wonder

Maligne Canyon is a natural wonder in the heart of Jasper National Park in Alberta, Canada. It’s the deepest canyon in the park and stretches for miles. During winter, the running water in the canyon freezes, creating a striking icescape that is simply breathtaking. The icewalk through Maligne Canyon is an awe-inspiring adventure. Its magnificent landscape will captivate you, illuminated by crystal-clear frozen waterfalls and jagged limestone walls rising high against Alberta’s serene winter sky backdrop!

Glaciers Shaped The Landscape

Maligne Canyon is truly a stunning geological wonder. Its history dates back millions of years, beginning with the retreat of the last glaciers in the last ice age. As the glaciers melted, they carved narrow pathways through the soft limestone rock, forming the deep and narrow canyon we see today. Erosion from the Maligne River then continued to shape the canyon. Today, visitors can explore the canyon’s depths through hiking trails and steel catwalks suspended above the rushing waters, taking in this incredible natural beauty and geological history.

Maligne Canyon Is A Four-Season Adventure

Maligne Canyon in Jasper National Park is a breathtakingly beautiful natural wonder that draws visitors from far and wide during every season. You can enjoy a magnificent display of waterfalls, pools, and rock formations during spring, summer, and fall. Hiking along the canyon’s trails provides a thrilling adventure, with majestic views around every bend. You may also see elk, bighorn sheep, and other wildlife.

Maligne Canyon is gorgeous in all seasons but especially beautiful in winter when the water freezes and the hike becomes an icewalk.

What Is A Guided Icewalk Tour?

A guided icewalk tour in Maligne Canyon allows you to experience the canyon’s beauty up close and personal. Our Maligne Canyon Icewalk Tour by Banff Jasper Collection by Pursuit began at the Maligne Canyon Wilderness Kitchen. Lunch is included in the tour. After lunch, we were fitted for our gear.

Our tour included all the necessary equipment, including rubber boots that come up to your knees, crampons for your boots (a crucial traction device similar to cleats for walking on firm snow and ice), and a helmet for safety.

You’ll also be accompanied by a knowledgeable guide who will ensure a safe and enjoyable experience. Guides know the safest paths, shortcuts, problem areas, ice thickness, and depths of water beneath the ice. They also provide help when needed as you traverse the difficult canyon spots.

As you venture deeper into the canyon, you’ll walk across suspended walkways, peer down into the icy depths, and learn about the geology and wildlife unique to the area.

We hiked about a half-mile to get to the icewalk area, then descended to the bottom into the ravine, surrounded by frozen waterfalls, rugged limestone walls, and sparkling icicles. There are plenty of opportunities to take photos, so remember your phone or camera. 

As you go through the canyon, you’re surrounded by the stunning beauty of nature’s artistry. The sound of water trickling beneath the ice, the transparent walls of ice that have formed into unique shapes, and the cool air on your skin combine to create a sensory experience unlike any other.

The tour suits healthy, active travelers who can walk for 3 hours, climb stairs, and maintain good balance. I would not recommend it for people with mobility problems or knee or hip issues.

Icewalk tours run from December to the beginning of April. Check the website for available tours and to make reservations.

Can You Visit Without A Guide?

Hikers can do the icewalk without a guide, but you should be experienced. I would not do the icewalk on my own. Hiking during other seasons would be fine, but going with a guide for the icewalk is the safest thing to do in winter.

What To Wear On An Icewalk

You may be wondering what to wear on an icewalk. Maligne Canyon (or any ice canyon, for that matter) is cold. The key here is to wear layers. Start with a base layer, add a fleece or sweater, and then a warm jacket.

I recommend a warm jacket that is mid-thigh length. You will notice in the photos that my coat was knee-length. I selected it because I thought it would be warmer. While it was warm, it limited my movement when making wide steps or climbing.

Remember that you’ll be walking on rugged terrain, so comfort is key. You’ll want pants that stretch and won’t constrict your movement.

Boots that reach your knees are essential. So bring along a pair of sturdy, waterproof boots that will keep your feet dry and comfortable.

You will need crampons or ice cleats for walking on the ice, and be sure you wear a helmet in case ice, rocks, or tree limbs fall from above.

If you go on a guided tour, boots, crampons, and a helmet will be provided.

How Long Does The Maligne Canyon Icewalk Take?

The icewalk can take anywhere from 2–4 hours, depending on the tour company, weather conditions, the speed at which you hike, how many photos you stop to take, and the route you take. But don’t worry: The experience is well worth the time.

Safety Considerations When Venturing Into Maligne Canyon

This awe-inspiring canyon is a natural wonder that draws countless visitors each year. Knowing the potential dangers of exploring a natural environment is essential.

• Ice can be slick and dangerous to traverse. 
• Running water that you have to wade through even in winter can reach depths up to your knees in some areas of the canyon, creating an added risk of slipping or getting trapped in a current. 
• Ice, rocks, or branches can fall from overhead.

Despite these risks, with some preparation and awareness of your surroundings, venturing into Maligne Canyon can be a safe and rewarding experience.

If you love exploring the great outdoors, you must experience ice walking in the Maligne Canyon. The frozen waterfalls, towering ice columns, and iced river immerse you in a winter wonderland like no other. Whether you’re an adrenaline junkie or simply looking for a unique experience, ice walking in the Maligne Canyon should be on your bucket list.

Tips For Enjoying An Icewalk 

Go With A Guide

Unless you are skilled at ice walking, opt for going with a guide for safety reasons and the fact that they provide not only the guided hike but boots, ice cleats, and helmets.

Check Weather Conditions

The icewalk is only open when weather conditions are safe, so check the forecast before you head out. If the weather is warm, there is a risk of falling through the ice, so it’s best to wait for cooler temperatures.

Dress In Layers

Even if the weather isn’t freezing, dressing warm for the icewalk is essential. Wear layers that you can easily remove if you feel too warm.

Wear Appropriate Footwear

Wear waterproof boots that reach your knees and ice cleats for traction on the ice. 

Bring Your Camera

Remember to bring your camera because you’ll want to take photos. The scenery is absolutely stunning and you’ll want to capture it to show your friends and family. 

Plan To Unplug

There is no cell service in most of the canyon area, so plan to be unplugged and enjoy nature.

Be Prepared For A Strenuous Hike

The icewalk is a challenging hike. There are some steep sections and you have a distance to walk. 

Look But Don’t Touch

It may be tempting to touch the ice sculptures or slide down an icy slope, but it is vital to resist the temptation as it can be dangerous.

Pay Attention To Your Surroundings

The icewalk can be disorienting because of all the white snow and ice, so paying attention to where you are and what is around and above you is essential.

Have Fun! 

The icewalk is a once-in-a-lifetime experience, so enjoy every minute of it!

Related Reading:

• 11 Amazing Things To Do In Canada’s Gateway To The North
• 7 Things To Do In Beautiful Edmonton, Canada
• These Tours Give Visitors A Chance To ‘Dig Deep’ And Learn About Dinosaur Fossils — When And Where

We all have different vacation styles. Some of us gravitate toward leisure, others lean into adventure when they’re enjoying time away from home. Those varying interests — and paces — can tend to make traveling as a family a bit difficult as you consider and balance the needs of every member.

But there’s a central Illinois getaway spot that will tick most, if not all, of your family’s boxes when it comes to an unforgettable vacation, with a focus on the outdoors. From foodies and shopping mavens to thrill seekers and athletes, Champaign-Urbana won’t disappoint in the summer. Tucked between Chicago, Indianapolis, and St. Louis, and well-connected by interstates and Amtrak, it’s a snap to get to from just about anywhere. 

Here are a few of the reasons why you might want to consider the Champaign-Urbana area as a summer destination spot!

Get Moving!

From hiking, walking, and camping to biking and fun on the water, Champaign-Urbana is especially fun in the summer. For starters, the area’s park and preserve system is both scenic and robust, with enough trails and paths to keep you moving no matter your individual fitness level. 

Allerton Park and Retreat Center features more than a dozen miles of trails that will take you through prairies, gardens, and forests along the Sangamon River. When you’re done wandering, be sure to check out the historic Allerton residence, built back in 1900 by artist and philanthropist Robert Allerton. Lake of the Woods Forest Preserve also features a gorgeous setting to get those steps in, with a covered bridge, botanical garden, and 2 miles of paved and unpaved trails around Lake of the Woods.

If you’re more of a water baby, the Champaign-Urbana area also has you covered. Cool, clear water in two lakes makes the 275-acre River Bend Forest Preserve a hotspot for both fishing and kayaking. Middle Fork River Preserve is a favorite for swimming and camping is also available. Middle Fork is Illinois’ first and only International Dark Sky Park. Its intentional low light pollution means you’ll be treated to an incredible star show in the evenings.

Bicyclists will especially enjoy Kickapoo Rail Trail, the former CSX railroad tracks turned bike path in Urbana. The nearly 7-mile rail trail is flat as a pancake, offering an easy ride from town to the village of St. Joseph. You’ll see native plants and wildlife, and the best part is that there’s more to come: When complete, the Kickapoo will offer more than 24 miles of scenery for bikers to enjoy from the saddle.

To combine a dose of rich history with your outdoor time, consider stops — and steps — along the Champaign County African American Heritage Trail. The trail educates residents and visitors alike, sparking conversation and expanding understanding. This online resource is accessible to all and includes physical stops plus the stories of people who helped shape the county.

Embrace The Arts

Champaign-Urbana makes it easy for you to get your groove on and embrace your inner culture vulture, especially during the summer when the weather is warm. There are a variety of live outdoor music events, including Friday Night Live, a celebration that continues every Friday evening between Memorial Day and Labor Day among three locations featuring different music styles. There’s also the Allerton Park Concert Series, held on the estate’s lovely lawn once a month. If you want to combine your love of music and nature, head to either Homer Lake or Lake of the Woods Preserves for occasional live music sets. Pack a picnic to make it the perfect day or evening! Finally, the Sipyard beer garden hosts local and regional acts, where they play in shipping crates turned music stages during the summer.

You’ll also have the chance to check out a variety of art galleries in the cities and towns of Champaign-Urbana, which focus on locally produced pieces by master craftspeople and artisans. And to get your sunshine fix in along with the art, make plans to attend the Crystal Lake Park Art Fair. Held in August, this event features more than 40 artisans setting up shop right along the lake. It’s a beautiful setting for artwork that’s just as pretty. You’re bound to find pieces to consider adding to your collection! 

Enjoy The Markets And Festivals

For starters, any fan of locally grown produce and goodies will want to check out Urbana’s Market at the Square, held downtown Saturday mornings May through October, rain or shine. The market offers the best fruits and veggies from surrounding farmers fields, along with baked goods and other handicrafts.

On the first Saturday of every month during the summer, downtown Champaign hosts the fabulous Toast to Taylor Street Block Party Series, which features food, music, fun, and plenty of beautiful items for sale from local and regional makers, designers, and artisans. There’s even an onsite beer tent!

Families looking for old-fashioned fun should have the Champaign County Fair on their vacation radars. The late-July event includes rides, games, and fun food, along with livestock competitions, a demolition derby, horse shows, motorcycle races, live mainstage music shows, and even a fair queen contest.

And if you’re craving a sweet, bubbly treat, make plans to attend the Mahomet Soda Festival! This charming outdoor event combines live music, great food, and all sorts of out-of-the-box soda flavors. Historic downtown Mahomet hosts the annual event, which takes place in June. Make your way through the festival and sample endless options from family-owned bottlers across the country. From hot ginger ale to colas and fruit flavors, once you find the soda you like best, you can purchase your favorites to take home and enjoy.

There’s A Taste For Everyone

Champaign-Urbana prides itself on having a diverse and critically acclaimed culinary scene, with a focus on locally grown and produced food. There’s a whole host of international flavors to try out as well, from Filipino to Indian, Italian, and Vietnamese. Barbecue lovers will delight in the many restaurants that serve up saucy delicacies from the grill, and there are also many craft breweries and wine bars across the county. Bottom line, you’re not going to go hungry during your visit, no matter your palate’s preferences. It’s incredibly easy to curate a foodie weekend here the entire family will love. To check out all that’s available, visit Champaign-Urbana’s food guide!

And once the weather heats up, Champaign-Urbana really rolls out its patio season. Many of its restaurants, bistros, cafés, and bars offer al fresco drinking and dining. They’ll be breaking out the umbrellas so everyone can enjoy meals outside with family and friends. Downtown Champaign alone boasts more than 2,000 outdoor seats during the summer season!

Pro Tips: Getting To Champaign-Urbana

Champaign-Urbana is incredibly accessible from major midwestern cities, as it’s located at the crossroads of Interstates 57, 72, and 74. American Airlines serves the county’s Willard Airport, with direct flights daily from both Chicago and Dallas/Fort Worth. And Amtrak runs right through the heart of the county, with stops in both downtown Champaign and nearby Rantoul, as well as routes starting to the north in Chicago and terminating south as far as New Orleans. The area is truly in the middle of it all!

While summer is a terrific time to visit, the sun shines hot and direct. Take necessary precautions so that sun doesn’t slow you down: Wear high-SPF sunscreen, perhaps a hat, and by all means, stay well-hydrated. Also, if you’re going to enjoy Champaign-Urbana’s parks, preserves, waterways, and other outdoor amenities (which we highly recommend!), make sure you apply plenty of bug spray and wear light, long sleeves to avoid bothersome bites.

One of the most recognized landmarks in Hawaii, Diamond Head State Monument in downtown Honolulu is my own personal Everest — one that I successfully summited! Climbing to the top of Diamond Head’s crater rim is a popular activity for visitors as well as a favorite workout loop for locals. It’s not every day that you can boast that you’re hiking up the side of a volcano in a capital city, let alone one with incredible panoramic views, but it happens every day here.

Diamond Head is part of the system of cones, vents, and eruption flows of the Honolulu Volcanic Series. Thankfully, there’s no chance of an eruption at this state park these days! But the long-dormant crater and crater walls offer visitors spectacular views and one of the state’s most rewarding hikes.

The curious name, Diamond Head, was given to the area by 19th-century British soldiers who thought the nearby sparkling calcite crystals were much more precious. But indigenous Hawaiians call the landmark Leahi, from lae for “ridge” and ahi for “tuna.” If you use your imagination, you can see how the crater rim resembles a tuna’s dorsal fin.Today, Diamond Head is protected as part of the Diamond Head State Monument. Encompassing approximately 475 acres, it is one of the largest green zones in an American state capital.

1. Arrive By Foot, Car, Or Public Transit

If you’re feeling ambitious, it’s entirely possible to hike to the gates of Diamond Head State Monument from Waikiki. Depending on where you start, it could take up to an hour — and then you still have to explore the park! But more people do it than you might think, especially fitness-oriented locals.

Most visitors, however, prefer to save their energy for the hike to the top of Diamond Head, and there are several ways to get to the park using other forms of transportation. For instance, the Waikiki Trolley blue line includes a stop at the gates of Diamond Head State Monument. However, it only makes financial sense to purchase a trolley pass if you plan to ride the trolley to other attractions and do some sightseeing.

The more frugal option is to take the city bus, which costs around $3 for adults. Bus number 23 from Kuhio Avenue (toward Diamond Head) is the most direct route via public transportation. While you’ll likely spot the State Monument sign, let the driver know where you’re headed to be on the safe side. Tickets are usually good for 2 hours, so if you’re a speedy hiker and a frugal traveler, hold on to your transfer stub, and your return trip through Waikiki might just be free.

Of course, you can always drive (there is ample parking) or catch a taxi or Uber. Diamond Head State Monument isn’t very far from the Honolulu Zoo, the Waikiki Aquarium, and Diamond Head Beach Park. If you’re planning to visit these attractions during your trip to Oahu, it makes sense to do so after your Diamond Head visit, when you’re still in the neighborhood.

2. Reservations Are Essential 

Diamond Head State Monument is open every day of the year, including holidays, from 6 a.m. to 6 p.m. The latest you can enter the park to hike is 4:00 p.m. since the round trip takes between 90 minutes and 2 hours. On peak days, the park welcomes more than 3,000 people. As such, as of May 12, 2022, all out-of-state visitors must have an advanced reservation to enter Diamond Head State Monument.

Reservations can be made up to 14 days in advance for now, but the long-term plan is to change the system so reservations can be made up to 30 days in advance. Visitors are asked to arrive within 30 minutes of their reservation time. However, you must leave by the end of your reservation time. So if you are a slow stroller, make sure you’re there at the beginning of your time slot!

3. Best Time To Hike: Mornings

If you’re visiting Hawaii from mainland North America and jet lag has you awake bright and early, visit the park and hit the hiking trails before the crowds get there. We started our hike not long after the park opened, and I’m so glad we did. The temperatures were relatively cool, there weren’t many people (though we were far from alone), and it was neat to see so many locals getting their workouts in. It helped me realize that Diamond Head is so much more than a tourist attraction — it’s a beloved part of the community.

4. Pay Online — But Bring Cash

Prior to the new reservation system, admission to Diamond Head State Monument was $5 per car (no matter how many people were in it) and $1 for pedestrians, and it was cash only. But the new system changes everything! Now the reservation system means you pay $5 per person in advance online, via credit card. You can also pay the $10 parking fee if you wish to park. If you have ID that proves you’re a Hawaiian resident, your entry and parking costs are free.

I highly recommend bringing along some extra money to buy some refreshing shave ice after your hike. There’s usually a food truck selling it in the trailhead parking lot and, in my opinion, it’s the best way to treat yourself after your adventure.

5. Minimal Gear Needed

In addition to a bit of money, you should bring your own water bottles (there are fountains at the beginning of the trail, but none as you ascend), a hat and sunscreen, and good walking shoes. I have to say, I did see quite a few people wearing casual flip-flops, and they were undeterred by the loose gravel and switchbacks. To each their own, but I’m glad I had my sneakers with me on the hiking trail!

6. Expect Stairs And Gravel

The trail to the summit was built in 1908 as part of Oahu’s coastal defense system. The hike itself is only 0.8 miles each way, but you gain 560 feet in height along the way. The trail includes a concrete walkway, loose gravel and soil, a 225-foot-long tunnel (it looks pitch black as you approach it, but it is dimly lit inside), and many, many stairs. In addition to the loose gravel, there are several narrow and awkward parts of the trail, and your ankles will appreciate the extra support that tennis shoes provide.

Having not realized there were so many stairs involved — I assumed I’d be hiking up a slope, not steps — I have to admit I was worried that the Diamond Head hike would defeat me! The stairs themselves weren’t impossibly difficult, but they were harder on me because I hadn’t expected them. Now that I know what to expect, I don’t find the route nearly so intimidating. The hike to the top of Diamond Head is a workout, for sure, but it’s manageable and well worth it for the gorgeous panoramic views. A little pre-trip planning goes a long way.

7. Great Views And Incredible History

Without a doubt, the most spectacular thing you’ll see at Diamond Head State Monument is the incredible view. Locals like to say that on a clear day, there’s nowhere else on Earth where you can see so far overland. Based on my very unscientific observations, I concur! At the top of Diamond Head, all of Honolulu opens up to you. For early risers, I can’t imagine a more breathtaking place to enjoy the sunrise.

However, the land views pale in comparison to the ocean views. From crashing, deep navy blue waves to delicate shades of turquoise lapping at the shore, this is the Hawaii of your dreams — nothing but sun, sky, and surf. In the winter season, you might just see humpback whales frolicking in the distance. And at the base of Diamond Head, you’ll notice a jaunty white lighthouse. A facility of the United States Coast Guard, the lighthouse was built in 1917 and added to the National Register of Historic Places in 1980. If you think it looks familiar, that’s because it was featured on a postal stamp in 2007! Unfortunately, you can’t visit it, so you’ll have to enjoy the views you get from Diamond Head.

While I expected incredible views — and I was not disappointed — I noticed something else that I found equally intriguing. There are many objects along the way that point to the crater’s history as a military observation point. The land around Diamond Head Trail was part of a military base for decades, and artillery cannons, cement bunkers, and an observation deck were built on the crater. You can still see the remnants of Diamond Head’s past life as you complete your hike. With an odd mix of curiosity and sadness, I observed chunks of concrete and wire slowly disintegrating and rusting on the ground. How long will it be until Diamond Head swallows up its own history entirely?

If you’re interested in learning more about the fascinating history behind Diamond Head, you can visit the park’s interpretive kiosk. The staff members are extremely knowledgeable and are always eager to answer questions.

Rest assured that the trip down Diamond Head is faster and easier than the trip up, but you should still exercise caution around the steep areas and keep your eyes open for congested spots filled with tourists wielding rogue selfie sticks!

Planning a trip to Oahu? Check out the best things to do there, plus Honolulu’s best free and frugal activities. And be sure to make time for Pearl Harbor and the North Shore.

Beautiful Chautauqua Lake is one of the many popular getaways in New York State for outdoor activities. Boating, birding, and fishing join hiking trails and wine-tasting trails that will keep you happily exploring the beautiful scenery and sun-drenched days.

Chautauqua Lake, a freshwater lake, is 17 miles long and up to 2 miles wide at its widest point. One of the highest navigable lakes in North America, Chautauqua Lake has an elevation of 1,308 feet above sea level.

Note: Some information in this piece was obtained during a sponsored press trip, but all recommendations are my own.

1. Bird Watching

Where better to seek out migratory birds than at the institute housing the history and memorabilia of the author of the Peterson Field Guide to Birds of North America? At the Roger Tory Peterson Institute of Natural History (RTPI) ornithologists and recreational bird watchers/listeners can wander the two half-mile-long trails snaking through the 27-acre preserve. The successive woodlands and meadows are a perfect habitat for birds, butterflies, and bees. Pack your best binoculars and discover the birds of western New York.

Enjoy the exhibits of Peterson’s art and other naturalist artists adorning the inside of the architecturally stunning RTPI home. Weekly spring bird walks, outdoor yoga with the birds, and other seasonal events allow you to relax and absorb the natural beauty of the RTPI sanctuary.

2. Panama Rocks

When you want to hike and explore something a little different, Panama Rocks is a fabulous option. The 1-mile loop trail takes hikers past massive rock formations, small caves, narrow canyons, and deep crevices weaving through a cool moss-covered forest. The dappled sunlight plays off the dark rocky formations and the vibrant green moss imparts a forest primeval experience. The intriguing natural wonders at Panama Rocks are why we take a walk in the woods — to contemplate interesting landscapes and to breathe in the fresh, rejuvenating woodsy air.

The trail requires traversing uneven ground but is rated easy by AllTrails.

3. Swimming

There are oodles of swimming spots along the shores of Chautauqua Lake.

Long Point on Lake Chautauqua State Park is a day-use park with a sandy beach, hiking and biking trails, a boat launch, kayak rentals, and a bathhouse.

The Chautauqua Institution Beaches come in a variety of flavors. Children’s Beach, noted for its shallow waters, sits next to Pier Beach — a deepwater swimming beach.

If you want to swim in Lake Erie, then the under-1-hour drive to Hanover Town Beach is a great option. They have a bathhouse and marina so you know this is a popular spot during the hot summer months.

You can find lots of wonderful beaches to swim and soak up some sunshine along the shores of Chautauqua Lake and nearby Lake Erie.

4. Lake Erie Wine Trail

The conditions along Lake Erie are great for growing grapes. You will pass many picturesque vineyards and busy tasting rooms as you navigate the area. The Lake Erie Wine Trail encompasses 20 vineyards that offer a broad selection of lovely wines and beautiful landscapes.

A visit to Noble Winery offers guests a stunning panoramic view of Lake Erie from an expansive porch, enhancing your sipping experience. There are several companies that offer wine tours along the Lake Erie Wine Trail. One of the best ways to visit is to leave the driving to a professional — that way you can taste all the wines.

5. Barcelona Lighthouse State Park

Lighthouse aficionados will love the charming Barcelona Lighthouse State Park. Perched high on a bluff, the lighthouse had its first keeper in 1829. The Barcelona Lighthouse’s claim to fame is that it was the first natural gas-fueled lighthouse in the United States. While you are not able to climb to the top of the 40-foot structure due to deteriorating stairs, the view from the small park is lovely.

6. The Chautauqua Belle

Touring Chautauqua Lake on the water offers some of the nicest lake views. The Chautauqua Belle is a charming steamboat offering historic tours on the lake, cocktail parties, and private events. Sit back and enjoy a trip along the calm waters and catch a view of all the lovely vacation homes along the shoreline.

7. Audubon Community Nature Center

The Audubon Community Nature Center offers a variety of interesting outdoor programs focused on birds and other critters native to the western New York area.

In the spring, local ornithologists capture birds for bird banding — a technique that provides insight into migratory and resident bird behaviors. Bird-a-thons, nature photography competitions, and other animal and habitat events are scheduled throughout the summer.

8. Golfing

An all-time favorite outdoor recreational activity is hauling your beloved bag of sticks around undulating verdant fairways and chasing a little white (or pink) ball. There are lots of golf course options in Chautauqua County; you could play a few rounds during your getaway stay.

Chautauqua Golf Club offers 36 holes of great golf to keep your swing well-tuned. At Bemus Point Golf Club & Tap House, you can enjoy nine holes of forgiving golf and finish with a great al fresco lunch. Another great nine-hole course is Willow Run Golf Course, a family-friendly option perfect for newbie golfers.

9. Bemus Point

A charming lakeside enclave, the village of Bemus Point draws visitors to explore this tip of Chautauqua Lake. Shops and restaurants paint the area with colorful quaintness. Alpacaville is always a hit, offering tours, alpaca wool, and handcrafted goods. Bemus Point Pottery is just the place to find your perfect getaway souvenir.

When you are ready for a break, stop by Guppy’s Tavern for a great lunch and local brews; it will be a meal to remember.

10. Fishing

Just hang up the “Gone Fishin” sign and be on the lookout for muskellunge, walleye, and bass. Sport fishing is one of the most loved outdoor adventures on Chautauqua Lake. Seasoned and novice anglers will enjoy fishing in the calm lake waters. Bring your camera and a waterproof cover; you will want to get a picture of your monster catch.

Chautauqua Fishing Charters will customize your fishing experience based on your desired catch of the day. You can enjoy an evening dining on your catch at a local establishment that offers a cook-your-catch meal prep.

Muddy Creek Fishing Guides offers a wonderful angler experience on Chautauqua Lake. They have half- and full-day fishing adventures that will satisfy your bucket-list fishing experience.

11. Boating

When you are vacationing in a beautiful area like Chautauqua Lake, you need to get out on the water to fully enjoy the outdoor experience. Whether it is a kayak adventure, a relaxing stand-up paddle board ride, zipping around on a jet ski, or cruising on a beautiful boat, there are rental shops to accommodate your on-the-water happy place.

Bemus Bay Water Toys is the spot for your fun water toy rentals. Whether you require a pontoon boat, catamaran, kayak, hydro bike, bass boat, or floating water mat, you will be playing on the water and enjoying the #LakeLife vacation vibe.

When you want to explore the lake in style, One Fine Day Boat Charter is just the thing. Captain Johnson will plan a custom trip out on Chautauqua Lake in his vintage Lyman Day Cruiser. Enjoy stories of lake history while you sit back, take in the view, and leave the driving to the captain.

Chautauqua Harbor Hotel

After exploring all the outdoor recreation opportunities, you will need a spot to rest up for the next day of exploring. The Chautauqua Harbor Hotel is perfectly situated to enjoy all the surrounding Chautauqua County outdoor activities. The seasonal outdoor Carousel Bar is a hub for evening libations and sunset watchers. Their onsite restaurant, the Lakehouse Tap & Grill, is an upscale casual dining experience just steps from your cozy room. The bread basket is amazing with several varieties of goodies, two types of butter, and a tapenade. I recommend the Reuben — corned beef topped with sauerkraut, house-made Thousand Island dressing, and Swiss cheese on the best rye bread.

Choose a room with a view of the lake. Sitting on your balcony enjoying your favorite beverage as boats motor past is a wonderful way to end the day. Alternatively, an after-dinner stroll along the water begins right at the back gate. If you desire something more relaxing, grab an Adirondack chair and enjoy the beautiful sunset by one of the fire pits.

Chautauqua County

There is so much to do and see in Chautauqua County, you will want to plan a several-day-long getaway. Boating, fishing, swimming, and hiking will keep you outdoors and active. Beautiful sunsets, wineries, and fun dining round out the days of exploring; coming together for a memorable lakeside vacation.

Pro Tip: The summer season in Chautauqua Lake runs from May to October and, of course, is at its height in July and August.

Related Reading: 

• 17 Must-Visit Quaint Towns In Upstate New York
• 20 Quaint Upstate New York Towns Perfect For A Holiday Getaway
• 12 Famous Foods To Try On New York’s Upstate Eats Trail

Elkins, West Virginia, is a small town of about 6,000 located in east-central West Virginia. This outdoorsmen’s paradise is in close proximity to a multitude of activities and fantastic mountain views. A four-season destination, it offers everything you could want in an outdoor playground. There’s world-class hiking, trout fishing, mountain biking, rock climbing, rafting, and skiing, plus plenty of gorgeous spots to take in the fall foliage.

Here are nine reasons you’ll love Elkins, West Virginia — on the edge of the Monongahela National Forest — in no particular order.

I was invited to experience Elkins, West Virginia, but all opinions are my own. 

1. Joey’s Bike Shop

We grabbed our bikes in downtown Elkins at Joey’s Bike Shop, where we had the pleasure of meeting and chatting with the crew. Joey and his wife, Mandy, owners of this local bike shop for about 15 years, are very enthusiastic bikers. Joey said he especially loves to race mountain bikes and even races with a team. The shop itself is a charming, old-school shop full of all kinds of cool bikes with classic ones lining the walls. My favorite is the cruiser draped in Christmas lights, which is a perfect addition to this sweet bike shop. 

These old bikes took me back to my glory days of cruising down the road on my Schwinn, with playing cards clothespinned to the spokes, making the perfect motorcycle sound. Joey outfitted us in a couple of new bikes and helmets and filled us in on the Allegheny Highlands Trail. We learned that the trailhead is just across the street from the shop, near the train station. 

Open Monday through Saturday, Joey’s Bike Shop handles sales and services of all types of bikes. You can also rent bikes from Joey’s. His work is well-known around Elkins and he has customers that travel from neighboring states. I unapologetically peppered Joey with questions about what to see and do around town because Joey’s is the kind of place you want to linger and chat for a while. He gave us a few recommendations about where to eat, and where to hike. He also filled us in on a couple of things Elkins is known for.

2. Forks Inn 

I’d return to Elkins if only to experience Forks Inn restaurant again. The intimate, reservation-only restaurant is tucked away on the edge of the Monongahela National Forest, about 3 miles from Elkins, atop Kelly Mountain. This family-run, gourmet spot offers a French-inspired menu with nods to the owners’ Appalachian roots. Did I mention the views? Forks has what has to be the most stunning views in the county. Whether looking out through the floor-to-ceiling windows of the dining room, or from the outdoor heated deck, glorious views of the mountains abound. The scenery just doesn’t get much better than this.

Fork’s has a traditional menu along with a multi-course tasting menu. Per usual, we started with drinks. I wasn’t prepared to love my cocktail selection as much as I did. My before-dinner lavender martini was the best I’ve ever had. The vodka-infused lavender was so flavorful with the perfect smooth finish that, of course, I had to have two! 

For dinner, I selected the six-course tasting experience, which includes an appetizer, soup, salad, sorbet, entrée, and dessert. It’s a lot of food to be sure, but I was anxious to give my first tasting menu a try. While everything was fresh and stunningly presented, what stood out to me most was the cottage cheese soup. I was mystified as to how the chef prepared such a creamy, rich, delightful soup from cottage cheese. If you’re in search of a place that has a wildly imaginative yet not intimidating menu, Forks Inn is your place.

3. Shopping In Downtown Elkins 

The Artists At Work is a cool cooperative gallery where local artists showcase their creations. From jewelry to gorgeous ceramic, wood, and glass masterpieces, you’ll find many handmade treasures here. We also discovered cute shops in downtown Elkins. Especially high on the list is the Delmonte Market, a boutique full of home décor, artisanal foods, and lots of handmade items. At the thrift store downtown, we found a pair of white majorette boots perfect for my friend’s pint-sized granddaughter.

4. Cabins Of Kelly Mountains

If you’re an outdoor lover but want a place that feels like home, you’ll love the Cabins of Kelly Mountain. Situated at the edge of the Monongahela National Forest, the Cabins of Kelly Mountain offer a secluded stay amid the forest, yet you’re conveniently just minutes away from downtown Elkins. 

We loved our two-bed cabin with views of the forest. The hot tub on the deck and the full sauna inside were totally unexpected but very appreciated. I loved the convenience of the full kitchen. It’s awesome to have the flexibility to whip up eggs and coffee for breakfast or make some popcorn for a late-night snack. 

The owners have seemingly thought of everything here including luxurious soaps in the bathroom, plenty of coffee in the kitchen, and games for the kids. If you’re looking for a secluded spot with all the comforts of home, the Cabins of Kelly Mountains will win you over. 

5. Tip Top Coffee

Grab your cup of joe at Tip Top Coffee and relax for a while. This downtown shop is quite possibly the quaintest place in Elkins. Completely revamped with a retro-modern flair, this coffee shop is cozy and comfortable, too. My go-to vanilla latte was expertly prepared, complete with beautiful flower art. My scone that accompanied my coffee tasted super fresh, which makes sense because they’re made in nearby Buckhannon, West Virginia.

6. Smoke On The Water

I’m always ready for barbecue. By the looks of the crowded parking lot at Smoke On The Water, plenty of others were ready to dig in as well. The large restaurant was bustling when we arrived on a recent Saturday night. Inside, we sat in the large bar area and settled in. My half-barbecue chicken dinner had the sweet, smoky barbecue flavor that I was craving. 

As good as the barbecue was, sometimes, it’s the sides that win me over. Smoke On the Water offers all the traditional barbecue sides including creamy mac and cheese, beans, baked sweet potato, and my favorite, hushpuppies. A bonus for all dog lovers is the large pet-friendly outdoor seating area.

7. CJ Maggie’s 

If you’re looking for a huge variety of items on the menu to choose from, CJ Maggie’s is the place to go in Elkins. This cozy restaurant, with private booths and tables, has one of the most extensive menus I’ve seen. We sampled lots of yummy dishes, with French onion soup, chili, nachos, and Caesar salads topping the list. This family-friendly restaurant in downtown Elkins offer’s a large variety of tasty food at reasonable prices. 

Pro Tip: Make sure you try the homemade ice cream. The mint is fantastic.

8. Great Harvest Bread 

Great Harvest Bread is a casual, strip-mall spot that serves delicious breakfast, lunch, and baked goods. My giant cinnamon roll was delish, as were the breads we tried. My favorite was the tomato garlic pesto asiago bread. All the baked goods are made in-house daily so it’s no wonder they’re so scrumptious.

9. Thomas, West Virginia

Take the spectacular drive up the mountain to nearby Thomas, West Virginia. Here you can listen to authentic Appalachian music at the Purple Fiddle, check out locally made art at the galleries, or shop until you drop at some of the unique shops clustered on Front Street. The drive from Elkins takes about 45 minutes and is full of beautiful West Virginia mountain views. You’ll want to stop along the way to take breathtaking photos of the area. You can also stretch your legs with a hike through the Davis parks. This short side trip was one of the best things we did on our visit to Elkins and I can’t wait to go back.

What To Do In Elkins According To A Local

The Mountain State Forest Festival, the largest festival of its kind in the state, is where more than 75,000 people converge in Elkins and do foresty things amid the fall foliage. Joey from Joey’s Bikes also mentioned the Ramps and Rails Annual Festival, held each April, where you can try delicious varieties of ramp-themed foods and hop on a steam locomotive train. The Durbin and Greenbrier Railroad operates historic steam-driven trains that depart Elkins for trips through the Monongahela National Forest and the Greenbrier, Tygarts Valley, and Shaver’s Fork Rivers. This is the kind of small-town fun you can experience in Elkins.

Related Reading:

• 5 Charming West Virginia Mountain Towns Perfect For A Day Trip From Washington, D.C.
• 9 Reasons This West Virginia National Park Is A Perfect Getaway For The Whole Family
• 10 Backwoods West Virginia Cabin Rentals To Enjoy Fall Foliage

There’s something about being on the water in a kayak that is, oddly enough, grounding. It’s a simple joy to paddle peacefully over still water and soak in the sights and sounds from that unique vantage point.

As part of our many adventures in Door County, Wisconsin, my husband Dean and I took a kayaking trip at Cave Point County Park. Cave Point, one of 19 county parks on the Door Peninsula, is perched on a cliff about 30 feet above Lake Michigan. Over many years, Lake Michigan waves have eroded stone from these cliffs, naturally carving out sea caves that can be seen at water level.

When the water is calm, it’s a perfect place for kayak exploration. We loved kayaking at Cave Point County Park and here are some reasons why I think you will, too.

1. Lake Michigan

Located about 3 hours north of Milwaukee and 4 hours north of Chicago, Door County is a 70-mile-long peninsula in northeastern Wisconsin that has earned the nickname “The Cape Cod of the Midwest.” With water on both sides (the bay of Green Bay to the west and Lake Michigan to the east), it’s no surprise that Door County is popular for water sports of all kinds, including kayaking.

Lake Michigan has many faces, but here at Cave Point County Park, water in these coves rivals the color of the Caribbean, making it popular with kayakers and scuba divers alike. The views from on the water in a kayak, or in it with scuba gear, bring new meaning to the words “crystal clear.”

We took our kayak tour on September 15, which was the last day of kayak tours for the season. The morning was calm and clear, and the water sparkled like glass. We dipped our paddles in the water and moved quietly through it. This was a leisurely paddle, but when we needed a break, we floated and gazed at the bottom, remarking to each other how clear and vivid everything was.

2. The Rocky Dolostone Shoreline

Another unmistakable part of kayaking here is the rocky shoreline. I’m no geologist, but from what I understand, Cave Point County Park’s unique landscape is the product of complex geological forces over a long period of time. Web research tells me these dolostone rock formations that we could see everywhere are part of the Niagara Escarpment. Yes, the rock we looked at here connected in some way, above and below the water, all the way to Niagara Falls!  

3. The Caves Of Cave Point

The stars of the show are the caves. I guess it’s the fury of Lake Michigan’s waves (sometimes as high as 30 feet) on a rough day that makes for some amazing sculpting work, creating sea caves along this shoreline. But on this kayaking trip, we saw only beauty, no fury.

Although most of the caves are shallow or submerged, they can still be viewed from a kayak because the water is so clear. We kayaked about 4 miles along the coastline and its jagged edge, and the naturally carved caves were a continual wonder. 

Paddling Into Two Caves

Kayaking along the caves of Cave Point is one thing but kayaking inside a couple of caves is another. This can always change, but when we went, two caves could still be explored from the inside — if conditions are calm and you know where to find them (another reason to go with a guide).

Our guide showed us where to enter these caves and it was easy access — no ducking or scraping the sides. One of the caves was big enough for all three kayaks to be inside at the same time. Being inside these caves is a unique and amazing experience.

4. Peninsula Kayak Company

Another reason we loved kayaking Cave Point was that we had a guide. There are several outfitters that lead tours here, but we took the 2-hour Cave Point Kayak Tour from Peninsula Kayak Company.

The tour description was appealing: “Join us for a beautiful kayak trip along Door County’s pristine Lake Michigan coastline. The trip will take you along Cave Point County Park, and Whitefish Dunes State Park. With the unique vantage point of your kayak, you’ll be able to experience the beauty of the dolostone caves and observe the beautiful karst landscape on crystal clear Lake Michigan.” 

The outfitter provides a guide, all equipment, and the necessary transportation. We signed waivers (standard practice), were issued life vests and paddles, loaded up the kayaks for our tour, and drove us in a shuttle van to the “put-in” point at nearby Schauer Park.

Pro Tips: The water is usually the calmest in the morning, so earlier is better (we took an 8:30 a.m. tour). If you go without an outfitter, know that launching kayaks from Cave Point County Park is not recommended due to the rocky shoreline. Wear comfortable swimwear or wicking clothes and shoes that can get wet (flip-flops or water shoes). Bring water, a hat, sunscreen, sunglasses, and something (cell phone, camera, GoPro) to record the moments.

5. Devil’s Cauldron

A natural, curved rock formation near the Cave Point County Park parking lot has earned the nickname “Devil’s Cauldron.” Easy access makes it one of the most popular rocky formations in the park. Although it was calm when we were there, apparently, rogue waves crashing upward have been likened to a cauldron and earned it the colorful moniker. 

6. Lakeside Trail

Whitefish Dunes State Park

Cave Point has a unique relationship with Whitefish Dunes State Park. It is a county park that’s located within a state park, and hiking from Cave Point to Whitefish Dunes is beautiful. The Lakeside Trail is accessible from the parking lot and is about a mile and a half out and back along the shoreline.

You’ll know you’ve arrived when the Lakeside Trail takes you to the water’s edge overlooking Whitefish Dunes State Park. Whitefish Dunes features some 860 acres of forest and sand dunes (the highest in Wisconsin) and offers a mile of sandy beach and almost 15 miles of hiking trails. Growing up in the Green Bay area, I spent many a summer weekend enjoying the beaches and water here.

Pro Tip: Plan for at least 30 minutes of hiking; longer if you linger (and no one would blame you if you did). 

Get Grounded

Kayaking Cave Point County Park is a unique experience. When you head to Door County, don’t miss the opportunity to get on the water in a kayak and get grounded. You’ll see for yourself the simple joy of peacefully paddling over (what I hope are) still waters and soaking in the sights. Appreciate the beautiful Cave Point County Park from a whole new perspective.

Pro Tip: A friend from the area said that traffic and crowding in Door County during summer are getting excessive. In September, however, we didn’t see any of that. Shoulder season travel for the win!

Related Reading:

• 20 Amazing Things To Do In Door County, Wisconsin
• The Delicious Experience In Door County, Wisconsin Not To Miss
• 7 Amazing Things To Do In Door County’s Peninsula State Park For Nature Lovers

I’m not a big fan of the cold, and I cringe deep in my soul at the idea of immersing myself in ice-cold water. The fact that I was shivering in nothing but a bikini and socks on the shores of a bay in Antarctica came as much of a surprise to me as to anyone else. With my arms wrapped around my goosebumped flesh, I looked at my travel partner, Lyle, who had the same worried look on his face.

“Are we really going to do this?” I asked. “How can we not? We’re in Antarctica!” he said enthusiastically, even though his expression was anything but enthusiastic.

With that, we took a deep breath and ran towards the arctic waters. The initial shock of frigid waters didn’t hit me immediately until I held my breath and plunged into water colder than anything I had ever felt. I think I lasted all of three seconds before squealing with shock and veering off toward the shore and my dry clothes.

We had just done our first Polar Plunge, and our first time was in the bay at Deception Island, Antarctica. As they say, if you’re gonna go, go big! The Polar Plunge was the ice cube on top of the frozen cake, and here’s why I can’t wait to do it again.

Note: The writer was a hosted guest of Hurtigruten Expeditions. All opinions are her own.

1. Where I Went And Why

When you have the chance to knock off the last of the seven continents off your list and journey to a land sheathed in mystery and adventure, you jump at the chance. I had always dreamed of seeing Antarctica — made famous by legendary explorers such as Roald Amundsen, Sir Ernest Shackleton, and Sir Edmund Hillary.

Lyle and I embarked on the Hurtigruten Expeditions 12-day Highlights of Antarctica cruise. It ventured from Buenos Aires, Argentina, and the southern Argentina port of Ushuaia, before embarking on the MS Fridtjof Nansen, recently voted the safest and most sustainable cruise ship in the world.

After a rough and tumble 2 days crossing 600 miles of the notorious Drake Passage to reach the tip of the peninsula of Antarctica, we immediately started exploring. Because Hurtigruten Expeditions focuses on sustainability, science, and small-ship experiences, many of our expeditions were accompanied by working scientists on board.

2. Adventure And Excursions

Wildlife And Icy Views

Like a line of red and yellow ants, we weaved up the side of a snowy mountain on a hike to a chinstrap penguin colony at Orne Harbor; our first steps on the actual continent of Antarctica. The pathway was slippery and required hiking poles, but the views of the vast land and seas from atop the mountain were staggering. Jaunty little chinstrap penguins waddled, protected fuzzy gray chicks, and honked at each other.

Earlier that day, we went kayaking, watching icebergs calve and flip while penguins lept gracefully through the waters. Another day, we visited several penguin colonies. And on other days, we explored old Antarctica homesteads and took inflatable Zodiacs to get up close and personal with whales. Seals lounged on the ice like big gray potatoes while arctic birds like petrels and albatross soared above. While Antarctica seems desolate and intimidating, it is surprisingly full of life, and each day was a thrilling foray into discovery.

Be Flexible

Each day held potential for hiking, kayaking, Zodiac excursions, or wildlife viewing. However, the itinerary is at the mercy of the weather, so it’s best to expect delays, cancellations of activities, and hiccups along the way.

3. Learning About Antarctica

Education And Environment

The Antarctica cruise wasn’t all fun and games, though we had plenty of those. Climate researchers, students, and experts in their field, our Expedition Team led lectures about Antarctica on topics ranging from icebergs, history, ornithology, whale numbers, and phytoplankton as well as photography and stargazing.

These experts were our guides on landings, hikes, and expedition boat cruising. I was one of the lucky “lottery” winners to accompany a scientist on a Zodiac expedition to attempt to take a skin sample from a mother humpback whale and her calf while also collecting water samples to track the DNA of what creatures passed through the waters.

Other programs on board Hurtigruten’s MS Nansen included a class on how to use the GLOBE Observer app, a citizen-science app that lets you record cloud coverage anywhere you are to complement NASA satellite observations; the global Happy Whale program that lets cruisers identify individual marine mammals; Aurorasaurus, the first citizen science project that collects sightings of the northern and southern lights; and eBird, which allows guests to record seabird distribution, among others.

4. What I Liked, What I Didn’t

My favorite activities on Hurtigruten Expeditions’ Antarctica cruise were the outdoor explorations. The guides were thoroughly trained in guiding and safety, and even when a nearby iceberg flipped over in front of us while kayaking, we never felt unsafe. 

The leisurely days crossing the Drake Passage, and after the day’s activities, were filled with lectures, science lab activities, games, and more. The onboard lounge and bar with its massive windows was a perfect place to relax, sip on an Irish whisky, and watch for whales.

As guests, everyone is given a polar expedition jacket to keep, which is probably the best jacket I’ve owned. Guests are also loaned rubber landing boots, floatation devices, and special cards that track when you get on and off the ship. Safety is a big priority.

Bring Snacks

One thing I didn’t like about the cruise was the limitation of available snacks, though, I think it’s part of Hurtigruten’s efforts to reduce waste. The three restaurants on board have set hours of operation, so if you miss the window, you go hungry. We took to-go boxes of snackable items from the buffet to munch when we felt snacky.

Fun Fact: Hurtigruten Expeditions is the first cruise line to implement SpaceX’s broadband service Starlink across all ships. Today, the company now offers high-speed, low-latency connectivity across its entire fleet, and it worked fantastically for me while I was on board.

5. How You Can Do An Arctic Polar Plunge Too

Our last day in Antarctica was on Deception Island, a horseshoe-shaped active volcano. The sun was finally shining as we hiked for 2–3 hours around the rim of the volcano, which was dormant but incredibly windy. You’ll have to be able to take pretty steep inclines over rocky terrain for this hike, but the views of the bay and the ship below are well worth the huffing and puffing.

At the end of the hike, the Hurtigruten crew was ready with towels and guides to lead brave souls into the icy waters for the Polar Plunge. Frankly, I was surprised that the majority of guests from young to old braved this extreme activity, but we did. 

Be prepared by bringing an extra set of dry clothes and dry socks, as well as a hat for wet hair and gloves. You’ll have to wear socks into the water because the sand can burn your feet (it is still volcanically active), but the water was a balmy 31 degrees Fahrenheit. Back at the ship, guests who braved the ordeal all received a personalized certificate.

But the bonding that night over dinner and drinks was the best as we all recounted our icy dip and shared photos and videos.

What You’ll Need

Pack plenty of layers, preferably with an inner woolen layer. You’ll need waterproof or water-resistant pants for the excursions, two water-resistant pairs of gloves, a warm hat, a backpack for excursions, motion sickness pills, warm quick-dry jackets, polarized sunglasses, and a swimsuit. While on board, the dress code is casual, so think denim, wool, t-shirts (underneath), GoreTex, and fleece (wool).

I found having a casual pair of slip-on shoes or tennis shoes for the ship was comfy and helpful.

Also, medical travel insurance with emergency evacuation is required. 

Hurtigruten Expeditions

The optional Polar Plunge was one of the last adventures offered on Hurtigruten Expeditions’ Antarctica cruise. Throughout the week, we explored the world’s most southern continent — an intimidatingly beautiful land encased in millennia of ice and snow — and embarked on adventures ranging from snow hikes, scientific excursions, kayaking among icebergs, and hiking with penguins. And while I hate the cold and being cold, the cruise was among the most impactful experiences of any destination I’ve been to.

Related Reading:

• 7 Best Things About Visiting Antarctica
• 6 Physician Tips To Prepare For A Cruise To Antarctica
• I Took A Solo Trip To Antarctica And It Was Amazing

My first trip to West Virginia was eye-opening. People say you don’t know what you don’t know, and that’s true about the state of West Virginia. With a state motto of “Almost Heaven,” West Virginia is telling the rest of us that it’s something special, and I have to agree. 

The Monongahela National Forest is one of the state’s recreational gems. Situated in eastern West Virginia, its 919,000 acres offer a vast area to explore nature amid peaceful surroundings. According to the U.S. Forest Service, roughly three million people visit the national forest each year, making it one of the hot spots in West Virginia. 

And, it’s no wonder, with more than 500 hiking trails, countless streams and fishing holes, plenty of picnic spots, and places to stay, the Monongahela National Forest is a prime spot for any outdoor lover. Here, in no particular order, are the best experiences in the Monongahela National Forest.

While I was hosted for my West Virginia stay, all opinions are my own.

1. Cabins Of Kelly Mountain

If you’re an outdoor lover but want to be pampered, a stay at the Cabins of Kelly Mountain will be perfect for you! Situated at the edge of the Monongahela National Forest, the Cabins of Kelly Mountain offer a secluded stay amid the forest yet conveniently just minutes away from downtown Elkins. 

This property includes four large cabins all connected via redwood decking out front. The Cabins of Kelly Mountain would be the perfect spot for a multi-gen family trip with each family in their own cabin but only a stone’s throw away from each other. The cozy setting would also be a spectacular spot for a romantic retreat. The two-bed, two-bath cabin we stayed in was deluxe — complete with a large sauna inside and a bubbling hot tub on the deck outside. 

Our homey cabin had everything we needed, including coffee — no need to make that morning coffee run. We loved the large, ultra-comfy king beds, and the floor-to-ceiling windows provided great views of the elm and yellow poplar trees. The spotless cabins featured rustic furniture; much of it made of reclaimed wood from Hurricane Katrina. This property is a small, well-cared-for place with all the comforts of home.

2. Seneca Rocks

Head to Seneca Rocks to enjoy the outdoors and do a little hiking, rock climbing, fishing, or simply take in the scenery. The rocky formation is one of the area’s best-known spots to enjoy the outdoors. Start at the Seneca Rocks Discovery Center and follow the trailhead for a short 1.3-mile out-and-back hike that climbs to an observation platform near the top of the rocks. This short and steep trail gains over 700 feet in elevation! There are places to rest along the trail, so you can take your time. 

If you like heights and want to take in even more amazing views, hike to the top of Seneca Rocks. If you’re not keen on this sort of thing, you’ll still get gorgeous West Virginia views from below. Alternatively, if you’re not into hiking, how about horseback riding or climbing? You can do either at Seneca Rocks and both options are quite popular. West Virginia in general is known to be a great place for rock climbing. Another favorite where climbers test their skills (and their nerves) is the popular New River Gorge.

3. Elkins, West Virginia

Elkins is a town of about 6,000 residents that sits in the Appalachian Mountains, at the edge of the Monongahela Forest. We enjoyed quite a few local restaurants in Elkins, many of them in the cute old-fashioned downtown area. This is the type of small town that seems to be a throwback to earlier times. It’s the kind of small town where you can set your watch by the church bells that ring daily at noon. If you want to be close to outdoor activities like hiking, fishing, and biking, but want good meals and a nice place to stay at the end of your day, Elkins is a good bet.

Pro Tip: Try CJ Maggie’s for a delicious lunch. They’re one of the few spots we found open on Sunday.

4. Thomas, West Virginia

After several locals recommended we check out the nearby town of Thomas, we hopped into the car and made the short drive to the quaint mountain town. At about 3,500 feet, the drive from Elkins to Thomas was full of twists and turns, and spectacular scenery. There are quite a few roadside pull-outs where you can take in the view and grab the perfect photo, which we did a few times. 

Thomas and nearby Davis are popular mountain escapes for urbanites in D.C., Baltimore, and Pittsburgh. It’s only a few hours from the hustle of the city, yet you’re seemingly worlds away once you’re here. We enjoyed shopping in the unique shops and galleries along Front Street. 

The Purple Fiddle

While you’re here, make sure to stop into the Purple Fiddle. This cool spot is home to live acoustic Appalachian music shows that are open to all ages, a deli food menu, and a good selection of craft beers. This is a place you can bring your grandkids and they can have an ice cream while you enjoy an Irish coffee and listen to great music. I can’t wait to go back and catch some Appalachian folk music. The Purple Fiddle, along with unique shops and art boutiques, make Thomas a must-visit spot in the area.

5. Blackwater Falls State Park

More outdoor fun awaits at Blackwater Falls State Park. This 446-acre park, which has been within the parks system since the 1930s, is a popular spot near Davis, West Virginia. Whether you’re looking to hike, sled, fish, or just relax in nature, you can do it all at Blackwater Falls. The park is home to more than 20 miles of hiking trails, along with pristine fishing waters, disc golf, and more. 

Pro Tip: The Blackwater Falls State Park Lodge, with more than 50 rooms, is just one of the places to stay within the park. You can also check out more than 30 cabins, and of course, there is camping as well.

6. Trout Fishing 

West Virginia is home to great fishing. Whether you want to fish from a boat or try your hand at fly fishing, you’ll find places in the Monongahela Forest. The Elkins, West Virginia, area is known for its fantastic trout fishing, with anglers coming from all over to cast their line in search of rainbow, golden, and brook varieties. The Cranberry River is one of the most popular spots in the state for fly fishing and it has even been named one of America’s 100 best trout streams!

7. Spruce Knob 

The highest peak in the Allegheny Mountains, Randolph County’s Spruce Knob is an impressive 4,863 feet above sea level and boasts great views. The Whispering Spruce Trail is a half-mile trail on Spruce Knob where you can take in the view from a variety of vantage points. While you’re here, be sure to check out the Mountain Center Observation Tower perched atop the knob. This tower offers unbelievable views day or night. Many people put Randolph County at the top of their list for dark-sky viewing opportunities. Since there’s so little light pollution in the area, you can see the galaxies above and beyond!

8. Dolly Sods Wilderness 

A hiker and backpacker’s haven, Dolly Sods is a wilderness area that consists of over 17,000 acres near Davis. This gorgeous area is open year-round, but your best bet is to go in the spring, summer, or fall as the roads aren’t plowed in winter. If you’re looking for a great spot to get away from it all, check out under-the-radar Dolly Sods for pristine beauty and quiet surroundings.

Related Reading:

• 5 Charming West Virginia Mountain Towns Perfect For A Day Trip From Washington, D.C.
• 10 Backwoods West Virginia Cabin Rentals To Enjoy Fall Foliage
• 10 Wonderful Hikes In West Virginia

Saranac Lake and Lake Placid combine to provide fun and exciting outdoor experiences for the intrepid adventure seeker and, also, the soft outdoor adventure enthusiast. Hiking, boating, fishing, and camping are to be expected in Upstate New York. Some unexpected outdoor adventure ideas include lake tobogganing, ice climbing, Olympic skiing, an abolitionist’s farm, and a festive winter carnival.

Note: Some information in this piece was obtained during a sponsored press trip, but all recommendations are my own.

1. Hiking 

Saranac Lake, New York

The 1-mile Riverwalk that runs along the Saranac River is an easy, paved path on the edge of downtown Saranac Lake. The busy path is filled with walkers enjoying the outdoors with their friends, family, and fur babies. It is the perfect spot to stroll along the riverbank.

Scattered around downtown Saranac Lake is the Bug Crawl. Seven larger-than-life bug sculptures dot the area for your artistic enjoyment. If you are traveling with little ones, going on a bug hunt is a fun way to keep them active and engaged.

Pro Tip: According to AllTrails, there are 14 hiking trails in the Saranac Lake area. From the easy-rated 17.3-mile Upper Saranac Paddle Route to the harder 7.9-mile Jackrabbit Trail to Haystack Mountain, there are hiking trails for everyone who wants to get outside and explore the beautiful Adirondack scenery.

2. Boating

Saranac Lake, New York

With so many lakes to choose from, you can launch your boat and explore a new area every day. Whether you are on a peaceful kayaking excursion or a pontoon party boat, you will find your best boating getaway on Saranac Lake. The Franklin County Boat Launch list reveals over 20 launch sites across the county.

Pro Tip: Lower Saranac Lake and Middle Saranac Lake are accessed through a series of locks. You can explore the lakes with the complete boating and fishing map at Green Goat Maps.

3. Fishing

Saranac Lake, New York

In the Saranac Lakes region, you could haul in northern pike, walleye, perch, rainbow trout, and bass (large and small mouth). Whether you are a catch-and-release angler or a hunter-gatherer working on your next meal, the fishing in Saranac Lake is just waiting for you to explore.

Pro Tip: If you don’t have a boat or need a guide, NY Fisherman has an extensive list of Adirondack fishing guides to get you out on the water to explore all the great fishing spots for a good line tug.

4. Skiing And Snowboarding

Whiteface Mountain, New York

Home of the 1980 Olympic alpine ski events, Whiteface Mountain is the premiere skiing/boarding mountain in Lake Placid. With a peak elevation of 4,867 feet, 94 trails covering 22 miles, and 11 lift options, you will love skiing at Whiteface Mountain.

It is easy to enjoy Whiteface Mountain in the summer months too. They offer great hiking, scenic gondola rides, and a disc golf course.

Pro Tip: The Whiteface Veterans Memorial Highway is a seasonal drive offering stunning panoramic views; it is also a toll road that is closed in the off-season. If you want to see the mountain or go skiing, be sure to turn where the flashing “ski resort” signs are along the roadway. Directions to both the ski resort and scenic drive can be found here.

5. Tobogganing 

Lake Placid Toboggan Chute, New York

Just a short walk from the center of town is the Lake Placid Toboggan Chute. Winter fun for the young and young at heart, the 30-foot-tall converted ski jump turned toboggan chute is sure to give you a smile.

Climb up the slide and take a thrilling ride down the ice-covered chute. At the end, you will slide onto and across a frozen Mirror Lake. After a few runs, head over to the downtown area for a hot lunch at the breakfast club, etc. for a salted caramel latte or your favorite anti-chill beverage.

Pro Tip: To ensure all riders’ safety, the tobogganing season is dependent on the depth of ice on Mirror Lake.

6. Forest Bathing

Mount Pisgah Recreation Center, Saranac Lake

The sunlight casts a dappled pattern on the forest floor as you follow your guide. A local naturalist will help you connect with the trees, sounds, and aromas of the Adirondacks. Forest bathing insists you slow down, breathe deep, and just be — no agenda, no yoga, just you and the trees.

Pro Tip: The 2.5-hour guided tours are available seasonally, from early April until the end of November.

7. Saranac Lake Winter Carnival

Saranac Lake, New York

If you plan your Saranac Lake visit during February, you can join in all the cold weather fun at the Saranac Lake Winter Carnival. Winter games like curling, arctic golf, skiing, fun runs, fry pan tosses, and other wonderful hometown shenanigans make this a festive time all through the streets of Saranac Lake. Live music, parades, and fireworks abound for the more passive carnival attendee.

8. Ice Climbing

Lake Placid, New York

Not for the inexperienced or faint of heart, ice climbing is a popular winter and early spring sport in the Adirondacks. Ice walls with names like Pitchoff, Cascade Pass, and Multiplication Gully throw a chilly challenge to even the most dedicated ice climber.

Pro Tip: Secure the services of a highly recommended, local, and experienced ice climbing guide for this off-the-charts outdoor adventure.

9. John Brown Farm

Lake Placid, New York

The abolitionist who organized the 1859 assault on the U.S. Arsenal at Harpers Ferry, John Brown, is laid to rest on his family farm in his beloved Adirondack Mountains. Docent-guided tours of Brown’s home and farm bring the family and their freedom-fighting to life.

The John Brown Farm State Historic Site has several hiking trails, cross-country skiing, and periodic re-enactments. The farm’s gentle slopes and pretty pond are lovely spots for a picnic or some quiet meditation.

10. Olympic Jumping Complex

Lake Placid, New York

Now, you can’t ski jump at the Olympic Jumping Complex unless you are in a competition, but you can watch experienced skiers take the death-defying run down the 128-meter and 100-meter ski jumps. You can get a feel for the rush down the run by trying out the zip line located next to the 100-meter jump; no skis are required.

For something a little less hair-raising, book a trip on the Skyride, a newly installed gondola that runs alongside the jumps. The gondola takes you to the base of the jumping towers, then you board a glass elevator that takes you to the sky deck of the 128-meter jumping platform. Be sure to bring your camera; the breathtaking panoramic view of Lake Placid and the surrounding mountains is spectacular.

11. Camping

Saranac Lakes Island Campground, Saranac Lake

Saranac Lakes Island Campground is a perfect spot for campers who want boating access to the lakes. Sporting 87 campsites and 5-day sites along with a boat launch area, you will love being in the middle of #LakeLife. Boating, fishing, and camping are true Saranac Lake showstopping outdoor experiences. All you need to round out the day is some dry firewood and a s’mores kit.

Pro Tip: Saranac Lakes Island Campground is open from mid-May through mid-September.

Saranac Waterfront Lodge 

Saranac Lake, New York

When you are physically spent from all your fantastic outdoor adventures, return to your cozy space at the Saranac Waterfront Lodge. You will love relaxing on an iconic Adirondack chair with a view of Flower Lake from the back lawn. It is a lovely spot to enjoy the pretty Saranac Lake sunset. If you want to be close by for dinner, the porch at the adjoining Boathouse Saranac Lake Pub is the perfect spot for a delicious meal with a view.

Pro Tip: The Saranac Waterfront Lodge is located away from the bustle of downtown Saranac Lake, but it is close enough to walk to town and enjoy the town center.

Visiting Saranac Lake

The Adirondack Mountains are a wonderful spot to enjoy fun and exciting outdoor adventures during the winter and summer months. Saranac Lake is a central hub for your Upstate New York getaway. With stunning views, on-the-water sports, a rich history of Olympic events, mountain hiking, and on-the-snow experiences, Saranac Lake will entice you to embrace the outdoors while experiencing some exciting adventures.

Related Reading:

• 17 Must-Visit Quaint Towns In Upstate New York
• 12 Famous Foods To Try On New York’s Upstate Eats Trail
• 16 Upstate New York Spots To Enjoy A Unique Sip

The UK might not be the first destination you think of when you imagine beautiful waterfalls, but when you consider our climate — wet and rainy a lot of the time — it’s obvious that we would have our fair share of beautiful waterfalls. After all, all that water has to go somewhere. We might not have exotic locations for our falls or guaranteed sunshine, but we do have dramatic landscapes and interesting terrains. 

Some of these waterfalls are very easy to reach, while others require a bit of an expedition to get to them, but that’s all part of the fun. Here’s my pick of the most beautiful waterfalls to visit in the UK.

1. Mallyan Spout

North Yorkshire

The North Yorkshire Moors has a few stunning waterfalls, but at 70 feet high, Mallyan Spout is the tallest. It is dramatic and incredible once you reach this waterfall, but it’s not all that easy to get to. If you have any mobility issues or you’re at all unsteady on your feet, this one might not be for you. But if you like an adventurous walk, getting to Mallyan Spout is part of the experience of this waterfall. The easiest way to get to the waterfall is to follow the path from The Mallyan Spout Hotel, but whichever way you go, you have to walk over some slippery rocks when you get closer to the waterfall. You can’t see the waterfall without hiking down to it, but once you get down there, it is an incredible sight. On a warm sunny day, you can stand right under it. I took a picnic when I visited and sat on the rocks with the river in front of me, and it was idyllic.

2. Falls Of Glomach

Rosshire, Scotland

While Mallyan Spout is the tallest waterfall in Yorkshire at 70 feet, The Falls of Glomach are some of the tallest in the entire UK at 113 feet. The falls are even tougher to get to than Mallyan Spout, but it is a very remote location and you stand a good chance of having the waterfall all to yourself when you get there. This area can’t be reached by car and it’s a 6-hour round hike with no cell phone reception on the moor, so be prepared and make sure you’ve told someone where you are going. It’s definitely not for anyone with any mobility issues, but if you like a good hike, you are rewarded with some spectacular scenery when you reach the falls. You can also look out for wildlife along the way, as this area has herds of red deer and golden eagles.

3. Aira Force

Lake District

For a waterfall that’s much easier to get to, with a gentler walk, there’s Aira Force in the Lake District, which is a very popular waterfall with visitors to this area — probably because it is so easy to get to. There’s a car park nearby and you can easily walk the rest of the way from there, so it’s completely doable for anyone to walk and you don’t need to be an experienced hiker. The falls are 72 feet tall and you can view them from the bottom where you can see the water gushing through crags in the rocks, or there’s a lovely old bridge over the falls at the top that you can stand on. The view down below is incredible and it makes a great stop for a photo. This is a lovely place to take a picnic, but it is very popular and there’s likely to be a lot of people visiting no matter when you go.

4. Waterfall Country

Powys, Wales

Waterfall Country covers an area of the Brecon Beacons in Wales with a number of waterfalls in close proximity to one another. The most popular way to see some of these falls is by taking the four falls walk. The four falls walk takes about 3 hours to complete and features some really spectacular waterfalls, not to mention the scenery in between them. It’s considered an easy hike and anyone with any walking experience will find it comfortable, but it’s not accessible to wheelchairs and anyone with any mobility issues might find it difficult. Most people who do this walk are heading for Sgwd Yr Eira, a waterfall you can stand behind. It’s a memorable experience and a great photo opportunity.

5. Gaping Gill

North Yorkshire

Gaping Gill is one of the tallest waterfalls in the UK, but that’s not what makes it so special or unusual. This is a very tall waterfall that falls underground into a cave. The cave itself is used by potholers and is very popular with cavers, but members of the public can only descend into this cave twice a year when the weather is right and the Bradford and Craven Pothole Club sets up a winch over the edge. Yes, that’s right: There is only one way to get down there and it’s not for the faint-hearted. Personally, as someone with a fear of heights, I can’t think of anything worse and I’ve never been down, but if you like the idea and can time it right, it’s a once-in-a-lifetime experience. It actually might not be as scary as it sounds. You sit in what looks like a ski chair and you’re lowered down into the cave. Who knows, maybe one day I’ll give it a try!

6. High Force

County Durham

There’s a clue in the name of this waterfall that tells you what you’re going to find when you visit High Force. This isn’t the tallest waterfall in the UK, but it does have the largest volume of water that falls over an unbroken drop. It’s a force of nature, for sure, and it looks spectacular. This is an extremely popular waterfall with visitors; so popular that it has its own visitor center and gift shop, and it’s the only waterfall on my list that has an admission charge. At around $2.75 for adults, it’s not much of a charge, but it’s still unusual. This charge goes towards maintaining the paths that lead to the waterfall, making it a very well-kept route that’s easy for everyone to use. Part of the route does have some uneven ground underfoot and there’s a big flight of stairs, but it is still one of the most accessible waterfalls in the UK.

7. Steal Falls

Highlands, Scotland

The area this waterfall is located in is more famous for Britain’s highest mountain, Ben Nevis, but this mountainous landscape is also the perfect terrain for a beautiful waterfall or two. Steal Falls is also known locally as the White Spout; once you’ve seen it, it’s easy to understand why. The water tumbles down the hillside almost delicately, as opposed to a gush of water, and it’s quite mesmerizing to watch. It’s a gentle walk to the falls that takes about an hour and although good footwear is recommended, the terrain is suitable for all levels of fitness and hiking experience. This is one of the most beautiful waterfalls you’ll see in the UK. The combination of the awe-inspiring mountains and the water tumbling down its side is quite humbling.

Pro Tip

Most of these waterfalls, with a couple of exceptions, don’t have any facilities nearby and are pretty remote, so taking a picnic is a good idea. Always wear good walking shoes and be prepared for any kind of weather. And if the waterfall is very remote, make sure someone knows where you have gone — cell phone reception can be patchy in remote areas. Stick to the footpaths and trails. Sometimes, all that guides you in the UK is a yellow arrow on a post, but make sure you follow this as surrounding areas may be private land.

To learn more about Samantha’s UK adventures, check out these articles:

• 5 Fabulous Things To Do In England’s Second City
• 6 Gorgeous Scenic Drives To Experience In Scotland
• These 8 Scenic Train Rides Have The Most Stunning Views In Scotland

San Juan Island is one of 172 islands making up the San Juan Islands off the northern coast of Washington State. The second largest island in the archipelago is 20 miles long and 7 miles wide. With incredible ocean views, rolling hills, farms, and fields, San Juan is a delightful getaway from the hustle and bustle of the city.

The scenery is magnificent, but whale watching is the highlight of a trip to San Juan Island. Here are my tips for whale watching on scenic San Juan Island.

The San Juan Islands Visitors Bureau, Friday Harbor House, and Lakedale sponsored my trip. All thoughts and opinions are my own.

1. Whales To Watch For

Killer Whales (Orcas) are the main attraction off San Juan Island. The characteristic black body and white markings are unique and allow for the identification of individuals. Three pods make the Salish Sea home. The pods are named J, K, and L pods. Orcas travel together in matrilineal groups led by the eldest female. Research shows that each pod has a distinctive vocal dialect. About 90 percent of their diet is salmon. The transient orcas also feast on sea lions.

2. Start Your Visit At The Whale Museum

The perfect place to start your visit is The Whale Museum at Friday Harbor. There are two floors to the museum. The first floor houses small exhibits, video presentations, and a gift shop. The second floor is a large exhibit room. View life-sized models and complete skeletons to appreciate the size of these mammals. Listen to the “whale songs” when you step into the phone book in the large exhibit hall. Take time to view the informative videos.

At the museum, you can also “adopt” an orca. See the photos of all the resident orcas and choose which one you want to support.

3. How To Watch For Whales From Land

Head to Lime Kiln Point State Park, also known as Whale Watch Park, on the island’s southwestern shore. Take the San Juan Scenic Byway from Friday Harbor, about 9 miles to the park entrance. As one of the locals explained, “If you are going to see whales from land, this is the place to do it!” Lime Kiln is the only park in the U.S. dedicated solely to whale watching and it overlooks Haro Strait, waters favored by the whales. The 41-acre park has a variety of viewpoints, picnic tables, bathrooms, a visitor center, and a 1919 lighthouse. At the lighthouse, enjoy listening to whales with the underwater hydrophone. Take time to read the interpretive displays along the pathway.

Pro Tips: You need to pay for parking or display your Discover Pass. You can purchase a day pass or a yearly pass online. Or there is a kiosk at the park. The day pass is $11.50 and an annual pass is $35. Remember park and beach etiquette: Take nothing and leave nothing behind. The Internet doesn’t always work along the west coast of the island, so I suggest you either bring a printed map or download one onto your phone.

4. How To Watch For Whales From A Sea Tour

Enjoy whale watching and wildlife sightings with San Juan Safaris. Voted #1 Echo Adventure Tour in the Pacific Northwest, San Juan Safaris proudly upholds the guidelines for respectful wildlife viewing. Local naturalists provide fascinating commentary on the area and wildlife.

Our 3.5-hour tour gave us plenty of opportunities to observe orcas as well as sea lions and bald eagles.

Packing Hints: Dress in layers; it can be chilly out on the water. Wear sturdy closed-toe shoes and bring a hat and gloves. Also, bring a non-breakable water bottle and some snacks to enjoy. Remember your binoculars.

Pro Tip: The San Juan Safari Office is just steps from the ferry landing terminal at Friday Harbor. As such, parking can be tricky. The closest parking spots are limited to 2 hours. Plan to park your vehicle at least three blocks away, either on Spring Street or First Street by the Courthouse. Be sure to allow extra time for this so you can catch your sailing.

5. How To Watch For Whales While Kayaking

Kayaking is very popular around San Juan Island. If you are looking for whales, begin your journey off Roche Harbor on the island’s northern coast.

Several companies offer guided paddles of various lengths. One of the locals recommended always having a guide for the first kayak trip.

San Juan Safaris also offers kayaking tours, including a 3-hour Sanctuary Whale Watching Cruise out of Roche Harbor.

6. Learn How To Be “Whale Wise”

The ocean is a fragile environment and can be harmed by human activities. Help protect marine wildlife by learning the guidelines and laws at this site.

Stay 400 yards away from the whales at all times. 

Check that any guide or tour is a Pacific Whale Watch Association or San Juan Islands Kayak Association member. Members of these organizations are committed to education, conservation, and responsible wildlife viewing.

Visit the website www.ssamn.org to learn more about green practices, toxins, and how you can help at home. Also, be sure to choose a company that utilizes locally-certified naturalists.

Fun Fact: These are the home waters of Lolita, the orca captured in 1970. After 50 years of captivity, the Miami Seaquarium will be returning Lolita to the Salish Sea. Check the link for updates.

Where To Dine

Rocky Bay Cafe

From casual to elegant, San Juan Island has a dining experience to please all. Begin your day at Rocky Bay Cafe for a hearty, delicious breakfast. Rocky Bay is a local favorite located on Spring Street in Friday Harbor.

Harbor House Restaurant

Enjoy dining at the Harbor House Restaurant in Friday Harbor. While marveling at the harbor view, begin with an island-inspired cocktail like the PNW Martini. I enjoyed the Prawn & Pesto Pasta: house-made lemon trottole pasta, prawns, pine-nut pesto, and crumbled feta. Teamed with the Boston Bibb Salad, this was a lovely dinner.

Duck Soup

Another of my favorite dining spots is the seafood restaurant, Duck Soup, located a mere 5 miles north of Friday Harbor on Roche Harbor Road. A local favorite since 1978, the rustic setting and creative dishes make for a delightful evening. Begin your meal with house-baked warm sourdough bread, olive pate, and whipped butter. This has been a staple since 1978. For my entrée, I chose the scallops with curry beurre blanc, cilantro black rice, and chili crisp bok choy. What a delicious combination!

Where To Stay

Friday Harbor House sits atop a bluff about a block from the ferry terminal. The hotel offers unparalleled views of the ferry terminal, marina, and the San Juan Channel. You are only minutes away from shops and restaurants. Check into the Relax and Rejuvenate Package offering keepsake Boca Terry Friday Harbor spa robes, the Rose All-Day spa bundle, and two splits of rose prosecco. There is also a yoga mat in each room.

Looking for another unique San Juan Island experience? Head 4 miles north of Friday Harbor on Roche Harbor Road to Lakedale. The resort offers both lodging and glamping options throughout the 82 lakeside acres. This is the first time I have stayed in a deluxe yurt. What a treat! Spacious, with a full kitchen, hot tub, and private deck, I was won over by the upscale yurt experience.

How To Get To San Juan Island

Located approximately 100 miles north of Seattle, most folks arrive via ferry. From Seattle, drive north on Interstate 5 to milepost 230, and follow State Route 20 West to Anacortes and the ferry terminal. The Anacortes Ferry takes you to the scenic town of Friday Harbor.

Check for schedules and current ferry conditions from Anacortes to Friday Harbor.

Pro Tip: You can purchase tickets online and in advance. I strongly recommend also making reservations. Ferry travelers are charged only on the westbound trip. For shuttle service from Sea-Tac Airport to Anacortes Ferry Terminal, contact Airporter Shuttle Service.

San Juan Island is a destination that offers relaxation and nature. The “island life” is rejuvenation at its finest. Plan a visit soon; you will be glad you did!

Related Reading:

• 8 Reasons Winter Is The Perfect Time To Visit Gorgeous Orcas Island, Washington
• 6 Charming Small Towns Not To Miss In Southwest Washington State
• 3 Lesser-Known Islands To Visit In Washington State’s Beautiful San Juan Archipelago

Retiro Park is a hotspot for locals and tourists in the heart of Madrid. This beautiful public park offers a place to escape the hustle and bustle of the city to enjoy a few moments of peace and relaxation. Retiro Park, initially designed as a private retreat space for the Spanish Royal Family, is now one of the biggest parks in Madrid. A visit to Parque del Buen Retiro offers visitors the opportunity to enjoy gorgeous greenspaces, beautiful monuments, galleries, and many picturesque buildings.

During my recent visit to Madrid, I thought I would run into the park, see the lake and Crystal Palace, and leave. Instead, I found myself exploring Retiro Park for hours! I found it peaceful and serene while having a lively, fun atmosphere making me want to linger just a bit longer. 

Let’s dive into all the fantastic things to see in Madrid’s Retiro Park.

1. Lago Del Retiro (Retiro Lake)

Retiro Lake is one of the highlights of Madrid’s Retiro Park. The man-made lake was completed in the early 1600s and is located in the middle of the expansive park. This beautiful lake is the perfect little oasis within the park. A popular activity on Retiro Lake is to rent one of the small boats and enjoy some time out on the water.

While boating, visitors enjoy rowing around the peaceful lake while feeding the large grouper fish that call it home. In addition to paddling on Retiro Lake, people often walk the lake’s perimeter or sunbathe on the lake’s edge. During my time at the lake, I loved seeing all of the families around enjoying a perfectly sunny day in Madrid.

The water’s edge is also home to the massive columns and statues that make up the monument to Alfonso XII. Take time to explore the monument up close to understand the size of this massive structure.

Pro Tip: If you visit the park on a Sunday, be on the lookout for the musicians that gather near the Alfonso XII Monument. This is an extra special treat!

2. Palacio De Cristal (The Crystal Palace)

One of the most popular attractions in Retiro Park is the Palacio de Cristal, or Crystal Palace. Originally built to house exotic plants, the Crystal Palace is now home to fabulous art exhibits and is a tourist hotspot. The Palacio de Cristal is free to enter, making it one of the fabulous free things to do in Madrid.

The Crystal Palace really cannot be missed. Just look for the large structure made of glass. The glass windows surrounding the structure provide incredible views of the small pond and green area surrounding the Palacio de Cristal. The side of the palace closest to the pond also provides numerous terraced areas perfect for a beautiful photo. For an incredible photo of the Crystal Palace, head to the opposite side of the little pond. This vantage point will allow you to capture the gorgeous vegetation and water with the palace in the background. 

Pro Tip: The line to enter the Crystal Palace can sometimes be long as they limit the number of guests inside. Try to visit on a weekday to avoid waiting in such a long line. 

3. Casita Del Pescador (Fisherman’s House)

While touring Retiro Park, you will probably stumble upon a small picturesque cottage located on a man-made island in the middle of a pond. This is Casita del Pescador. Thanks to the beautiful pink color adorning the structure, you can’t miss it.

According to the informational signs in the park, the Casita del Pescador was built by Ferdinand VII following the War of Independence. The Casita del Pescador served as the Fisherman’s House, where the king and some of his court would go fishing. Today, this park area is a tranquil green space that is the perfect place to relax and enjoy a picnic under the trees. Located next to the park is a small hill with a waterfall.

4. Ruinas De San Isidoro De Avila (Ruins Of The Church Of Saint Isidore Of Ávila)

Believe it or not, Retiro Park is also home to a set of ruins! The Ruinas de San Isidoro de Avila are located directly behind the Casita del Pescador and are easy to spot. There is no entry fee to see the ruins and they are an interesting addition to the city’s park.

Note that the ruins are relatively small in scale, so if you run low on time, you might skip seeing this. However, if you are a history lover, you will probably want to be sure and include the ruins on your Retiro Park itinerary.

5. Palacio Del Velazquez (Velazquez Palace)

Visitors will find the Palacio del Velazquez between Retiro Lake and the Crystal Palace. The Velazquez Palace is part of the Reina Sofia Museum and is worth some of your time while visiting Retiro Park. 

The Palacio del Velazquez is home to contemporary exhibitions and special events. In addition to the exhibits and events, the area around Velazquez Palace offers a serene environment, making it a great place to have a picnic or enjoy reading a book underneath a shaded tree. During our visit to Retiro Park, this area seemed less crowded than other areas. Adding Velazquez Palace to your list of things to see in Retiro Park is a definite win.

6. Jardines De Cecilio Rodriguez (Cecilio Rodriguez Gardens)

Jardines de Cecilio Rodriguez is a gorgeous area of Retiro Park that shouldn’t be missed. The area comprises beautiful concrete pavers and perfectly-manicured shrubbery, making you feel like you have been transported to a perfect English garden. The Jardines de Cecilio Rodriguez can be difficult to find, so check a park map. It is an enclosed garden located on one side of the park.

The tranquil maze-like bushes combined with the trees and small ponds make you feel like you have been transported to another land. The gardens’ natural elements are accentuated with beautiful statues and sculptures, adding to the appeal. During your time in the Jardines de Cecilio Rodriguez, be on the lookout for the resident peacocks that call this garden home. We had a great time taking photos of the peacocks while following them around the tranquil gardens. 

7. La Rosaleda (Rose Garden)

Retiro Park’s Rose Garden is delightful to visit any time of year, but especially in springtime. The circular rose gardens are home to over 4,000 species of roses, making the garden a delight to visit in the late spring and summer months. 

While the garden is great to visit during any season, the Rose Garden comes alive from May through June with fragrant blossoms boasting beautiful colors like yellow, red, pink, and white. The beautiful trellises throughout the garden are covered in ivy and roses, only adding to the beauty of this glorious garden. Spread throughout the garden, you will also enjoy numerous benches and fountains. This was one of my favorite gardens in Retiro Park. In addition to the great smell, I found the Rose Garden to be the perfect atmosphere to sit in and take a moment to enjoy the fact that I was in Madrid, Spain!

8. Museo Nacional Del Prado (Prado Museum)

Just outside of Retiro Park is one of Spain’s premier museums, the Museo Nacional del Prado. The Prado Museum is a world-class museum home to an awe-inspiring collection of European art. The museum has an impressive permanent collection that draws in visitors from all over the world. In addition to the Prado Museum’s permanent collection, it also hosts rotating exhibits and special events throughout the year.

It is important to note that the Prado has a vast collection and you could easily spend all day exploring the museum. If you want to see the main art pieces, allow for about 3 hours of your time. 

For complete information, please visit the Prado Museum website.

9. Paseo De Las Estatuas (Walkway Of The Statues)

Paseo de las Estatuas, also known as the Paseo de la Argentina, is a broad promenade in Retiro Park lined with statues dedicated to Spanish monarchs. As you walk along the paseo, which leads you to Retiro Lake, you get a glimpse into the vast history of the Spanish monarchy.

10. The Fallen Angel Statue

The Fallen Angel statue in Retiro Park is a unique and interesting addition that shouldn’t be missed. The Fallen Angel statue is located atop a large fountain within Retiro Park. The fountain is located at the Paseo de Cuba, Paseo Uruguay, and Paseo Fernan Nunez intersection. Atop the fountain is a beautifully-carved statue depicting the devil being cast out of heaven. I found the details in the statue’s facial expression mesmerizing and found myself analyzing it from every angle. The Fallen Angel statue was a popular attraction during our visit to Retiro Park and had a decent-sized crowd gathered around it, making it hard to get a good picture of the statue. Nonetheless, I highly recommend adding it to your Retiro Park itinerary, especially if you are an art lover.

Aren’t you scared?

It is a question I get a lot — or at least some variant of it. The answer is always no, not really.

I’m an avid hiker and often find myself participating solo. After all, if I always waited for someone to be available to go with me, I’d probably still be sitting on the sofa in my living room. When a friend had to bow out of a hike into the Grand Canyon, I had an unexpected decision to make. Rather than cancel the trip, I decided to ditch my fears and go solo.

Hiking is a fantastic way to enjoy nature and get off the beaten path when exploring a new destination. With a bit of preparation, you can feel safe while hiking solo. So, don’t miss out if you can’t find a hiking buddy. 

Here are my favorite tips for staying safe and feeling comfortable on a solo hike.

1. Know Your Ability And Your Limits

I’m putting this one first because it’s essential. When researching a destination, we can all get caught up in the swoon-worthy photos of majestic peaks and roaring waterfalls, but it’s important not to bite off more than you can chew. Look at the mileage (don’t forget those miles on the trail are more difficult than on a sidewalk) and elevation gain. 

Stick to well-traveled and popular trails. Even though you’re solo, you’ll most likely encounter other hikers at least every thirty minutes or so. At some of the most popular routes, you’ll never be out of the eyesight of others on the trail.

Know what you can handle initially and build from there, working your way up to the longer hike. When it comes to your body, a little challenge is a good thing. Please resist the temptation to overdo it or get in over your head.

Editor’s Note: Use the AllTrails filters to identify a hike that best fits your ability and goals. You can search for hiking difficulty rating (easy, moderate, hard), trail length and elevation, view weather forecasts, read user reviews, and discover trails that are popular or highly trafficked.

2. Plan Your Hike And Hike Your Plan

Rushing out without a proper plan is just asking for trouble. There are many resources available to you to pick the perfect trail. AllTrails is the most trusted and used outdoors platform in the world that helps people explore the outdoors with hand-curated trail maps along with hiking difficulty rating, trail length, and trail reviews from a global community of over 50 million trail-goers.. 

Pro Tip: Remember that reviews are subjective. One person’s rating of hard can easily be someone else’s warmup. Be sure to be comfortable with the distance and the elevation gain. Use the AllTrails+ Trail Previews feature to get a feel for the trail before leaving home. Checkout the terrain, elevation at specific points, and get an immersive preview of any trail. 

If you’re in a state or national park, rangers are available at the visitor’s centers to assist you in choosing the perfect adventure, and they, of course, have tons of intel on what to expect. 

3. A Word About Wildlife

We all want to see a mama deer with her babies in a field or a majestic hawk swooping and soaring overhead, but we probably draw the line at some of the wildlife we perceive as threatening.

Most animals are skittish and want to steer clear of you. They won’t willingly attack unless they feel threatened by you or someone in your group. The best way to achieve this non-threatening approach is to keep your distance from wildlife on the trail. The appropriate distance varies by species, but a good rule of thumb is that you are too close if you cause the animal to move.

4. Bring A Whistle

A whistle can be helpful in many situations, from warding off unleashed dogs to alerting rescue crews if you are injured or lost. Sometimes whistles are already attached or built into a backpack. If your pack doesn’t come with a whistle, this one from Whistles for LIFE will do the trick.

5. Don’t Rely On Your Phone

Technology is excellent, and it’s easy to assume that help is merely a phone call away, but cell coverage is unreliable on the trail. Typically I put my phone on airplane mode and use it only as a camera. This prevents the battery from draining while constantly searching for a signal. Plus, who wants to hear the ubiquitous chime of an iPhone while out enjoying nature? 

With AllTrails+, you can download maps so you know where you are, even without cell service, and access them offline or in airplane mode. You can also print maps in advance if you prefer a paper reference.

I prefer a paper map in my backpack (bonus points if it’s in a baggie, so it can’t get wet). Also, snap a picture of the trail map and info that’s typically on the signage at the trailhead.

6. Tell Someone Where You’re Going

When I first started hiking, I was about four miles out in the Talladega National Forest on a gorgeous fall day when I tripped and fell. The fall didn’t hurt anything but my pride, but the incident got me thinking. I had decided to make the trek on a whim, driving about an hour from my home, and no one knew where I was. What if I had sprained an ankle or worse?

From then on, I started leaving my hike plan with my husband. I text him what time I’m starting, my route, the trails I’m using, and how long I expect to be out. I’ll even text him a picture of the trail map and information sign at the trailhead if possible. 

Editor’s Note: AllTrails+ includes a Lifeline feature, which alerts your designated emergency contacts about your planned start and ending time, as well as your starting and ending locations so they can track you.

7. Check The Weather

While most people worry about the wildlife (see above), they often don’t give the weather much thought. This is a big mistake. Even if the forecast is balmy and beautiful, throwing a few extra layers in your pack doesn’t hurt because you never know. Weather can change suddenly and, at the very least, ruin your fun. 

8. Trust Your Gut

If your instincts say something’s up, it probably is. If anything or anyone makes you uncomfortable, it’s okay to turn around and bail out early. I can honestly say that this has happened to me only once over hundreds of hikes. Hikers, hands down, seem to be some of the best people on the planet.

9. Carry The Ten Essentials

Some items have been listed previously, but here are the ten essentials for easy reference. I store them in my pack. Short or long hikes, these items should be with you no matter what:

• AllTrails+ navigation (topographic map and a compass)
• sun protection
• insulation/extra clothing
• illumination (headlamp or flashlight; spare batteries)
• first aid supplies
• fire-making supplies (butane lighters, waterproof matches, fire starters)
• knife and repair tools
• snacks
• water
• emergency shelter

Double-check before you head out to see if anything needs replacing or updating.

Don’t miss out on a hike because you’re solo. Enjoy nature’s beauty and the empowerment you’ll gain from ditching your fear.

Instead of being scared, be prepared. Save time, stay safe, and be prepared on the trail with AllTrails+. Try AllTrails+ for 7-days free!

It’s hard to read the news without seeing some mention of electric cars and how they’re slowly becoming the new standard on the road in America. But quietly, almost without any fanfare, electric bicycles (“e-bikes”) have moved into the mainstream of the biking world.

Annual sales of e-bikes in the U.S. is now passing a million units with growth in their sales far outpacing traditional bicycles and even electric cars and trucks. Once thought of as “cheating” in terms of exercise, e-bikes have been winning over skeptics as a crucial part of any household’s transportation mix. And we’ve found them to be the perfect fit for our retirement lifestyle.

1. E-Bikes Fit Into Our Retirement Budget

We started shopping for e-bikes nearly a year before our retirement. Like many first entering the e-bike market, the sticker shock is real. If your last bike purchase was that Huffy you bought from Walmart for $75 a dozen years ago, get ready to educate yourself on the e-bike market. Top-of-the-line models can go for $5,000 or more. But doing some research will show you there are top-quality e-bike brands for less than $1,000 that will deliver all the benefits you want.

My wife and I settled on the Aventon brand, buying a pair of matching Pace 350 e-bikes, paying about $1,200 each. Now with nearly 2 years of use and hundreds of miles on their odometers, we’ve been very pleased with their performance, durability, and reliability. For instance, maintenance has been very cheap for the bikes, with an annual visit to a local dealer that services Aventon e-bikes costing us around $50.

2. E-Bikes Added A Daily Fitness Routine To Our Lives

Once we hit retirement and moved to the Palm Springs area in California, we could really see how the e-bikes were going to make a difference in our fitness routine. With the open schedule retirees enjoy, we have been able to build in daily rides that make the most of the dry, sunny climate where we live. In the winter with temperatures usually in the 60s during the day, we pull on a windbreaker and can hit the road any time we want.

In the summer, when our daytime temperatures can easily reach 120 degrees, we plan for early morning rides to beat the dangerous heat. The beauty of e-bikes is that they allow us to exercise as much or as little as we like. We can turn off the electric assist and pedal it like a regular bicycle (albeit a fairly heavy one) and work up a sweat on every hill and mile.

Or we can use the electric throttle to fly up and down hills and along any road without even turning the pedals once. Typically, we like to use just a bit of an electric assist to level out the hills and give us some extra boosts of speed, all while we still get in a decent workout.

3. E-Bikes Replaced Our Car For Some Local Errands

Other than exercise, our e-bikes are a great alternative for a quick trip to the store or to attend a nearby event. Because the electric motor can do most of the work, there’s no fear we’ll be worn out from a shopping trip or too sweaty to meet up with friends at a nearby concert.

Just recently, we rode the bikes the 3 miles from our house to the site of an international tennis tournament. Foregoing our car for the bikes meant we dodged an expensive parking fee and a long line of cars waiting to get in and out of the event’s parking lots. We were able to ride to the front gate, lock the bikes to a rack and stroll right into the event — probably in less time than driving and parking the car would have taken.

We’ve invested in a pannier for each bike, a saddle bag of sorts that attaches to the back rack and hangs next to the rear wheel. The pannier gives us each the chance to carry home groceries and other items.

4. E-Bikes Showed Us A New Side Of Our Retirement Locale

Riding a bicycle through the neighborhoods around your home is far different than driving your car through the same streets. You literally see, hear, and smell things on the bike that you won’t in your car. There’s an easy ride for us that is about 10 miles roundtrip that takes us to the top of the area in La Quinta known as the “Cove.”

Covering every inch of that distance on our e-bikes means we appreciate the rugged mountain scenery and the local streets getting us there. It’s also more likely we’ll stop and get off the bikes to explore in a way we never would in our car. The e-bikes act as an appetizer to adventure, whetting our appetites for what is to come around each corner and sharpening our senses to keep a lookout for something new and exciting just ahead.

5. E-Bikes Opened New Places For Us To Explore — With Some Caveats

Our e-bike trips aren’t limited to just our neighborhood in La Quinta. We bought a two-bike rack for our car and had a trailer hitch attached to carry our bikes with us on the road. That makes it possible for us to take our e-bike adventures to other parts of the state and beyond. There are books and websites that suggest great bike rides around the country. Nearly all bike paths are open to e-bikes, though the rules can vary by state.

In California, for instance, e-bikes are allowed in state parks as long as they use designated roads and paths as noted on this website. E-bikes count as motorized vehicles in many states, so when planning a trip with your bikes, be sure to check in advance that you can take them along all the paths you plan to visit.

6. E-Bikes Gave Us A Way To Take Our Pet Along

Our e-bike adventures have grown by one passenger since the addition of a dog to our family and a special bike basket to hold her. Mounted on the handlebars, the padded and lined basket holds dogs up to 20 pounds to get a front seat view on any ride. It takes a little getting used to the extra weight up front on the handlebars, but once you get the hang of it, you can include the family pet on any e-bike adventure knowing the electric motor means you won’t have to pedal any harder to deal with the extra weight. For larger pets, pull-behind trailers offer a way to take them along on your e-bike ride.

As you move from a traditional bike to an e-bike, be sure to do your research before you make that investment. Among the important things we found out to remember is that your e-bike is likely to be a lot more valuable than your old bike so be sure you get the best bike locks you can find. We went to a local bike shop and asked what the experts there recommended. The locks we chose were costly — about $50 each — but they seemed to be a good investment to protect our $1,200 bikes. It’s also worth checking your homeowner’s or renter’s insurance policy to see if it will cover the bike in case of theft and how large the deductible is for that sort of loss.

Another upgrade you may need to make is to your car’s bike rack. E-bikes tend to be quite a bit heavier than their standard counterparts. Our Aventon bikes weigh in at about 50 pounds each, meaning the rack we put on our car has to hold at least 100 pounds. Many strap-on racks won’t hold that much weight, meaning it is probably better to go with a trailer hitch-mounted rack like we bought. Also remember that if you are used to a rooftop bike rack, you’ll have to be able to lift a 50-pound bike over your head to mount it there.

Finally, wherever you store your new e-bike, you’ll need to have a place to charge it. Be sure you have an outlet nearby into which to plug the charger. And most e-bike manufacturers suggest not letting the batteries — which can cost $500 or more to replace — get too hot or too cold, meaning you’ll need to bring them out of the garage in very hot or cold weather.

Rapidly becoming a popular form of transportation for young trendsetters, retirees have a chance to tap into the explosive growth of e-bikes and make them part of their outdoor routines. Dropping prices, ease of use and rider-friendly features make e-bikes a great choice to add to your retirement lifestyle, promising an active ride with no fear of running out of steam in the stretch.

The craggy mountain views go on forever, the trail is fast and smooth, and the food and refreshment choices are varied and plentiful. If ever there was a trail that has it all, it would be the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail in the southern Arizona city of Oro Valley.

Cutting through the heart of the Tucson suburb, the 11-mile Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail has the distinction of being both incredibly scenic and decidedly urban. With the imposing Santa Catalina Mountains looming all around, the smooth asphalt trail passes through a steady stream of lush city parks, bustling shopping areas, and expanses of rugged Sonoran Desert terrain.

For anyone who likes their trails to be picturesque but with a bit of luxury as well, the Cañada Del Oro is the route to try. It is a not-to-be-missed feature during a visit to Oro Valley.

Here are seven of the best stops along the trail.

1. The Chuck Huckelberry Loop

Adding to the appeal of the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail is the fact that it is part of Tucson’s 137-mile Chuck Huckelberry Loop, a world-class route that has given the community a reputation for being a bicycling paradise.

Biking is perhaps the most popular activity on the loop, but it is far from the only one. On my recent winter visit to Oro Valley, I found a trail that is also full of walkers, joggers, and parents pushing strollers.

While the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail is a destination in itself, ambitious cyclists could also use the trail as a convenient base for a long-distance ride that will take them through downtown Tucson, along the network of riverside trails that make up the loop, and past industrial areas and quiet neighborhoods. Featuring off-road riding, the loop is a perfect way for visitors to take in much of what Tucson has to offer, largely without driving the busy streets.

Pro Tip: The Chuck Huckelberry Loop is home to dozens of works of art that range from steel sculptures of bats on bikes to colorful southwestern-themed murals to massive arches that soar above the trail. Small white arrows painted on the trail’s asphalt surface alert users to the works of art that are located just off the route.

2. Catalina State Park

Near the northeastern end of the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail lies the gorgeous Catalina State Park, a 5,500-acre desert haven known for its nearly 5,000 majestic saguaros, pretty canyons and streams, and an abundance of desert plants and wildlife.

Among the highlights of the state park is the network of eight trails that take hikers, cyclists, and horseback riders into the cactus-covered hills and through streams that run seasonally. For an easy trail that heads up a hill and offers great views of the desert plant life and surrounding mountains, I loved the 1-mile Nature Trail Loop.

Pro Tip: For RVers and tent campers, the Catalina State Park’s 120-site campground is a convenient option that offers easy access to the Cañada Del Oro Trail.

3. Oro Valley Mural

Oro Valley Marketplace

Just across Oro Valley’s busy Oracle Road, from Catalina State Park, is the large shopping area known as the Oro Valley Marketplace. Among the features trail users will find there is the colorful Oro Valley mural that conjures up the town’s outdoorsy desert vibe. The mural is just one of the many pieces of art located along the trail.

The Oro Valley Marketplace is also a great place to stop for breakfast or lunch at one of its many chain restaurants. Or, for those looking for a handy trailhead to access the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail, there are several parking areas located across the street from the shopping area.

4. Heirloom Farmers Market

Steam Pump Ranch Park

Featuring dozens of vendor stalls and attracting hundreds of shoppers each week, the Heirloom Farmers Market is a local favorite on Saturdays at Oro Valley’s Historic Steam Pump Ranch. Located right along the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail, the farmers market is a great place to stop for a weekend snack or lunch before heading back down the trail.

Steam Pump Ranch lies at the base of the Santa Catalinas’ Pusch Ridge, which serves as a stunning backdrop for the market’s booths. Even when the farmers market is not underway, the Steam Pump Ranch Park makes for an interesting stop. The 16-acre site is listed on the National Register of Historic Places, commemorating the ranch which dates back to the 1870s.

5. Tacos, Beer, And Gourmet Sandwiches

A portion of the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail runs roughly parallel to and near Oro Valley’s Oracle Road, a main city artery that is lined with restaurants, grocery stores, and shopping centers.

Its proximity to businesses makes for easy access to food and refreshments for the cyclists and walkers on the trail. As an added bonus, I found a number of places that were capitalizing on Oro Valley’s sunny, mid-70-degree winter/early spring temperatures with their outdoor decks.

Street Taco And Beer Co.

One quick and easy spot to try is Street Taco and Beer Co., located in the Rooney Shopping Center on Oracle Road. The restaurant is casual, with a counter for ordering and a self-serve salsa bar. It serves a number of tasty taco varieties, as well as beers and soft drinks, and has a sidewalk patio that offers stellar views of the nearby Pusch Ridge.

What To Order: Grilled chicken tacos, street-style, with a side of tortilla chips and spice salsa

Baggin’s Gourmet Sandwiches

Another dining spot with a location just off the trail is the local chain sandwich shop, Baggin’s Gourmet Sandwiches, known for its fresh sandwiches and salads.

What To Order: Asian chicken salad served with chunks of chicken, Chinese sesame noodles, cucumbers, and carrots — all served up in a bread bowl; or the signature Unforgettable Baggin’s sandwich with roasted turkey, cream cheese, bacon, sprouts, and avocado on 12-grain bread.

Pro Tip: Oracle Road is also home to a number of hotels that offer close proximity to the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail. The Holiday Inn Express & Suites borders the trail, and the Fairfield Inn & Suites is nearby.

6. Riverfront Park

For a calm and shady place to rest or have a picnic, Oro Valley’s Cañada Del Oro Riverfront Park offers something for the entire family. The 30-acre park has softball and soccer fields and tennis, basketball, and volleyball courts, along with three shade ramadas with picnic tables.

I also loved the cool art that seemed to be everywhere at Riverfront Park, such as a colorful mosaic seating area surrounded by flowering cacti. The park also offers parking for the trail and is a convenient place to stop for a water or restroom break.

7. Christina Taylor Green Memorial River Park

Toward the southern end of the trail, cyclists and walkers will come to the Christina Taylor Green Memorial River Park, a beautiful desert garden that commemorates Christina Taylor Green, the 9-year-old girl who was one of the victims of the tragic 2011 mass shooting at a Congress on Your Corner event held by Arizona Congresswoman Gabrielle Giffords.

The park features drinking fountains, equestrian access, restrooms, walking paths, and moving butterfly-themed artwork, some created by children. The park was established as a place where families could enjoy desert gardens in a space that celebrates the spirit of the young girl and her love of butterflies. I found it to be a peaceful spot and a wonderful tribute.

When To Visit The Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail

Spring, fall, and winter are the best seasons to check out the Cañada Del Oro River Park Trail. March, April, October, and November all post average high temperatures in the 70-and-80-degree Fahrenheit range, making for great cycling and hiking weather. 

Winter might be Oro Valley’s most beautiful season, with its December, January, February, and March average highs in the 60s and 70s. Summers in Oro Valley tend to be hot, with June posting an average high of 102 and May, July, August, and September all in the 90s.

Hiking is about more than getting from A to B or putting one foot in front of the other for hours or days. Hiking creates a special state of mind and a special sense of connection with a place and with the entire world. For adventure seekers and nature lovers, hiking is an exhilarating way to explore new places and discover hidden gems.

From traversing rainforests and climbing mountains, meandering coastal paths, and exploring ancient ruins, hiking offers a unique opportunity to witness the breathtaking landscapes and diverse cultures of our planet. Some of the most beautiful scenery in the world can only be reached on foot. And while many of the best treks in the world are multi-day journeys, some are hikes that can be tackled by anyone in decent physical condition.

So, dust off those hiking boots and get ready to embark on an adventure of a lifetime! Here’s my list of some of my all-time favorite hikes. I hope you’ll add at least one or two of them to your bucket list.

1. Overland Track

Tasmania, Australia

Distance: 40 miles (65 km)

Time: 5–6 days

Difficulty: Moderate

The amazingly picturesque Overland Track runs through the beautifully rugged and extremely varied terrain of the Tasmanian wilderness and was my very first proper long-distance hike. Fresh out of school, the spectacular panoramas of mountains, rainforests, alpine meadows, stunning lakes, waterfalls, and coastline instilled the love of hiking in me forever.

The popular hike takes you through some of the most stunning scenery in Australia, and Tasmania’s unique flora and fauna will enchant you all along the route — giant grasses, eucalyptus trees, moss-covered forests, gum and leatherwood trees that are more than 2,000 years old, not to forget the super-sized wombats and Tasmanian devils.

More than 9,000 walkers enjoy the Overland Track each year, with the best time to hike being during the summer months — December to February. However, be aware that this is also the busiest time of year, so you may want to look at visiting anytime between October and May, or alternatively starting your hike early in the morning to avoid the crowds.

Pro Tip: The original hike can be completed in 6 days, but it is also possible to extend the hike by adding another 2 days, with a hike alongside a beautiful lake.

2. Torres del Paine W Circuit

Patagonia, Chile

Distance: 43.1 miles

Time: 5–6 days

Difficulty: Moderate–Hard

The W Circuit Trek in Torres del Paine National Park is one of the most popular hikes in the world, with hikers coming from all over to appreciate the striking views of the southernmost region of Chile. The park’s stunning natural beauty — with picture-perfect glacial lakes surrounded by jagged, snow-covered peaks — makes this national park a photographer’s dream. Torres del Paine National Park is also home to a diverse range of wildlife, including pumas, guanacos, deer, rheas, and flamingos.

Improvements in the trail and services over the past few years have made the trail more accessible, and you no longer need to carry your own gear. The hike generally takes between 4 and 6 days, and the peak season is October and March. The weather in Patagonia is erratic and changeable, so be prepared for rain, snow, sun, and especially wind.

With its stunning landscapes and abundant wildlife, the W Circuit Trek is a must-do for any outdoor enthusiast.

3. Annapurna Circuit

Nepal

Distance: 100–140 miles (depending on the route)

Duration: 12–20 days

Difficulty: Moderate–Hard

The Annapurna Circuit was one of my first serious treks, and it had me hooked on trekking for life. The trail is a journey through some of the tallest peaks on the planet and you are surrounded on all sides by a dazzling panorama of mountains, all over 20,000 feet. This is a popular hike and it demands a high level of fitness.

The days are long and the distances can be challenging, and coupled with the high elevation, it can be tough going for some. Accommodation along the trail is basic, as is the food, but with a huge diversity of people from around the world on the trail, you are bound to meet some interesting fellow hikers.

Another highlight of the route is the climb to Poon Hill. Most people try to make it to the top for sunrise, and from this vantage point, you’ll be able to see eight of the 14 highest mountain peaks in the world. You may want to consider hiring porters for your backpack to make your trip much more enjoyable.

Pro Tip: Another shorter and easier trail that allows you to see some of the highlights is the Annapurna Panorama Trek. This 3- to 5-day trek starts from Pokhara and heads up to Ghorepani. Accommodation and food along this stretch are both very good.

4. Inca Trail

Peru

Distance: 26 miles

Time: 4–6 days

Difficulty: Moderate–Hard

The Inca Trail is one of the most popular hiking trails in South America and takes you through some of the most stunning scenery in Peru, including the jungle, mountains, and ancient ruins of the Inca civilization. The trail’s final destination is the amazing Machu Picchu, known as the “lost city of the Inca.” On paper, the Inca Trail may not seem like a particularly strenuous hike, but the endless ups and downs combined with the high altitude make this trek a difficult one — but totally worth it.

The trail follows the route the ancient Incas took over 650 years ago, and much of the original stonework is still in place. Along the way, you’ll pass through two tunnels created by the Incas, the ancient ruins of Winay Wayna, and many waterfalls. Descending from the Inca Trail into Machu Pichu at sunrise is one of life’s great experiences.

Not for the faint of heart, this is a 26-mile trek that takes you up and over two 13,000-foot passes, in what can be very changeable weather — it can be hot and steamy one minute and pouring rain the next, blazing sun at times and cold at others, so be prepared for every eventuality.

Pro Tip: The best time to hike the Inca Trail is from May to September. The weather is usually dry during this time of year, making for more pleasant hiking conditions. However, be aware that the trail can be crowded during peak season. If you’re looking to avoid the crowds, try visiting during the shoulder months of April and October.

5. Everest Base Camp Trek

Nepal

Distance: 80 miles (130 km)

Time: 12+ days

Difficulty: Hard

Renowned as one of the best treks in the world, Everest Base Camp (EBC) Trek gives you glimpses of the highest mountain on earth. The route takes you over the highest pass in the world, the Khumbu Icefall, and through the most famous glacier in the world, the Khumbu Glacier. You will walk alongside the Sagarmatha National Park, home to the highest peak in the world, Mount Everest. Not only that, but you’ll also get to know the Sherpa people, and highlights along the way will include Namchee Bazaar, the Everest View Hotel (the highest hotel in the world), and the Tengboche and Thami monasteries.

Up and down are probably the two best words to describe the EBC hike. The 80-mile trail literally climbs a mountain ridge, then drops down to a river, then climbs another mountain ridge as it makes its way to base camp. The hike takes 12 to 14 days on average and is high — you’ll max out at 18,044 feet. That being said, most of the walking is done in the 11,482 to 14,763ft range, though as the air up here is thin, and any exertion seems twice as hard.

EBC is best done between either March and May or September and December, when temperatures are moderate and the skies are clear.

Pro Tip: Be aware that you cannot see the peak of Mount Everest from Base Camp. You will, however, see it from various points on the trail, when other massive mountains are not in the way.

6. Mount Kilimanjaro

Tanzania

Distance: 45 miles (Rongai Route)

Time: 5–9 days

Difficulty: Hard

Kilimanjaro is one of the most iconic sites in all of Africa, and the hike to the top is on many people’s bucket list. Around 35,000 people attempt this hike each year, though only about 65 percent of them succeed in getting to the very top. It’s almost 15 years since I first climbed Kilimanjaro, and in the intervening years, I’ve probably climbed it another 40 times. In fact, just before I sat down to compile this list for you, I was having a Zoom call with the next group of trekkers I’ll be taking to the top.

At 19,300 feet, Mount Kilimanjaro is the highest mountain in Africa and the tallest freestanding mountain in the world. This dormant volcano is definitely one of the best mountain hikes in the world, and the views from the top across the surrounding landscape are spectacular, especially at sunrise, which is when most hikers aim to reach the top.

While the hike is challenging and is better suited to the more adventurous and those with some hiking experience, most avid hikers can reach the top if they prepare themselves both mentally and physically. I can guarantee that standing on the roof of Africa is something you’ll never forget once you’ve done it.

Pro Tip: my recommended route up Kilimanjaro is the Rongai Route, and the best time to climb is between June and October, with September being my preferred month.

So, there you have it, my favorite hiking spots from around the world. I hope I’ve inspired you to head for the great outdoors sometime soon. Remember, as Werner Herzog once said, “The world reveals itself to those who travel on foot.”

Oahu is a Hawaiian Island separated by mountains. There is an abundance of scenery you cannot easily access. That is why experiencing Oahu from the seat of an off-road vehicle is one of the best ways to see some amazing scenery away from the beach. 

If you enjoy a tour with some adventure, an ATV tour is a great choice. If you pick the right tour, you’ll get a sense of the real Oahu, the land, and the culture of the island and its people. It’s also far away from the crowds and the commercialization of Waikiki and Honolulu.

An ATV tour on Oahu was a must-do for me for two reasons: One, I love ATVing, and two, I wanted to see a scenic part of Oahu that most don’t have access to while coming away with a bit of knowledge of Hawaiian culture. I got that and so much more with the Pua Pua’a Piglet ATV Adventure with North Shore Eco Tours. 

Here are six beautiful things you can see on an Oahu ATV tour.

1. Oahu’s North Shore

Once you set off from Haleiwa, the North Shore town you depart from, you ride for a bit. This stop overlooked the town and coast below. While the persistent rain clouded our view, it was pretty cool to see Haleiwa, this North Shore surfing town and popular tourist destination, from a long distance.

2. Private Agricultural Land

The North Shore Eco Tours ATV tour takes you across private land owned by Kamehameha Schools.

Upon her death in 1887, Princess Bernice Pauahi Bishop — the last descendant of King Kamehameha — endowed 365,000 acres of ancestral land across Hawaii to a trust that would become Kamehameha Schools. Today, Kamehameha Schools’ mission is education for the well-being of Native Hawaiians. It is a deeply seeded idea in Hawaiian culture that well-being is directly related to the health of the land (‘āina). They accomplish this through programs to support agriculture, conservation, and clean energy to name a few.

The school has about 50,000 acres of land on Oahu, the majority divided into agricultural land and conservation land. Local agri-businesses lease land from the school to grow a variety of crops like sugar cane and fruit.

Fruit Trees

We also saw row after row of fruit trees during the first part of your ride; banana, papaya, mango, avocado, and guava. You will be able to sample some in-season fruit.

Pro Tip: Study up on your knowledge of fruit because your guide will test that knowledge during the tour. Which is all for fun.

Sugar Cane

We saw acres of heirloom sugar cane grown for nearby Kō Hana Hawaiian Agricole Rum Distillery. Did you know that Kō Hana uses the fresh juice of over 30 varieties of sugar cane to make their rum?

Pro Tip: You can visit Kō Hana Distillery for a fun tour, or just stop in for a tasting. I did a tour during my last visit to Oahu and it was insightful (not to mention the rum is fabulous).

3. Historic WWII Sites

We spotted a couple of pill boxes that dot the mountainsides all over the island. These pill boxes served as lookout points and defensive stations for the military during the war. Today, some around the island are destination points for hikes, but many just sit abandoned. 

4. Lush Forests

After riding through the rows of fruit trees, you enter the conservation land area owned by the school. Riding through thick forest, the trail is uneven and muddy. If you’re lucky, you may just see a wild boar, although they usually come out at night.

You’ll see trees, like the eucalyptus tree maybe getting a whiff of its familiar scent, or the Koa tree, with its sparse flat foliage among tall grass and tropical ferns.

5. ‘Opae’ula Reservoir

We stopped at one point, looking down at the ‘Opae’ula Reservoir, and Ryan (our guide) introduced us to the oldest tree species on the island, the ʻōhiʻa. The beautiful lehua flower is one of those blooms that you envision when you think of Hawaii. It’s the first tree you will see growing from hardened lava after a volcano erupts.

Hawaiian folklore suggests that if you pick the lehua, rain will come on that day.

6. Waianae Mountains

The pinnacle of our tour was the expansive views of the Waianae Mountains. If you want to feel on top of the world and far away from everyone, this is the spot.

Not only is this the highest point on the tour, but the halfway mark too. From here, you descend back down taking a different trail.

There were a couple of yurts set up near the edge, an idea for a camping experience that is set to be staffed and ready to go through North Shore Eco Tours by summer 2023. I can only imagine waking up to this spectacular view while enjoying my morning coffee.

Things To Know Before Your ATV Tour

Type Of Tour

There are quite a few different ATV tours in Oahu, each with its own focus. The Pua Pua’a Piglet ATV Adventure with North Shore Eco Tours was the one I chose. This tour takes about 2.5 hours. There is a max of three vehicles (not including the guide), so it is a great small tour.

Age And Physical Requirements

The minimum age requirement is 5 years old. All drivers must be at least 21 and have a valid driver’s license. 

They recommend that if you have physical restraints such as back and neck problems, or are pregnant, to not do the tour. This is for a good reason. The trails are rough and uneven in most places and you get jostled around a lot.

What Kind Of Vehicle Is Used On The Tour

North Shore Eco Tours uses a six-passenger Kawasaki Mule ATV for this tour. The Mule is equipped with seat belts and a walkie-talkie intercom radio. There is no windshield, so you will get wet if the trail is muddy. There is plenty of space to bring along a backpack with water.

Arriving For Your Tour

This tour begins in Haleiwa and when you sign up, you get specific instructions on how to get there. The instructions also state to arrive a half-hour before your tour time.

Once you arrive and park, you will be greeted and asked to sign a waiver. At this time, you will get your helmet and eye-protective gear. They will supply a returnable rain poncho. 

Then, your guide will go through some basic instructions on how to operate the Mule and other safety information.

What To Wear

Closed-toe shoes are required and you cannot ride without them. Also, keep your favorite Hawaiian shirt back at the hotel. Wear comfortable clothes that you will be okay with getting dirty… extremely dirty.

Pro Tip: I strongly advise against wearing white or anything light-colored. The red dirt on the island is very hard to get out of clothes. If you’d like, bring an extra change of clothes along.

Things To Bring

There are a few extras you should bring along. The tour provides bug spray, but you’ll want to bring sunscreen. You should bring a rain jacket and/or a sweatshirt just in case. I would also suggest having a large plastic bag along for your backpack. It rained throughout our whole tour and our bags were soaked. Bring sunglasses and extra water. The tour provides snacks and beverages halfway through, but if it’s a hot day, you’ll want extra water.

Don’t forget your phone or camera. Ryan was more than happy to take photos of us during the tour. 

Despite the rain, we all agreed that this was our favorite thing we’d done in Oahu. The remote scenery, the wet and muddy trails, and the educational aspect gave us an authentic Oahu experience. This adventure may not be for everyone, but if you have a thirst for a fun escapade, I highly recommend an ATV tour in Oahu, or any of the Hawaiian Islands.

I’m not exactly what you’d describe as a rugged adventurer. I’m much more at home in a museum coffee shop than roughing it on the road less traveled. But over the last few years, I’ve found myself compelled to spend more time outdoors. My hiking efforts started small and, frankly, they still are in many ways. I’m good to go out on the trails for a few hours before I’m antsy to move on to something else (and sometimes that “something else” is my couch). 

However, all those short treks were transformative. I gained the confidence and experience needed to tackle several segments of Prince Edward Island’s famous Island Walk, an epic journey that totals more than 400 miles (though my route was much, much shorter). This is what I’ve learned along the way in finding affordable, comfortable gear that’s perfect for beginners.

1. Hiking Shoes Or Boots

Buy Now

I can’t count the number of times I’ve been on a trail with a reputation for being a tricky hike and I’ve noticed people wearing the most inappropriate kinds of footwear imaginable. Flip flops, dress shoes, even high heels! I’m all for spontaneous treks, but your feet (and your peace of mind) will be thankful if you go for something a little more substantial.

The good news is that if you’re a beginner hiker, you don’t need to splash out on expensive hiking shoes or boots; I never have. Pop into an outdoor gear store and be frank with the staff. Explain that you want a supportive, comfortable shoe that will give you confidence on the trails but that you’re just as likely to use them for some urban walks or kicking around at the cottage. You don’t need their most technical gear! They’ll appreciate your honesty. My current shoes are rugged trail running sneakers and they are perfect for me.

2. Socks That Won’t Let You Down

Buy Now

Anti-blister hiking socks cost less than $20 and make your feet feel like a million bucks. I love those designed by Wrightsock. They’re composed of two thin layers, which rub against each other (and not your skin!), reducing the chance of blisters. 

I also like to bring along a backup pair of socks in a slightly different design in case, by some travesty, I do develop a blister. Plus, nothing is nicer than putting on a pair of dry, warm socks to wear on the ride home.

3. A Simple, Comfortable Day Bag

Buy Now

While you need a comfortable way to carry around all your hiking essentials, your hiking day bag doesn’t have to be top-of-the-line. If you’re looking to invest in something new, aim for comfortable, adjustable straps and a bright bold color so you don’t lose it in the forest! I also personally like having a small exterior pocket for little items like my keys — bonus points if it contains a clip to keep my keys extra secure.

I like the 13-liter Osprey Daylite Daypack. It has a chest strap and waist belt for stability, side pockets for easy access to water bottles, and integrates with other Osprey bags, making it practical for all kinds of travel.

4. A Hydration System

Buy Now

Even if you’re convinced you’re not going to be working up a sweat and that it’s not a sunny day, you absolutely need a hydration system. This can be something as simple as a couple of water bottles from home to a more sophisticated setup involving a backpack.

I love the Platypus brand. The soft-sided reusable water bottles pack flat when they’re empty. If you’re heating up throughout your hike and need to stash a sweater, you’ll have the extra space after you drink through your first bottle.

5. Sun And Bug Protection

Buy Now

There is nothing so miserable as hitting the trails in early spring, eager to launch a new season of adventures, only to find out that the mosquitoes have beat you to it and they’re happily hanging around the damp forest. Mosquitoes are jerks and that’s that. I now keep a container of OFF! Bug Spray in the door of my car so I’m never caught out without some on hand. I also have a stash of Ben’s 30-percent Deet Tick & Insect Repellent Wipes in my bag.

You can defeat bugs and sunburn at the same time by wearing long, loose clothing that protects your skin and keeps you cool. I love wearing my Tilley Endurable Airflow hat. Wearing this iconic brand feels like being part of a family. You’ll get little nods of recognition from other Tilley-wearing hikers on the trails. Plus, they can take an absolute beating and keep on going.

6. First Aid Kit

Buy Now

My first aid kit is tiny, just big enough to contain some bandages, disinfectant wipes, blister pads, and anti-inflammatories. However, I’ve recently added two important items.

The first is a tick-removal kit. These inexpensive grips can be found at any pharmacy and they’re an essential travel item now that ticks seem to be in every kind of habitat imaginable. 

The other is a tensor bandage. I have a slightly dodgy ankle that’s caused me some troubles before and I’d rather not think about what kind of misery would await me if I rolled over on the trail. Having a tensor bandage on hand is reassuring for me but for other hikers, it may not be necessary at all.

7. Snacks

Buy Now

Let’s be honest: 90 percent of the reason I hike at all is because of the food. Everything tastes better outdoors! My dear friend and I have a rule that any hike we tackle must be sufficiently easy that we can trek and drink from our insulated travel mugs at the same time. Yep, we take lattes with us when we hike! Who does that? People obsessed with food, that’s who. Obviously, you can’t have a hot coffee without some gourmet cookies on the side, so they’re always in our pack. 

On a more practical level, nuts, trail mix, energy bars, granola bars, and fresh fruit are all great hiking snacks. I also like cheese and crackers, carrot sticks, and sandwiches. Using a crusty roll rather than traditional sandwich bread will help keep things from getting squished (and a side of potato chips will keep things from feeling too wholesome). Remember to pack out all of your rubbish.

Editor’s Bonus: A Lightweight Jacket

Buy Now

Especially during the spring, it’s common to start off a hike in cool temperatures, shaded by trees. However, once moving, I always regret a heavy coat or jacket. I recently purchased this ultra lightweight full-zip jacket and it’s become my favorite spring hiking piece of activewear! It works perfectly as a mid- or outer-layer depending on the weather.

This jacket is made from super soft, stretchy polyester and polyamide, designed to trap heat in cooler temperatures while remaining breathable. Plus, when you are ready to strip a layer, it folds into a nice, tidy ball easily fit into any daypack. The sleeve zippered pocket is a very functional addition to stowe your keys or other small personal items.

To continue gearing up for your spring hikes, check out:

• The 7 Top-Rated Hiking Socks For Men And Women
• The Best Hiking Pants For Comfort On The Trails
• The App Every Hiker Needs To Find Great Trails And Stay Safe

When anyone says Gainesville, Florida, people think of the college and the football team. While they are a big part of Gainesville culture, the city has an amazing number of natural attractions as well. Many are affiliated with the University of Florida, but there are others, too. From fossils to farming and bats to big cats, there is much in Gainesville for nature lovers. 

I was hosted at some of these experiences, but all opinions are my own.

1. Devil’s Millhopper Geological State Park

Devil’s Millhopper Geological State Park is a National Natural Landmark. It’s a miniature rainforest at the bottom of a bowl-shaped cavity 120 feet deep. Arrowheads show people have visited the area since ancient times. One legend says when early visitors saw bones and fossils at the bottom of the sinkhole, they believed these creatures had gone there to meet the devil. In reality, the sinkhole formed when the limestone underneath it collapsed, as did most Florida sinkholes.

The pavilion, just after you enter, has placards telling the area’s story. The walk to the stairway down is short. You can view the sinkhole from the top or venture down to it. The stairs are a strenuous walk to the bottom.

2. Dudley Farm Historic State Park

Dudley Farm, an authentic 325-acre working farm on the western outskirts of Gainesville in the community of Newberry, shows the evolution of North Florida farming through the eyes of three generations of the Dudley family. It takes you from the pioneer days to the present.

Dudley Farm was the home of Ben Dudley, built in 1880. There are 17 original buildings. You can sit in a rocker on the porch, pump water from the well with a hand pump, and visit the free-range turkeys and chickens roaming the grounds. Don’t miss the Florida Cracker horses and cattle grazing in the back of the farm.

The front section contains several other historic buildings, including the visitor center, which is a museum with family artifacts showing the history of the farm. There’s a blacksmith shop and lots of antique farm equipment.

3. Florida Museum Of Natural History

This free museum is one of the nation’s top five natural history museums. In Florida Fossils: Evolution of Life and Land, you glimpse life in the last 65 million years of Earth’s history. The South Florida People & Environments exhibit walks you through Florida when it was the land of the Calusa and later the Seminole and Miccosukee people. You can play audio recordings by Native Americans. My favorite was a song by Seminole James Billie about telling a dead soul to move on.

Underwater Walk-Through lets you “be” a small fish walking through an underwater estuary where the creatures are 12 times life-sized. Discovery Zone is where kids can explore. There’s so much to see here; allow plenty of time.

Pro Tip: Butterfly Rainforest is a paid exhibit attached to the museum. It’s a living exhibit featuring around 1,000 free-flying butterflies and birds from around the world in a screened, outdoor enclosure of tropical trees and plants, waterfalls, and a walking trail. There are many other animals, including turtles and fish, too.

When you enter, the beautifully colored butterflies flutter around; some will even land on your hand or arm. You’ll see some small birds fluttering amid the bushes. You will see a variety of butterflies and probably have some favorites. One particularly beautiful species has vivid blue wings fringed with black and dots of red on its upper body, but when folded, the underside of the wings are a brown, gray, and black pattern with an eye-like marking.

4. University Of Florida Bat Barns And House

The university’s bat house and barns (across from Lake Alice) shelter about 450,000 to 500,000 bats. These badly misunderstood animals eat their body weight in bugs — including mosquitoes — every night, so everyone living in and visiting Florida should love them!

Every evening just after sunset, the bats swarm out. There is a free parking lot, and the night I was there, dozens of people were watching. The bats did not disappoint.

5. Carson Springs Wildlife Conservation Foundation

Carson Springs is home to approximately 30 rare and endangered species and over 100 animals on 275 acres of woods and farmland. They take in rescued, abused, and unwanted big cats and other animals. Each animal resident has a permanent home and lots of love here. Each animal has a name and a story. You can take a self-guided walking tour or riding tour, or arrange a private tour in advance.

This is worth seeing and such an inspiring experience. It’s fun for families and educational for children. You’ll meet mostly big cats but there are also hyenas, a rhino, river otters, jackals, lemurs, Klun Klun pigs, warthogs, foxes, and some birds.

6. Kanapaha Botanical Gardens

Kanapaha Botanical Gardens has the largest herb garden in the Southeast and is home to Florida’s largest display of bamboos. The azaleas and camellias are amazing. You can feed the fish in the ponds. The koi are fun to watch competing for the food pellets. There is a vending machine where you can buy the fish food.

The gardens offer a guided tour the first Saturday of every month at 10 a.m. It’s included with the regular admission price. The mile-and-a-half walkway is paved and offers many little side spots with waterfalls and special plant groupings. You’ll love the many sculptures and colorful children’s playground.

7. Gainesville Solar Walk

The Solar Walk is a series of sculptures created by artist Elizabeth Indianos in 2002. It stretches almost a mile and walks you through the entire solar system. There are even two sculptures for Halley’s Comet that were added in September 2008. Another artist, Tim Malles, created 10 bronze plaques that are attached to each of the planet sculptures and the sun sculpture.

Pro Tip: Park across the street in the park and meander from the sun to Pluto.

One of the best aspects of living in Scottsdale is having one of the most beautiful places on earth a 2-hour drive away. The Red Rocks District encompasses over a half million acres of buttes and canyons. The iron oxide in the rocks lends an orange-red color to the cliffs that captivate as you approach the area from Phoenix on Interstate 17. As you enter the district, the layers of sandstone, dotted with green foliage, rise up in spectacular shapes. Many of the formations have been given nicknames such as Snoopy and Coffee Pot.

Sedona offers many hikes for locals and travelers to enjoy the views, and I have tried many of the trails. The paths vary in difficulty and present different views, from red rocks soaring up from the canyon bottoms to the expansive vistas from the tops of cliffs. Here are some of my favorite hiking trails.

1. Brins Mesa Trail

Length: 4.5 miles (out and back)

Difficulty: Moderate

The Brins Mesa Trail tends to be my first choice for bringing visitors. The route is usually not crowded, and although it is moderately challenging, there are plenty of places to rest and take in the scenery. North of the main Sedona tourist strip, a road leading off West Park Ridge Drive leads to a parking lot for the Jordan Road Trailhead. Veer to the right after passing the rustic restroom to start on the Brins Mesa Trail.

A gradual incline leads through a gorgeous canyon that opens to larger views. At first, the path is dirt but begins to turn more into rock steps as you wind through the valley. Near the top, a small outcropping provides a good place for a snack break with stunning views over Sedona. As you crest the butte, you emerge from the trees into a meadow as the world expands to a vast landscape of red rock mountains. While walking across the top, keep an eye out for a small side path that brings you to a scramble up an outcropping for amazing 360-degree views.

Pro Tip: Continue along Brins Mesa Trail to join Soldier Pass Trail and then Cibola Pass for a gorgeous 4.5-mile loop.

2. Soldier Pass Trail

Length: 4.5 miles (loop)

Difficulty: Moderate

Soldier Pass Trail offers some of the most interesting geologic sights in Sedona. Along the route, you pass Devil’s Kitchen Sinkhole and Seven Sacred Pools, as well as a view of a large arch across the valley from the trail. These three formations demonstrate various effects of erosion over time. Touring jeeps often parallel the beginning of the trail but then the peace of the cypress forest sets in. The moderate incline eventually leads to expansive views over Sedona in one direction and the Mogollon Rim in the distance to the north.

Parking is available at Soldier Pass Trailhead if you want a short, up-and-back walk to the pools. You can also join the trail after embarking on the Cibola Trail at the Jordan Trailhead. This quiet path provides a lovely jaunt through trees and shrubs. On my last visit, a group of deer munched the vegetation, unconcerned by the humans gawking at them.

3. Devil’s Bridge Trail

Length: 3.9 miles (out and back)

Difficulty: Moderate

On my initial visit to Sedona a couple of decades ago, the top of Devil’s Bridge Trail was my first view of the red rocks from above and it is still embossed on my brain. The path to the base of the cliff meanders over a wide, fairly easy dirt path. From there you can gaze up to where the cliff and a column of stone are joined by a rocky bridge that doesn’t appear thick enough to remain suspended. You can then climb narrow, steep steps up to the overlook that amazed me. You can continue around to the bridge and walk across it to pose for a spectacular photo if you have enough courage.

Pro Tip: Devil’s Bridge is one of the most popular sites in Sedona and can be very crowded. If you want to walk onto the bridge, embark on the trail early in the morning.

4. Bell Rock Pathway

Length: 2.8 miles (out and back)

Difficulty: Moderate

On entering Sedona from the south, the first parking area after leaving Oak Creek provides a close-up view of Bell Rock and Courthouse Butte. These formations fit their names and set the stage for the landscape. One hike will take you around Courthouse Butte, but I prefer heading up Bell Rock. Rather than traversing a defined trail, once you reach the “bell,” you can scramble over smooth, wide rocky ledges that offer views in all directions. The more adventurous you are, the higher up the bell you can climb.

Several parking areas enable access to the Bell Rock Pathway. Besides the Bell Rock Vista parking lot, further up Route 179, Courthouse Vista and Yavapai Vista Point are good access points. The terrain to the base of Bell Rock is fairly easy making this a good trail for families. More active members can scramble up the rocks while others relax at the base.

5. Huckaby Trail

Length: 5.7 miles (out and back)

Difficulty: Moderate

Although most trails climb to open views, Huckaby Trail brings a welcome change. You start the trail with broad views and then head down a moderately-steep decline that leads to Oak Creek. As the path winds down alongside a cliff wall, the sound of water gradually fills the air. When the flow is low enough, the route continues across boulders in the creek. On a warm day, Oak Creek provides a cool piece of paradise with a sweeping view of the Midgley Bridge above you.

You reach the Huckaby Trailhead by turning east off Route 179 onto Schnebly Hill Road. The view here from the east edge of Sedona differs from the trails deep within the red rocks. Reaching the creek requires a four-mile round-trip trek. However, you can stroll a shorter distance out and back to view the incredible scenery from this side of Sedona.

If you prefer to hike down to Oak Creek more directly, you can park at Midgley Bridge off Route 89A and find the Huckaby Trailhead at this lot.

6. Mescal Trail

Length: 6 miles (out and back)

Difficulty: Moderate

If you are looking to avoid crowds, Mescal Trail is a wonderful alternative to the popular Boynton Canyon. This trail opens up to spectacular views on the western side of Sedona. The path ascends to wind along a stone ridge of Mescal Mountain with layers of colorful rock rising next to you. Wild desert spreads out before you with red rock formations in the distance. There are a limited number of parking spaces at the trailhead along Long Canyon Road. Be prepared for plenty of sun exposure and carry enough water to stay well hydrated.

I enjoy these spectacular trails in Sedona because they are moderately difficult, but you are well rewarded for your effort. The vibrant red dirt and various flora — from cacti to pine trees — create an incredibly picturesque setting for the gorgeous buttes and canyon walls. Whether you choose a loop of several miles or just wander a bit along a trail and turn back, your day will be filled with beauty.

Pro Tip: If you are driving up from the Phoenix area, stop in at the Red Rock Visitor Center and Ranger Station on Route 179. The center offers clean restrooms, educational displays on history and geology, and trail maps. You can also buy a Red Rock Pass which will need to be displayed in your car at the trailheads. Chat with one of the rangers to help plan your time in Sedona. A wide plaza out front provides an initial taste of the beauty that will soon surround you.

Oceanside is more than picture-perfect sunsets. Palm tree-lined streets, beach vibes, and blue skies draw visitors looking for a relaxing break. So Oceanside should top your list if you’re dreaming about a perfect warm-weather getaway that happens to include jaw-dropping sunsets. And it happens to be a great place to bike, too.

Exploring Oceanside by any kind of bike (e-bike, hybrid, fat-tire, and beyond) is a fantastic way to experience SoCal’s laid-back vibe. The League of American Bicyclists distinguishes Oceanside as a bike-friendly community.

Located in northern San Diego County near the California border of Mexico, Oceanside’s average temperatures are 67 degrees Fahrenheit in the winter months and 74 in the summer months — ideal weather to “tan your hide in Oceanside,” according to Oceanside’s 1960 tourism slogan.

Driving to Oceanside is a 40-mile jaunt from San Diego and 85 miles from Los Angeles.

Pro Tip: Consider a stay at The Green Room Hotel. The hotel offers a delightful place to stay just minutes from Oceanside’s beaches. Located in Oceanside’s south side and convenient to SoCal Bike next door, guests enjoy a 25 percent bike rental discount at SoCal Bike as a perk.

1. Bike Routes Around Oceanside

Routes exist for all skill levels in bike-friendly Oceanside. Two primary bike trails run through Oceanside: the Coastal Rail Trail and the San Luis Rey River Trail. Pick up a bike map at the California Welcome Center, Oceanside.

Starting from the hotel, we suggest this leisurely circuit using mostly the Coastal Rail Trail to the heart of downtown, then to Pacific Street to enjoy Sea Lion Island before going down the beachside. The distance is short, so you can easily explore whichever portions of this route you like over a few days.

2. Oceanside Morning Farmers Market

Thursday Mornings

Time your visit right, and you can pick up special treats for a beach picnic at the Oceanside Morning Farmers Market. The Thursday-morning market is a perfect place to stock up for a Sea Lion Island and Oceanside Harbor Beach excursion, with offerings from popcorn, chips and salsa, local produce, and artisan baked goods to organic honey and fresh flowers.

The farmers market is held year-round every Thursday from 9 a.m. to 1 p.m. Look for the market next to the Oceanside Civic Center Plaza.

Pro Tip: For colorful murals and artistic specialty shops, peddle through Artist Alley, close to the Civic Center Fountain. The alley is located between North Coast Highway and North Freeman Street.

3. California Surf Museum

On your way to the beach, check out the California Surf Museum to see surfing history and what makes Oceanside’s surf culture distinctive. The museum holds a permanent collection chronicling surfboard history, wave-riding, and yearly revolving exhibits.

Pro Tip: From the surf museum, Sea Lion Island is 1.4 miles away, or about 6 minutes. Ride on N. Cleveland Street to the San Luis Rey River Trail start, which also runs beside Oceanside Harbor.

4. Sea Lion Island

Next to the Small Craft Harbor Fishing Pier, watch sea lions lounge on the docks in Oceanside Harbor. Cycle down North Harbor Drive, then watch at a safe distance from sidewalks and benches. At the right time of year, babies cuddle with their moms, but you can spot sea lions and hear their loud barking year-round.

5. Oceanside Harbor Beach

From Sea Lion Island, head just under a mile, or about 4 minutes, to Oceanside Harbor Beach for a picnic on the sandy beachfront or underneath shade at a round pavilion with three picnic tables. Watch boats entering and leaving the harbor, along with several surfing schools giving new surfers lessons. 

6. Top Gun House (High Pie)

Visit the historic blue Victorian cottage made famous by the original blockbuster movie starring Tom Cruise. The Top Gun House was moved from its original location to 250 North Pacific Street in 2020 and is now home to High Pie, where you can grab an individual hand pie and coffee to fuel your ride around Oceanside.

7. Oceanside Sunset Market

Thursday Evenings

If you’re in Oceanside on a Thursday evening, ride to Pier View Way in downtown Oceanside for the Oceanside Sunset Market. It’s San Diego County’s happening place known for live bands, great food vendors, and up to 200 merchants squeezing into four city blocks. Held every Thursday from 5 to 9 p.m, watch musicians perform on a live stage — and sometimes on top of a bus, too. At the same time, visitors eat food inspired by cuisines from around the world.

Favorites include options from barbecue suspended over hot coals in a wooden wagon, grilled cheese, and tamales to Spanish jamón, sea urchins, and chocolate-covered strawberries formed into a kabob on a stick.

Pro Tip: Orfila Vineyards Tasting Room & Kitchen at 221 North Cleveland Street is a local favorite that’s often visited before or after a trip to the Oceanside Sunset Market.

8. Oceanside Municipal Fishing Pier

You’ll never forget experiencing a gorgeous California sunset from Oceanside’s pier, but that’s not all that happens here. The 1,942 feet long historical wooden Oceanside Pier — initially built in 1888 — now serves as a central gathering point. From the beach, attend an event at the outdoor amphitheater. Watch surfers or take in the sunshine and the beauty of the Pacific Ocean. Or park your bike, walk along the pier for wildlife viewing, and watch people fishing.

Where To Eat In Oceanside

Seeing the sights by bike undoubtedly works up an appetite. Oceanside’s official tourism website lists plenty of excellent restaurants, but listening to locals has proven to be our favorite way to find extraordinary eateries. You can’t go wrong with these choices.

Local Tap House

3-Minute Ride From The Farmers And Sunset Markets

Closer to downtown Oceanside on South Coast Highway, a Skinny Girlfriend, or two, awaits those who enter through the Local Tap House doors. A cocktail, that is. Come for a slender drink, but leave feeling like you’ve been benevolently fed like knackered locomotive firemen after making the train puff and hiss from San Bernardino.

Of course, you’ll need to burn some calories after a massive portion of WTF Slow Cooked Short Rib Fries followed by a Dirty Bird chicken sandwich, but a lunch or dinner here is worth it. Also check out the extensive tap list.

Anita’s Mexican Restaurant & Cantina

3-Minute Ride From The Green Room Hotel

Located a quick 3-minute ride from The Green Room Hotel on South Coast Highway, Anita’s Mexican Restaurant & Cantina knows how to satisfy cravings for Mexican cuisine. This third-generation restaurant has been using the same family recipes since 1973. Locals rave about the food at Anita’s, but margaritas were always the first thing we were advised to order.

Residents regard Anita’s Carnitas, shrimp enchiladas, and any fajitas as favorites. We recommend dinner on the way back to the hotel after exploring downtown.

Beach Break Cafe

2-Minute Ride From The Green Room Hotel

Winner of the Food Network’s #1 Mom and Pop Restaurant in the Country, you’ll want to take a spin to this notable breakfast and lunch cafe. Four-egg omelets and cinnamon coffee cake are tempting, but Banana Crunch French Toast gets all the attention. It’s dipped in Honey Bunches of Oats cereal for a crunchy coating, then topped with bananas and a plethora of whipped cream that elicits joy from just about every kid.

The cafe is an easy breakfast stop whether riding to Oceanside Harbor along the beach route or downtown on the Coastal Rail Trail.

Pro Tip: The line can be hours long on weekends. Arrive early or aim to eat here on a weekday instead.

Bonus: Rent An E-Bike From SoCal Bike

We enjoyed renting from SoCal Bike because of their exceptional service and how they helped us find the right bike for our time in Oceanside. Owner Jim Norris has been in the biking industry for 50 years. Norris has been a racer, USA Cycling Race Official, and a Certified USA Race Mechanic. Likewise, the staff is friendly and knowledgeable about the best routes and bike paths in town and the area. Plus, Amo the Shop Dog, an adorable Shih Tzu, loves to greet people and share her toys. 

We recommend an e-bike because its battery can easily handle routes alongside the beach, downtown shopping, attractions, and a trip to Mission San Luis Rey, 6 miles away, without recharging. If The Green Room Hotel doesn’t have vacancies, SoCal Bike delivers to hotels and resorts around Oceanside. Each bike rental includes a helmet, lock, basket, and a 25 percent discount for The Green Room Hotel guests and TravelAwaits readers. 

Pro​​ Tip: For the best live music, check out the Oceanside Moose Lodge. All proceeds go back into the O’side community. According to Jim, “it’s the best bar in town.”

Take the helm of a small craft and live aboard, plying the calm waters of a canal through the South of France. The Canal du Midi is the quintessential tree-lined canal. It is frequently pictured in guidebooks touting the charm to be discovered along its banks and in nearby villages on or near its course. It is the perfect setting to serve as le capitaine on a boat in France.

Cruising along a French canal is not exclusively for those renting a luxury barge that comes with a chef, hot tub, and a high price tag. You don’t need a license or prior experience sailing the Seven Seas to rent a craft and pilot it along one of the many French waterways.

My wife Patty and I have cruised the canals and rivers of France over the past 25 years. We have never owned a boat. We have now been on 10 self-piloted cruises on canals and rivers in France. A group even hired us to plan and escort them on a weeklong voyage on the Canal du Midi.

Pro Tip: Do not be intimidated if you are not a sailor. The boat rental company will provide a hands-on clinic to teach you how to drive the boat. The Canal du Midi is not wide or deep. If you follow the directions, your week as a riverboat captain will end on a high note.

Set Your Own Pace

What keeps us returning to vacation along France’s waterways is the pace of these journeys. The countryside takes on a fresh look from the deck of a boat. At a speed of not quite 4 miles per hour (6 km), landscapes slowly unfold. Around every bend, a pocket of the country you will never discover buzzing along a highway will be revealed.

Boaters choose where to dock. Mooring in remote areas provides shaded spots for a leisurely lunch followed by a siesta. If you choose, spend the night alone on a secluded bank and enjoy the sounds of the forest and a sky full of stars. If you dock in a town and like it, then stay another day.

Bicycles on board allow for ventures into the countryside to the chateaux, vineyards, and historic venues close to the canal. It is easy to arrange a taxi to meet you if a point of interest is further from your boat than you wish to pedal.

Pro Tip: Always have provisions for at least one meal aboard the craft. We once shoved off late in the day planning to stop along the way to shop. We arrived at our small port town destination after the shops had closed. It was also the lone restaurateur’s day off. We ate crackers left over from our flight for dinner due to our poor planning.

Enjoy One Of France’s Oldest Canals

Work on the Canal du Midi began during the reign of Louis XIV in 1667. It meanders for 150 miles through the south of France. The Mediterranean Sea and Atlantic Ocean were linked by this engineering marvel which served to transport goods and people along its path. The railroad rendered the canal obsolete in the 19^th century. Today the canal is dedicated to pleasure cruisers.

The Canal du Midi is our first choice when recommending a self-piloted barge trip in France to friends. Though it is possible to traverse the entire length of the canal in 10 or 12 days, we’ve opted to navigate it in bits and pieces. This allows for a leisurely pace and time to enjoy the countryside and relax quayside in the small port towns.

There are 2,700 miles of navigable rivers and canals in France from which to choose. The Canal du Midi is the furthest south, offering a better chance — though not a guarantee — of pleasant weather.

See Amazing Sights

You will wind along vineyards, woods, and through villages of the south of France. Depending upon your starting point and how long you plan to be on the boat, you can visit the cities of Carcassonne, Toulouse, and Bezier.

Carcassonne

Carcassonne is one of the most well-preserved medieval cities in all of Europe. High above the canal, the old city is a 20-minute walk from the port. The 53 towers have commanded a strategic position since the Romans ruled the region.

Toulouse

The canal passes through Toulouse, known as the “Pink City.” The city’s position at the junction of two canals assured its commercial success. Visit buildings dating to the Renaissance built by wealthy merchants and the Église des Jacobins, the site of the tomb of St. Thomas Aquinas. Toulouse is also home to France’s aerospace industry.

Belzier

In Bezier, you will find the nine locks of Fonseranes. This engineering feat allows boats to rise or fall nearly 70 feet via a series of locks and basins. Onlookers line the quays to watch boaters pass through the series of locks. We once invited a curious bystander to jump aboard and share the ride down the locks with us.

The host of colorful villages along the Étang de Thau provide welcoming ports where you can dock overnight. If you visit Sète during the Fête de la Saint-Louis, you will be treated to a nautical jousting competition in the city’s Royal Canal.

Bouzigues

In Bouzigues, famous for the oysters bearing the same name, you can visit the Musée de l’Étang de Thau. There are hosts of quayside restaurants in Marseillan and Mèze where you can enjoy the breeze over a leisurely lunch. Each presents its own charm and picking where to tie up along the Étang de Thau for the night will present a challenge as you plan your voyage.

Make New Friends

Fellow boaters are a social lot. Over the years we’ve traded stories with a Brit who was a sailor in World War II, an American couple who moved to Brittany on a whim, and many a pleasant lockkeeper. During early evenings in port, Patty and I have been invited aboard neighboring craft for an apero and we’ve hosted fellow travelers on our boat. The best is the lifelong friends we became with a couple from Vienna after they helped us navigate our very first lock.

Robert and Hanna’s boat was already in the lock we would share as it emptied, lowering us into the next basin. I jumped off the boat and began to tie up to a bollard as instructed in the book the rental company provided. Our Austrian companions in the lock coached us through tying up and battling the thrashing water as the lock emptied. I put aside the instruction book.

The slow pace of our cruise and the many locks our boats entered in tandem allowed for plenty of time to chat with our new European friends as we held our boats by ropes as the locks drained. By day two, Patty and I were having lunch on Robert and Hanna’s boat. We’d tie up amid fields and vineyards where we shared charcuterie, cheeses, and a salad. Over a few beers or glasses of wine, we passed time every day sharing stories before setting off for our afternoon’s cruise.

We stayed connected with Robert and Hanna for over 25 years. They’ve hosted us in Vienna several times. Hanna visited our home and family in the U.S. Over the years we scheduled subsequent canal cruises together and met for vacations in Europe. It was the most rewarding of our French canal boating experiences.

Pro Tip: Language is not a barrier. You can navigate the canals of France without fluency in the language. The staff of the boat rental vendor will explain how to manage the craft in English. However, you will be rewarded if you invest some time in picking up at least the pleasantries in French. It is possible to get by in English, though there may be a few conversations where the pointing and hand-gesturing method of communication will come in handy.

The Excitement Of Going For It

Piloting your own boat is challenging but not difficult. It’s relaxing. A bit like a beach vacation with something to do every day. Invite along traveling companions to assist and introduce them to life on a penichette. You will get along fine without a cook or staff. The Canal du Midi is every bit as beautiful from the deck of a small craft as it is for those on a fancy barge.

Thomas Jefferson enjoyed a trip on the Canal du Midi in 1787 and observed “of all the methods of traveling I have ever tried this is the pleasantest.” I agree wholeheartedly. Try your hand as a canal boat captain and see if you do as well.

Packing Tips

The boat rental company will provide suggestions about what to have on board. We never leave our first port without gloves, as wet ropes are unkind to the hands; a flashlight for each traveler; a knife, in the event you must cut a rope in an emergency; and a pantry, well-stocked with wine, water, and provisions for at least one meal.

When To Go

The Canal du Midi is a popular destination. We avoid July and August when the French vacation. Spring and fall provide lovely weather and smaller crowds, and the rental fees are reduced from their high season highs.

Pro Tip: There are frequent flights from Paris which makes Toulouse a good jumping-off spot for a vacation on the Canal du Midi. The ports along the canal where you will pick up your boat are easily reached by train or cab.

We have flown into Montpellier when starting our voyage closer to the Mediterranean. The port at Lattes is a short cab ride from the airport.

Alabama is becoming quite the hiking destination for travelers around the world. It’s no wonder with its incredible natural beauty — roaring waterfalls, rolling mountains, and deep canyons. 

No matter what time of year you visit, Alabama or are passing through, make time to stop and explore the natural side of the state on one of these spectacular hiking trails. 

January

Lake Guntersville State Park

Guntersville, Alabama

Length Varies

Located on the banks of its namesake lake and town, Lake Guntersville State Park offers 36 miles of hiking and biking trails of various lengths and difficulties that lead to incredible views and wildlife. 

Visit the park beginning the second to last weekend in January and take part in the annual Eagle Awareness Weekends that run for three consecutive weekends during which conservationists and birders lead panel discussions and take you out on the trail to view and learn about one of the most mesmerizing avian species, the American bald eagle. 

Pro Tip: Lake Guntersville State Park has an incredible lodge perched high atop a rock bluff. Most rooms in the lodge face the bluff for incredible lake views. Make your reservations early. The lodge fills up fast in January. 

February

Stone Cuts

Monte Sano State Park, Huntsville

Length: 2.4-Mile Moderate Loop 

Hiking at Monte Sano State Park in Huntsville is amazing any time of year, but in the winter, the park is still, peaceful, and quiet, the perfect time to take a hike through an incredible geologic feature of the region, the Stone Cuts. 

The Stone Cuts are just that — a series of tall limestone walls that have been scoured away over the ages by the elements. A combination of the park’s South Plateau Loop, Mountain Mist Trail, Stone Cuts Trail, and Sinks Trail will lead you between the tall white rock walls and a short cave.

Pro Tip: Not only is winter a great time to hike Monte Sano State Park but also to do some star gazing at the Von Braun Astronomical Observatory located right at the park. Doors open to the public Saturday nights for a planetarium show, an informative speaker, and after the show, a view of the night sky through their telescopes. 

March

Cheaha Falls

Talladega National Forest, Delta

Length: 2.3-Mile Easy Out-And-Back Hike

Spring showers ignite the many waterfalls of Alabama and one of the most popular and easiest to hike to is Cheaha Falls in the Talladega National Forest. 

The falls itself is a 20-foot tall plunge-type waterfall with a pool at the bottom, a beautiful and relaxing location if ever there was one. 

The hike itself is along the relatively level but rocky Chinnabee Silent Trail starting at the trail’s southern terminus and parking lot on AL-281. 

April

Walls Of Jericho

Estillfork

Length: 6.4-Mile Out-And-Back, Moderate Hike In, Difficult Out 

The Walls of Jericho have been described as beautiful, awesome, and amazing. The accolades go on and on. It is definitely one of Alabama’s most incredible hiking destinations. 

This hike takes you past deep sinkholes and caves and crosses beautiful turquoise streams before arriving at your destination, the Walls of Jericho themselves — a spectacular high-walled limestone bowl canyon with an incredible plunge waterfall on top that cascades into a hole in the rocks and eventually shoots out through the bottom tier of rocks far below. 

Pro Tip: At a minimum, this is a half-day hike but plan on a full day to be safe. You will be climbing down just over 3 miles into a canyon and what goes down must come back up. Bring plenty of water, snacks, and lunch. Make sure to wear comfortable but sturdy hiking boots. 

May

DeSoto Falls

Mentone

Length: 1.4-Mile Moderate Out-And-Back Trail

One of the tallest, most stunning, and probably most visited waterfalls in Alabama is DeSoto Falls. The falls are located in a separate northern segment of DeSoto State Park and not the main park. 

You can get a breathtaking view of the falls by following this non-marked, rocky, 1.4-mile out-and-back trail that takes you near the bottom of the falls. The turnaround for this trail is alongside the West Fork of Little River close to the base of the falls. It’s a spectacular sight and you may catch a little spray if the wind is right. 

The hike is a moderate one and very rocky. At times you will be climbing over boulders as you walk along the banks of the river. You can get more information on this trail with maps on the AllTrails app and website. 

June

DeSoto Falls Picnic Area

Mentone

Length: 0.2-Mile ADA Accessible Out-And-Back At The Picnic Area 

The easiest way to view DeSoto Falls and one that is perfect for smaller children and is ADA accessible is the 0.2-mile loop at the DeSoto Falls picnic area on DeSoto Falls Road. The short stone and cement path takes you to the edge of the falls with breathtaking views from the top of the roaring falls and canyon. There are picnic tables and restrooms here. 

Pro Tip: Even though Alabama’s waterfalls usually run fast, they can be a mere trickle during times of drought, even DeSoto Falls. 

July

Devil’s Den Via Chinnabee Silent Trail

Talladega National Forest, Delta

Length: 1.4-Mile Moderate Out-And-Back

Everything that makes the Talladega National Forest so beautiful is on full display along the Chinnabee Silent Trail and this hike to Devil’s Den — the shimmering waters of Cheaha Creek as it rushes towards Lake Chinnabee with its many shoals, cascades, and drops, an impressive view of Devil’s Den Gorge from high above on an elevated bluff walkway, and best of all, many refreshing pools that invite you to take a dip in the cool mountain stream. 

The hike begins at the Lake Chinnabee Recreation Area with a turnaround at the walkway high above the gorge.

Pro Tip: There is a small day-use fee charged for parking at the recreation area. 

August 

Mardis Mill Falls

Blountsville

Length: 0.1-Mile Easy Out-And-Back 

Ok, so a hike to Mardis Mill Falls isn’t a challenging full-day hike, but what is at the end of this short, easy walking trail is a spectacular 15-foot tall, 35-foot wide block waterfall with one of the best easy access swimming holes around. 

The falls — also known as Graves Creek Falls by locals — are hidden away just down the hillside from a narrow gravel parking pull-off on the side of Mardis Mill Road. The walk down is easy for young and old alike. If it’s damp out, the rocks can be a little slippery, so be careful. 

Pro Tip: When visiting the town of Blountsville, save some time to check out the Blountsville Historical Park and explore the historic homes, cabins, and churches that date back to the early 1800s and are furnished with period artifacts. 

September

Audubon Bird Sanctuary

Dauphin Island

Length: 3.4-Mile Easy Loop 

There is a whole lot of nature packed into the easy walking 3.4-mile rambling loop hike on Dauphin Island’s Audubon Bird Sanctuary. The trail here loops around beautiful sparkling lakes, turtle-filled wetlands, and along the beaches of the Gulf of Mexico. 

Fall is the best time to hike the sanctuary because the island is a major destination for migrating birds from Canada and across the U.S. as they head to the warmer climbs for the winter, and not just a few. Tens of thousands of them. Dauphin Island has been called “America’s Birdiest City.” 

Pro Tip: There is plenty to do off the trail on Alabama’s barrier island including kayaking adventures, fishing, an aquarium and sea research lab to explore, and history at historic Fort Gaines to name only a few. 

October

Pulpit Rock

Cheaha State Park, Delta

Length: 0.7-Mile Moderate Out-And-Back

We have to get a little leaf peeping in and a wonderful little hike to do just that is this short walk to a rock outcropping called Pulpit Rock atop the state’s highest mountain, Cheaha. 

The hike is a moderate walk over an extremely rock-strewn path but the view from the outcropping is sprawling and stunning. Just use caution on the bluff edge. 

Doug Ghee Accessible Trail

Cheaha State Park, Delta

Length: 0.6-Mile Easy Out-And-Back

For people with mobility issues or small children who want to bathe in the fiery fall colors of Cheaha Mountain, then try Cheaha State Park’s Doug Ghee Accessible Trail.

The boardwalk is made of composite material with high railings that follow the ridge of the state’s tallest mountain and leads out to the edge of a rock outcropping with breathtaking 180-degree views of the Southern Appalachian Mountains. 

November

Pine Beach Trail

Bon Secour National Wildlife Refuge, Gulf Shores

Length: 3.4-Mile Easy Out-And-Back

Heading into winter, the Alabama Gulf Coast offers up its snow — the snowy white beaches of the Gulf of Mexico. There is no better trail to hike to experience the Gulf beaches than the Pine Beach Trail at the Bon Secour National Wildlife Refuge. 

Along the trail, you will experience beautiful ancient oak trees draped in Spanish moss, maritime wetlands and forests, many species of birds and wildlife, and the pristine, and secluded, white beaches of the Gulf of Mexico that in the summer months become prime habitat for nesting loggerhead sea turtles. 

Pro Tip: Dogs are not permitted in the wildlife refuge. 

December

Little Smith Mountain Loop

Jackson’s Gap

Length: 0.9-Mile Moderate Loop 

We wrap up the year with a stunning view. Scamper up and around the rock bluffs and boulders of Smith Mountain where you will be rewarded with spectacular views of Lake Martin from the summit. The view only gets better when you climb the fully restored 90-foot tall fire tower at the peak of the mountain for a 270-degree view of the lake. 

Pro Tip: Lake Martin offers loads of fun and adventure and makes an excellent vacation destination any time of year with fishing, museums, kayaking, and more.

Rossland’s RED Mountain Ski Resort is one of the least crowded ski resorts in British Columbia, but it offers a heart-pounding and gorgeous terrain, massive skiable acres, untouched fresh powder, shorter lines for ski and chairlifts, and one of the best après-ski bars in North America.

In addition to skiing and snowboarding, the little hamlet of Rossland has some of the best outdoor scenery for snowshoe hiking, cross country skiing, charming little boutique shops, local restaurants, and even fat-tire biking.

Located just 2.5 hours north of Washington’s Spokane International Airport, Rossland and the RED Mountain Resort may be a longer drive than you’re used to, but during the ski season (December–April), a shuttle runs between Spokane’s airport and the destination. Pack up your winter gear, grab those ski goggles, and find out why this quaint hidden gem ski destination is perfect for a last-minute March getaway.

This was a hosted trip by Rossland Tourism, but all opinions and recommendations are my own.

1. Beat The Crowds… And The Lines

Rossland and RED Mountain may be famous for their sheer size and variety of skiable terrain, but it’s also known for not being as crowded as other resorts. Those smaller crowds mean shorter lift lines and no tracked-out conditions.

Unlike the typical up-and-down slopes at many resorts, this British Columbia hidden gem ski resort has 360 degrees on Granite Mountain — the largest of the four peaks — as well as  270 degrees of skiing on Grey Mountain.

RED boasts some of the best tree skiing in North America, fluffy and groomed tracks, and stellar ski instructors if you are still a beginner like me! The resort also has snow hosts to guide all levels of skiers and snowboarders throughout the sprawling acres of terrain.

2. Some Of The Best Slopes In North America

What else does the RED Mountain and Rossland area offer? The RED Mountain Resort has 3,850 total skiable acres to explore with 119 marked runs on different peaks. Yet, despite being voted as one of the “Top 10 Ski Resorts in the World” and among the “Best Resorts in North America for advanced skiers” by The Toronto Sun, RED often flies under the radar for most ski enthusiasts.

RED Mountain Resort

Rossland and RED Mountain Resort’s tagline is The Good Life, and you’ll quickly discover why. RED is one of Canada’s oldest ski resorts. The laid-back, crowd-free vibes will charm you into understanding why this BC destination was voted the #1 ski town by USA Today for the last 2 years.

RED Mountain Resort may have 3,000 feet of vertical drops and 3850 skiable acres….

RED Mountain Resort may have 3,000 feet of vertical drops and 3850 skiable acres, but the area of Rossland gets 300 inches of snowfall per year on average, which means glowing white pristine powder on a regular basis.

The runs are groomed and RED Mountain is part of the Ikon Pass, an unlimited ski pass for a family of ski destinations. What’s more, it has the only snowbound taco truck, Flying Phil’s/Taco Rojo, in Canada just up the hill near the Topping Creek chair.

You’ll want to block out at least an entire day for skiing, snowboarding, and resort fun.

3. Après-Ski

After a full day of conquering the slopes, what’s better than an après-ski drink? Rafters, an on-site bar and grill at RED, was voted the top après-ski spot in the world and serves up craft beers on tap, strong cocktails, a full menu of après-ski comfort food, and live music. This place fills up around 4 p.m. and is one of the most popular spots to people watch and unwind at the resort.

Our little group stayed at The Josie (named after one of the largest and most famous gold mines in the area), located just steps from RED. Besides the spacious rooms with views of the slopes, guests can put down those poles and leave their gear with Josie’s ski concierges before hitting the bar for a cocktail or dining on-site at The Velvet Restaurant and Lounge.

What To Order At Velvet: Everyone raved about the yuzu mirin glazed ling cod with poached radish, mushroom, edamame, and a mushroom caramel sauce. But the baby kale and arugula salad with beets, goat cheese, walnuts, cranberries, and a maple cider vinaigrette was perfect for a lighter dinner.

Food & Drink In Rossland

Nearby Rossland has a unique and underrated selection of dining options. Start off your culinary adventure with a stop at Rossland Beer Co. for a taste of the local craft beers before heading out to fill up on incredible Italian food at local favorite Gabriella’s.

If you are in town to shop or explore the local Rossland Museum and Discovery Centre, stop in at Alpine Grind Coffee House or the Seven Summits Coffee Company for a latte. Closer to the resort is Rossberry Hill Bistro, serving up some of the most luscious and hearty Indian fare I’ve had in a while, as well as a modest selection of breakfast sandwiches.

What To Order: At Gabriella’s, any of the pastas are spectacular, but the salmone all’aragosta with lobster lemon cream sauce on a wild coho filet served with risotto cakes is to die for.

At Rossberry Hill, you must have the lamb curry and the potato and peas samosas.

4. The Constella

Staying the night under the stars on top of one of RED Mountain’s glorious peaks in a cozy cabin you have to ski to may be the next top experience on your bucket list. The Constella is an overnight experience on the backside of Granite Mountain that includes six overnight cabins and a shared central clubhouse in RED’s Paradise Basin. For those looking for the ultimate ski-in/ski-out adventure, you can’t get better than this.

Each cabin sleeps up to five guests and is fitted with Wi-Fi access, electricity, baseboard electric heaters, a bathroom with a sink and toilet, hand-made fold-down tables and benches, and hooks for your gear. A central clubhouse serves drinks, beer, and wine in addition to an aprés drink when you check in with the clubhouse host. 

As Canada’s sole ski-in-only overnight stay, you’ll wake in the morning to Paradise Basin’s tree-lined and groomed runs as you ski your way back down to the resort.

5. Rossland Range Recreational Site

Rossland is tucked deep into the Kootenay Rockies region of British Columbia along the Powder Highway, so outdoor activities abound outside of skiing. We spent an afternoon snowshoe hiking in a light snowstorm in the Rossland Range Recreational Site to a few of the 16 day-use cabins scattered around Strawberry Pass. The views from Eagle Nest Cabin were eye-wateringly beautiful and the trails are well-marked.

You should be in relatively good shape to tackle these trails in winter because you’ll be hoofing up some steep inclines. If you’re doing the hike from the parking lot to Eagles Nest Cabin, set aside at least 3 hours and bring a picnic lunch and thermos for a snack when you arrive.

Don’t Limit Yourself To Downhill Skiing

Cross country skiing is also popular here. Just 4 minutes north of town is Black Jack Cross Country Ski Club. This club has more than 30 miles of groomed trails, a doggy loop, and 1.5 miles of lit trails.

Pro Tip: If you don’t have your own vehicle, the Rossland Ski Bus runs during the winter ski season between various points in Rossland and RED Mountain Resort. Starting early in the morning, the bus runs between town and the resort, and 3 days a week on Wednesday, Saturday, and Sunday. The 11 a.m. and 2 p.m. bus makes trips to and from Black Jack Ski Club.

The Kootenay Gateway Shuttle runs airport transfers from various airports during the ski season.

For more last-minute ski inspiration, check out these articles:

• 10 Amazing Ski Resorts In North America Our Readers Love
• 7 Luxury Ski Resorts To Experience Around The World
• 7 Fabulous Ski Resorts Around The World For All Levels

Whether you’re an avid hiker or are considering hitting a trail for the first time, we’ve compiled the ultimate list of best hikes in all 50 states to inspire you. From the Pacific Northwest to New England, Alaska to Florida, and prairies, coasts, canyons, hoodoos, overlooks, and caves in between, our travel experts share the best hike in your state and those you’re hoping to tick off your bucket list.

Alabama

Alabama Birding Trails

Length: Varies, Difficulty: Varies

Over 400 species of birds live in and migrate through Alabama, and this trail system, which stretches from the Tennessee River to the Gulf of Mexico, offers 280 spots to stop and bird-watch in addition to inviting you to traverse miles of gorgeous scenery.

Sage Scott told us, “From mountains and forests to marshes and coastline, Alabama is the most biologically diverse state east of the Mississippi River. While most hiking trails throughout the state are lined with beautiful wildflowers, shaded by trees, and offer glimpses of wildlife, my favorite hikes in Alabama are along the Alabama Birding Trails.” See Scott’s advice for other beautiful hikes in Alabama, too.

Alaska

Ward Lake Loop, Ward Cove

Distance: 1.5 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

“As a fourth-generation Alaskan, I have been traversing the trails in my home state since I was old enough to walk,” Adryn Sumner, who wrote about the most stunning hikes in Alaska, told us. “In a state known for its unparalleled wild beauty and incredibly vast terrain and offerings, the choice of one hike above the others feels like sacrilege. Still, if pressed, I might suggest one that captures the very essence of Alaska herself.

“The Ward Lake Loop is a spiritual experience where visitors of all ages and abilities are enveloped by a world that time forgot,” describes Sumner, “The towering rainforest, mirrored lake, whispering breeze, sunlit meandering path, and powerful rushing creek weave a magical veil from which one hopes never to emerge.”

Arizona

Summer And Fall: Kachina Trail, San Francisco Peaks, Flagstaff

Distance: 10 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

In summer, head for the Kachina Trail in the Flagstaff area’s San Francisco Peaks. It offers a respite from the scorching Arizona heat and is known for its crisp, cool, pine-scented air. Emese Fromm told us, “As you step on the trail, the forest envelops you, as it winds through tall ponderosa pines, fern-filled areas, open meadows, and groves of quaking aspens. In the fall, the aspens put on a dazzling show, while in spring wildflowers offer another dimension to the hike, in the open meadows. This trail starts in the Arizona Snowbowl area, and although it is 10 miles long, the first two miles offer enough of a show to make it worth it.”

Winter And Spring: Apache Wash Loop Trail, Sonoran Desert Preserve, Phoenix

Distance: 6.6 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

In winter, try the Apache Wash Loop Trail in the Sonoran Desert Preserve north of Phoenix. The nearly seven-mile loop takes you past iconic saguaros and teddy bear cacti, plus pencil chollas and stunted palo verde trees. Emese told us, “Following and crossing the Apache Wash — where you are not likely to see water — parts of the trail are greener than most of the surrounding desert. In the spring, from late February through March, this area is one of the best places to see desert wildflowers, especially along the wash.” For more inspiration, read up on the best hikes to experience in Arizona.

Arkansas

Lost Valley Trail, Buffalo National River, Ponca

Distance: 2.3 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

One of many stunning hikes in Arkansas, Lost Valley Trail is deservedly popular considering it leads hikers to a waterfall, a cave, and a swimming spot. This isn’t just a hike — it’s a nature experience.

David Hopkins told us the natural bridge over the first little waterfall is easy to traverse, and he recommends making time to explore the area around Cob Cave before hiking on. “Make sure to spend some time exploring before moving on. The trees provide enough shade in the summer, so this is a trail that’s enjoyable in any season. The best parts of the trail are toward the end as the trail leads you to Eden Falls. Make sure to pack accordingly so you can hop in for a swim at the end.”

California (Northern)

Rubicon Trail, South Lake Tahoe

Distance: 16.4 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Located in South Lake Tahoe, the Rubicon Trail provides an opportunity to immerse yourself in spectacular scenery and refreshes even the weariest spirit with its magnificent pine-scented peace and serenity. The trail connects two state parks, and you’ll enjoy views of the lake during almost the entire hike, which means plenty of great photo ops.

Sue Reddel ad Diana Laskaris told us, “One of our favorite places on the planet, Lake Tahoe appeals to all the senses in every season,” and hitting the Rubicon Trail is a great way to have your own unforgettable Lake Tahoe experience. See the most stunning hikes in Northern California for even more Golden State inspiration.

California (Southern)

Laurel Canyon Trail, Laguna Coast Wilderness Park, Laguna Beach

Distance: 3.6 Miles, Difficulty: Easy To Moderate

Out of the best hikes in Southern California, Laurel Canyon Trail in Laguna Coast Wilderness Park is the hike you cannot miss. Wendy Lee told us, “Most people drive by this 7,000-acre park on their way to the beach without knowing what they are missing.” It winds through meadows full of wildflowers and ascends a rocky slope. “Along the way, the trees are full of birds — over 130 species make their home in this region,” Lee tells us, “I’ve hiked this trail many times and I just don’t get tired of it.”

Colorado

Chasm Lake, Rocky Mountain National Park, Estes Park

Distance: 9.4 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

One of the the nine most stunning hikes in Colorado, Chasm Lake off Highway 7 in Rocky Mountain National Park. According to Mike Owens, it “has all the right ingredients: switchbacks, above treeline, lots of wildflowers — including the state flower, the blue columbine — enough challenge to raise the heart rate, and a good spot for lunch overlooking a roaring river.” It is truly the ultimate Colorado hike.

Connecticut

Yellow Loop, Mianus River Park, Greenwich/Stamford

Length: 4.5 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

On the border of Greenwich and Stamford, the Yellow Loop in Mianus River Park is an easy hike that goes around the entire park, allowing you to take in all of the beautiful scenery. It is one of the beautiful Connecticut hikes recommended by Laskaris and Reddel. The pair tell us that Yellow Loop’s terrain “provides a lot of variety and it’s great for observing wildlife and birds. Taking this hike gives us a chance to appreciate nature and refresh ourselves.”

Delaware

Trap Pond Loop, Trap Pond State Park, Laurel

Distance: 5 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

Marvel at the bald cypress trees that rise from the still waters of Trap Pond when you take to the five-mile-long Trap Pond Loop. In addition to these majestic trees, you could see a variety of birds, from fierce bald eagles to red-headed woodpeckers.

“With an average elevation of 60 feet above sea level,” Scott says, “Delaware is one of the flattest states in the Union. But that doesn’t prevent it from offering scenic hikes along the coast, canal, and other waterways,” including Trap Pond. For more inspiration, read Scott’s take on the best hikes in Delaware.

Florida

Jupiter Inlet Lighthouse Outstanding Natural Area, Tequesta

Distance: Varies, Difficulty: Varies

Appreciate Florida’s unique mangroves and birding opportunities at the Jupiter Inlet Lighthouse Outstanding Natural Area (JILONA). Whether you enjoy authentic Florida or are experiencing the state for the first time, Sara Broers says the Jupiter Inlet trails, which are on either side of Beach Road, will enchant you. In addition to winged ones, you can expect to see manatees in the water here.

Broers told us Florida has surprised her with its hiking trails, and natural areas including Jupiter Inlet have proved that Florida is more than Disney and beaches.

Georgia

Appalachian Trail, Blue Ridge

Distance: Varies, Difficulty: Varies

In Georgia, trekking even a sliver of the iconic Appalachian Trail has to take the crown. Starting at Springer Mountain in Georgia and stretching north some 2,000 miles across 14 states into Maine, the Appalachian Trail is the world’s longest hiking-only footpath, with 78 miles residing in the Peach State. While it is hard for Scott to choose a favorite outdoor experience in Georgia, where hikes range from forested mountains to ocean coasts, she told us hopping on a part of the A.T. is an unforgettable hike you just can’t miss. For access point recommendations, check out Scott’s roundup of the best scenic hikes in Georgia.

Hawaii

Diamond Head Summit Trail, Diamond Head State Monument, Oahu

Distance: 1.6 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

The Diamond Head Summit Trail on the island of Oahu is truly the quintessential Hawaiian hike. Cindy Barks told us, “It really is the hike you can’t leave Hawaii without doing. Not only does it give you bragging rights for climbing Honolulu’s most recognizable landmark, but the payoff is spectacular. After scrambling up steep switchbacks and passing through a 225-foot-long lighted tunnel, you’re rewarded with a sweeping view of Honolulu’s gleaming skyline bordering a shoreline of white-sand beach and turquoise-blue water.

“Because of its popularity, you’ll probably have to share the trail with hundreds of others, but I believe it’s worth it. It is a relatively short hike at just 0.8-mile one-way, but the Diamond Head Summit Trail packs a sweet tropical punch.”

Idaho

Redfish Lake Loop, Sawtooth National Forest, Custer County

Distance: 15.1 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

High in the Sawtooth Mountains, Redfish Lake provides the perfect summer hike. If you find yourself in Idaho you must see Redfish Lake according to Robert Rosenthal, who advises checking out the historic lodge first. “Then, take the Redfish Lake Trail as far as you want to go,” he says, “The mountain lake just has to be seen to be believed.” While the full 15.1-mile loop is rated hard, hiking a portion of the trail doesn’t have to be. For more Gem State inspo, check out the best hikes in Idaho.

Illinois (Northern)

Dells Canyon And Bluff Trail, Matthiessen State Park, LaSalle County

Distance: 2 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

The best hikes are often the ones overshadowed by the famous ones. And that’s certainly the case when it comes to the Dells Canyon and Bluff Trail in Matthiessen State Park in Northern Illinois. Millions of visitors flock to Starved Rock State Park a few miles away to visit its famous canyons, but Rosenthal tells us this trail around and through the canyon at Matthiessen State Park, just three miles south of Starved Rock, is his favorite trail in the area. “Walk the bluffs above the canyon and then take the stairway down into the canyon to view the cliffs from below,” he suggests.

Illinois (Southern)

Red Cedar Trail, Giant City State Park, Makanda

Distance: 12 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Giant City State Park is home to some massive rock formations (hence the “giant”) and the Red Cedar Trail connects them all. It gives you a taste of everything great about hiking in Southern Illinois, and at one of the rock outcroppings, you might not believe you’re in Illinois at all. A native of Southern Illinois, Rosenthal reveals that this has been his favorite hike since childhood. He suggests that you hike part of the trail or take the whole day and hike all of it, then end your day with a great meal at the Giant City Lodge.

Indiana

Cowles Bog Trail in Indiana Dunes National Park, Dune Acres

Distance: 4.7 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

If you haven’t spent a lot of time in the area, you might be surprised to learn that you can do some sand hiking in Indiana. Take to the Cowles Bog Trail in Indiana Dunes National Park, and Broers says you’ll enjoy beautiful views of Lake Michigan that you’ll carry with you forever. In addition to the windswept beaches, there are also marshes, ponds, and black oaks along the trail. For the best views of Lake Michigan, Broers warns against any shortcuts and says you should take the longer, more strenuous hike.

Iowa

Pea’s Creek Canyon, Ledges State Park, Madrid

Distance: 4 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Spend an unforgettable day hiking in Ledges State Park in Central Iowa, where the ledges add to the beauty of hiking trails that are covered by canopies of lush, green trees. Broers recommends the four-mile Pea’s Creek “canyon” walk and told us autumn is an exceptional time of year to visit, as the fall foliage colors are rich and varied. She also enthusiastically recommends these other hikes to experience in Iowa.

Kansas

Horsethief Canyon, Kanopolis State Park, Kanopolis

Distance: 9.1 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

The name of this scenic hike in Kansas is where the intrigue begins. Tap into your inner adventurer as you navigate in and out of narrow, rocky canyons and over multiple water crossings. The trail is relatively flat, and you’ll enjoy great views of Smoky Hill River. Owens, who tells us this is his favorite spot for a walk in the Sunflower State, suggests making a side trip to Mushroom Rocks — stone pillars topped by harder, larger rocks that look like mushrooms — after you’ve finished hiking Horsethief Canyon. This was the meeting spot for generations of Native tribes and in later years, pioneers heading west.

Kentucky

Eagle Falls Trail, Cumberland Falls State Park, Near Parkers Lake

Distance: 1.8 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

This hike is the perfect blend of a moderate to slightly strenuous hike with a wonderful payoff at the end. The lollipop-shaped trail leads you to beautiful Eagle Falls, and if you take your time to explore, you’ll notice caves and, depending on the time of year, views of Cumberland Falls along the way. Hopkins, who calls this his favorite Kentucky hike in recent years, warns that it is mostly uphill and involves stairs, so don’t be deceived by the fact that the hike is under two miles. For longer and/or less strenuous hikes, check out his other recommendations for fantastic hikes in Kentucky.

Louisiana

Barataria Preserve, Marrero

Distance: Varies, Difficulty: Varies

If you’re spending time in New Orleans, the perfect antidote to all the partying the city has to offer is a hike at nearby Barataria Preserve inside Jean Lafitte National Historical Park and Preserve. The preserve’s connected dirt and gravel trails are easy to navigate and afford hikers a view of the flora and fauna of Louisiana’s untamed swampland. As Erika Ebsworth-Goold tells us, “A tromp through Barataria is a great way to get some nature in, even during a whirlwind south Louisiana weekend!” She also recommends these other beautiful hikes in Louisiana.

Maine

Giant’s Stairs Trail, Bailey Island, Harpswell

Distance: 0.7 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

Out of all of the stunning hikes in Maine, Giant’s Stairs Trail on Bailey Island is Laskaris and Reddel’s favorite. According to the duo, “It isn’t terribly rugged hiking, but the views of the ocean are absolutely stunning. There is so much beautiful coastal area, wide open and perfect for leisurely exploring. It’s a peaceful place to let your mind wander as you immerse yourself in a scenic panorama that fills you with the power of nature.”

Maryland

Sugarloaf Mountain, Dickerson

Distance: 3.5 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Maryland is home to many picturesque hikes, but Sugarloaf Mountain boasts “addictive wildlife,” according to Reddel and Laskaris. “As avid wildlife lovers and bird-watchers, we love the opportunity for animal encounters in nature,” they say, “Plus, hiking around a mountain that is 14 million years old helps you gain perspective, especially when you’re in the midst of breathtaking scenery.”

Massachusetts

World’s End Trail, Boston Harbor Islands National Park, Hingham

Distance: 3.8 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

“Boasting panoramic views of Boston, World’s End Trail in Hingham is one of the most scenic hikes in Massachusetts. The peninsula juts out into Boston Harbor for an easy 3.8-mile stroll through marshes, woodlands, and windswept pathways. If you are visiting Boston, it is a wonderful opportunity to experience the New England coastline, hear the rhythmic waves, and enjoy the outdoors all year round,” says Barrett.

Michigan

Pyramid Point Trail, Sleeping Bear Dunes National Lakeshore, Empire

Distance: 2.7 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Out of all of the fantastic hikes in Michigan, Pyramid Point Trail in Sleeping Bear Dunes is a “beautiful hike with lots of variety including forest, meadows, and, of course, sand dunes. The views of Lake Michigan from the outlook are breathtaking,” according to Reddel and Laskaris, “The whole area is worth exploring and gives you a chance to breathe in clean air and find some time to enjoy being out in nature’s glory.”

Minnesota

Angleworm Lake Trail, Superior National Forest, Ely

Distance: 13 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

Minnesota is called the Land of 10,000 Lakes for a reason, and if you hop on any trail near a Minnesota lake, odds are, you’ll be rewarded with memorable views. This is especially true when it comes to rugged Angleworm Lake Trail in Superior National Forest. This hike, which takes two to three days to complete, takes you up over 1,500 feet and past numerous lakes. For more Minnesota trail recommendations, all of which Broers told us are “exceptional when sunset rolls around,” consult her list of perfect hikes in Minnesota.

Mississippi

Mississippi Sandhill Crane National Wildlife Refuge, Gautier

Distance: Varies, Difficulty: Easy

Out of the many picturesque hikes in Mississippi, the number, length, and difficulty of the trails in the Mississippi Sandhill Crane National Wildlife Refuge are relatively limited. However, it’s the possibility of seeing native sandhill cranes that makes this Gautier spot Scott’s number-one pick in the state. She tells us that the refuge was “established in 1975 to protect these critically endangered, long-legged, crimson-masked birds.”

Missouri

Big Spring Trail, Ellsinore

Distance: 1.8 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

Missouri is known as the Cave State thanks to limestone that dissolves as water passes through, creating caves and springs. Out of all of the beautiful hikes in the “Show-Me” state, the best one incorporates a cave spring. Big Spring Trail follows a branch of the Current River, one of the best rivers to float in Missouri, that’s fed by Big Spring.

The water along the trail is especially blue and chock-full of dissolved limestone. You’ll hike under the auspices of some of the Ozark Mountains, some of the oldest mountains in North America. Toward the end of the walk, Owens says you should be on the lookout for the spring itself, which jumps out of a hillside. Just don’t be tempted to drink the water. No matter how clear it looks, it’s not potable.

Montana

The Highline, Glacier National Park

Distance: 12 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

Renowned for its beauty and difficulty, The Highline comes endorsed by Owens, who spends his summers as a Glacier National Park Red Bus driver. This is a long hike, so you’ll need to be prepared with extra water, food, and strong legs. You’ll also need to take a shuttle either to or from your car. Despite the trail’s difficulty (one portion of the hike is so narrow that the National Park Service has provided a cable handrail for hikers to hold onto), it is heavily traveled and well-marked. Those bold enough to traverse this terrain are rewarded with views of Heaven’s Peak and a creek crossing where Mike says you can “rip off your boots and cool your toes.” There’s also the Granite Park Chalet, where you can take a mid-hike lunch and bathroom break if your timing’s right.

For more hikes in Glacier, specifically, see Owen’s picks for fantastic hikes in Glacier National park, or read up on Laskaris and Reddel’s picks for the best hikes to experience in Montana.

Nebraska

Toadstool Trail, Ogalala National Grassland, Harrison

Distance: 0.8 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

When most people hear Nebraska, they think flat. But Nebraska is not all flat prairies. The western half of Nebraska is loaded with geological features the likes of which you won’t find anywhere else. “If you only have time to explore one hiking trail in Nebraska, you need to visit the Toadstool Geological Park and hop on the hiking trails,” Broers told us. “The best tip that I can give you when hiking in Nebraska is to carry plenty of water with you at all times,” says Broers, “Nebraska is hot in the summer, but it’s extremely rewarding with all of its beauty.”

Nevada

Alpine Lakes Loop Trail, Great Basin National Park, Baker

Distance: 2.7 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

“Alpine Lakes Loop Trail in Great Basin National Park is hard to beat,” Barks remarks. “Right from the trailhead, you’re treated to the sweet sound of trickling water from the creek that crosses the trail numerous times. But the real treasures of the hike are the two lakes — Stella and Teresa — that you pass along the way.

“Stella is surrounded by snow-patched peaks, which are reflected in the lake’s sparkling clear water. Teresa is fed by a pretty little creek that winds through a green, grassy meadow,” Barks tells us. Out of all of the spectacular hikes in Nevada, Barks gives the Alpine Lakes Loop Trail a 10 out of 10 on the loveliness scale.

New Hampshire

Old Bridle Path, West Rattlesnake Mountain, Center Sandwich

Distance: 1.7 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

“Old Bridle Path is a quick, fun hike that is appropriate for the whole family. The payoff is great views of the New Hampshire Lakes Region. On a sunny afternoon, the shaded trail is cool and inviting, beaconing you to push forward for a remarkable, mountain-studded view,” Barrett told us as she reflected on the most picturesque hikes in New Hampshire.

New Jersey

Buttermilk Falls And Crater Lake Loop Trail, Walpack Fish And Wildlife Management Area, Layton

Distance: 6.7 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

Hiking the Buttermilk Falls and Crater Lake Loop Trail is a stunning and challenging experience. Part of the New Jersey side of the Delaware Water Gap, Buttermilk Falls is a gorgeous and powerful waterfall — 180 feet of water come crashing down. Crater Lake is one of the prettiest lakes in the state. In between, wildlife and birds abound.

The 6-plus mile trail starts at the top of the falls and includes part of the Appalachian Trail. It can also be done in reverse by starting at Crater Lake. Buttermilk Falls can be easily seen without hiking, but the hike makes seeing the falls even more of an experience. The contrasting experiences of the peaceful lake and the powerful waterfalls leave an impression on the soul.

As an alternative to the Crater Lake Loop, the beautiful Tillman Ravine and Silver Spray Falls are a short walk from Buttermilk.

Sue Davies and Regina Ang said, “Our favorite hikes include lakes and waterfalls. Buttermilk Falls to Crater Lake is the best in all of New Jersey.” If you’re after a more accessible hike, see their recommendations for the best hikes to experience in New Jersey.

New Mexico

White Sands National Park, Dona Ana And Otero Counties

Distance: Varies, Difficulty: Varies

From snow-capped mountains in the north to dry desert paths in the south, the most memorable hiking trails in New Mexico are at White Sands National Park. Scott told us that the shifting sand dunes of one of the world’s largest gypsum fields, which are about an hour east of Las Cruces, “provide a scenic backdrop unlike any other place in the United States.”

New York

The Constitution Marsh Trail, Storm King State Park, Garrison

Distance: 1.2 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Of all the gorgeous hikes in New York, the Constitution Marsh Trail at the Constitution Marsh Audubon Center and Sanctuary in Garrison is a must-visit. Self-described “avid bird watchers and wildlife observers” Reddel and Laskaris feel thrilled to be in a place where nature surrounds them in all its glory. “To be rewarded even in the winter with the sight of bald eagles soaring and calling to one another is as exciting as it gets,” they say — and it’s just over an hour from NYC.

North Carolina

Green River Cove Trail, Green River Gameland, Saluda

Distance: 6.5 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

North Carolina’s Green River Valley is a sight to behold, and the road to get into the valley — which has 18 switchbacks going down a steep mountain — is part of the fun. Once you reach the bridge at the bottom, you can take the Green River Cove Trail in either direction. Rosenthal told us, “There’s just nothing like a trail along a river, especially when it’s fully flowing and filled with whitewater kayaks. This trail is steep, but the climb is worth it.” Plan to enjoy some of the most amazing views in the state, and read up on stunning hikes in North Carolina as you decide where else your adventures will take you.

North Dakota

Maah Daah Hey Trail, Western North Dakota

Distance: 140+ Miles, Difficulty: Hard

The granddaddy of all the seven best hikes to experience in North Dakota the Maah Daah Hey Trail system is over 140 miles long and composed of several different segments that can be enjoyed by hikers of all abilities. It passes through valleys and prairies, by jagged peaks, and alongside rivers. Hop on the trail near Watford City, Medora, or somewhere in between and enjoy an out-and-back hike, or, if you’re up for the challenge, plan to traverse the entire trail for the trek of a lifetime.

Ohio

Buckeye Trail, Encircling Ohio

Distance: 1,444 Miles, Difficulty: Varies

Named for the state tree, Buckeye Trail is an epic 1,444-mile loop. Following the perimeter of Ohio, it encircles the state, offering a wide variety of hikes to spectacular falls, through deeply carved gorges, and along tree-lined paths.

Scott tells us you can “simply follow the rectangular blue blazes and explore the Buckeye State!” Of course, you can also enjoy out-and-back Buckeye Trail hikes that allow you to determine your own hiking time and distance. Aside from the Buckeye Trail, Scott recommends these picturesque hikes in Ohio, too.

Oklahoma

Turner Falls Park, Davis

Distance: 3.5 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

In addition to the beautiful waterfalls that give Turner Falls Park its name, the stunning trails, castle-style ruins, and a good old-fashioned swimming hole make this location the place to hike in Oklahoma. Broers tells us you could drive by these falls on I-35 numerous times and not know what you’re missing out on. The park’s trails form a loop that’s heavily trafficked and accessible year-round. For more OK hiking inspiration, see Broers’ recommendations of beautiful hikes in Oklahoma.

Oregon

Lewis and Clark Discovery Trail, Ecola State Park, Seaside

Distance: 14.1 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

Just outside the vacation town of Seaside, Lewis and Clark Discovery Trail is in Ecola State Park, one of Oregon’s many beautiful state parks. Also known as the Tillamook Head Trail, this stunning Oregon hike invites you to climb the cliffs above the Pacific Ocean and provides one stunning view after another.

Rosenthal told us, “It took my wife and I such a long time to complete this hike because we kept stopping to take pictures. The green moss on every tree and rock, the mist rolling in off the ocean — it might be my favorite hike in the entire West.”

Pennsylvania (Eastern)

Falls Trail, Ricketts Glen State Park, Benton

Distance: 6.6 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

When in Eastern Pennsylvania, do not miss the Falls Trail at Ricketts Glen State Park. Like most hikers, Reddel and Laskaris love waterfalls, “so the opportunity to hike and see so many of them along one trail is truly spectacular,” the say, “In addition to the many waterfalls, the trail is challenging enough to make you take your time to enjoy the scenery, birds, and wildlife for an unforgettable adventure.”

Pennsylvania (Western)

Kinzua Bridge Trail, Kinzua Bridge State Park, Mount Jewett

Distance: 1.2 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

In Western Pennsylvania, the trail not to miss is the Kinzua Bridge Skywalk. The actual hike to the skywalk is relatively easy and is paved until you get to the bridge, which is then wooden and flat for the entire length of the completely unique, high-in-the-sky structure. Summon your courage and enjoy the “only here” views of the treetops and expansive sky.

Rhode Island

Sachuest Point National Wildlife Refuge Trail, Middletown

Distance: 2.4 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

Jutting out into Sachuest Bay, the Sachuest Point National Wildlife Refuge Trail hugs the coastline for most of its easy 2.4-mile loop and will introduce you to the real Rhode Island. Enjoy gorgeous water views, plus a seemingly endless array of other flora, fauna — including deer — and vistas. Barrett recommends these scenic hikes in Rhode Island as well.

South Carolina

Table Rock Trail, Table Rock State Park, Pickens

Distance: 6.4 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

“You’ll boast quads of steel after this eight-mile workout in Table Rock State Park, but most agree it’s one of the best hikes in South Carolina,” Sumner says. “Strenuous but spectacular, if a six-year-old sporting his favorite KEEN Targhees can manage it, it’s on the table for most everyone.

“Stately boulders, abundant wildflowers, and rushing waterfalls along the way provide ample opportunities to stop at lookouts for a breath and to take in the sights on the steep incline. The well-marked path is 75 percent uphill, so summiting may feel like an Everest-level achievement,” Sumner states, “Still, a packed lunch enjoyed after such an effort over sweeping views of the lake and foothills is extra satisfying.”

South Dakota

Black Elk Peak Loop, Black Hills

Distance: 3.5 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

If you only have time for one best hikes to experience in South Dakota, Broers says it has to be the ascent to Black Elk Peak from Sylvan Lake in Custer State Park. Making it to the top — which involves numerous switchbacks and hiking through a pine forest — is an accomplishment rewarded with stunning views of Custer State Park and South Dakota’s Black Hills from over 7,200 feet. The area’s wildlife is abundant, so Broers recommends packing your binoculars, “as you never know what you’ll see.”

Tennessee

Chestnut Mountain Area And Benton Falls

Distance: 3 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

Talk to any hiker and odds are their favorite Tennessee hike is in Great Smoky Mountain National Park. However, if you’re hiking in Tennessee, you owe it to yourself to head to the far southeastern corner of the state, only a few miles from the North Carolina and Georgia borders. In the Chestnut Mountain area, Rosenthal recommends taking the Benton Falls Trail from the Chilhowee Recreation Area in the north or from the Parksville Lake Campground to the south. Either route takes you by the beautiful 65-foot-tall waterfall.

Texas

City Trails: Dallas And Austin

Distance: Varies, Difficulty: Easy

Scott is aware that hardcore hikers may scoff at these suggestions, given the many fantastic hikes in the great state of Texas, but the 7.5-mile Katy Trail in Dallas and the 10-mile Ann and Roy Butler Hike-And-Bike Trail in Austin are two of her faves. Scott loves the Katy Trail for its proximity to one of her favorite places to stay in Dallas, Hotel Zaza.

Austin is home to many great hikes along the Greenbelt, but Scott prefers the urban Ann and Roy Butler Hike-And-Bike Trail that loops around Austin’s Lady Bird Lake. Take the route over Congress Avenue Bridge at twilight between fall and spring to see over 1.5 million Mexican free-tail bats emerge to chase down dinner.

Utah

Queen’s Garden/Navajo Loop Trail, Bryce Canyon National Park, Bryce

Distance: 2.9 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Utah is home to several gorgeous hikes, but you can’t miss the Queen’s Garden and Navajo Loop combination trail in Bryce Canyon National Park. Hike through gorgeous hoodoos, under natural arches, and through red rock tunnels to the bottom of Bryce Canyon. Queen’s Garden displays hoodoos of all shapes and sizes, including the Queen Victoria Hoodoo, which was named for its resemblance to a London statue of the English monarch.

“Scenery changes on the bottom of the canyon, where you walk through a flat area in the shadow of cottonwood trees,” according to Fromm, “Reaching Wall Street might be the most spectacular area of this trail, as you walk in a narrow opening in the shadow of high, towering rocks. On the way out, stops around each bend offer gorgeous views of the canyon below. Though the climb out is steep, overall, the hike is pleasant and not too strenuous if you take it slow.”

Vermont

Quechee Gorge Dewey Pond Trail, Quechee Gorge State Park, Hartford

Distance: 2.8 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

Pronounced kwee-chee, Quechee is a small village along U.S. Route 4 in the town of Hartford, Vermont. Quechee Gorge Dewey Pond Trail can be found in Quechee Gorge State Park. The first third this wide and inviting out-and-back trail is ADA-accessible.

As you follow the Ottauquechee River, there are benches for quiet moments during which you can enjoy scenic vistas and the sound of water rushing through the gorge. While this hike is rated easy, there is one section that has a noteworthy incline that’s marked by roots and rocks. Otherwise, Barrett tells us it’s the perfect spot for a quiet Northeast nature walk. Check out her other picks for the best hikes in the Green Mountain State.

Virginia

Cedar Run – Whiteoak Circuit, Shenandoah National Park, McGaheysville

Distance: 7 Miles, Difficulty: Hard

Most avid hikers consider Shenandoah National Park a bucket-list destination. With more than 500 miles of trails, it sweeps across portions of the Blue Ridge Mountains near the charming town of Charlottesville, Virginia. Also known as Whiteoak Canyon Trail, Cedar Run – Whiteoak Circuit is rugged magic. Ebsworth-Goold tells us you’ll face a steep incline on this seven-mile trail, but the payoff comes when you meander past six incredibly beautiful waterfalls. If you want to spend more time on the trail in Virginia, check out the best hikes from across the state.

Washington

Horseshoe Bend Trail, Mount Baker National Forest, Deming

Distance: 2.8 Miles, Difficulty: Easy

Washington State is home to several gorgeous hikes, but Horseshoe Bend Trail has fewer visitors than some of the state’s better-known trails according to Fromm. So although it is easy to access from the road, hopefully, this relatively easy walk will offer some solitude.

This out-and-back trail follows the rushing river through a dense, ancient forest filled with mossy trees. It’s an easy walk for about half of the way and will give you plenty of opportunities to stop and enjoy the sounds of the rushing river that’s surrounded by the lush green of the Washington forest.

Visiting in August, Fromm found wild raspberries on the shore and spent time watching squirrels running up and down the trees. “Peeking out from the trees, the view of distant mountains beyond the river surrounded by all this lush green formed some of the most beautiful sights I could imagine. Passing through tunnels of green moss-filled trees with the sound of the river fading in the background, the second part of the trail narrows and is overgrown in a few places, making it just a bit challenging and giving me the impression of being in deep, lush forested fairyland. Overall, for relatively little effort you are rewarded with some of the most gorgeous vistas of the Pacific Northwest.”

West Virginia

Maryland Heights Trails, Harpers Ferry National Historical Park

Distance: 4.5 – 6.5 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

History and stunning views come together in this can’t-miss West Virginia hike. Maryland Heights Trails lets you choose your own adventure. Hike the 4.5 miles to the Maryland Heights Overlook and add another couple of miles with the more strenuous Stone Fort Loop trail.

“This hiking loop has plenty of other hikers, so don’t expect complete solitude,” says O’Neal Smith, “The elevation gain is 1,473 feet, and at the top, you’ll look out over Harpers Ferry, site of a Civil War-era raid that took place where the Potomac and Shenandoah Rivers meet. The loop brings you back to your starting place.”

Wisconsin

Ice Age National Scenic Trail, Verona (And Elsewhere Across The State)

Distance: 1,000+ Miles, Difficulty: Varies

The Ice Age National Scenic Trail offers everything you could want in a Wisconsin hike, and it can be accessed from points across the state. Wander through forests, prairies, meadows, and lakes, and witness Wisconsin’s unique glacial landscape at every turn. In the winter, Reddel and Laskaris love snowshoeing on the Verona segment. The adventurous duo tells us that there are so many different trailheads that you’ll be able to enjoy hiking the trail no matter how long or challenging of a hike you’re after.

Wyoming

Phelps Lake Loop, Moose

Distance: 4.4 Miles, Difficulty: Moderate

Boasting not one but two national parks, Wyoming offers several wonderful hikes. Located in Grand Teton National Park, Phelps Lake Loop is one of the more lightly trafficked trails, yet it features spectacular views of the mountains. Moose, deer, and other wildlife frequent the area, which is shaded by towering evergreen trees. The hike leads to Phelps Lake, which looks straight out of a storybook.

Pro Tip: Broers recommends making this hike between May and September and wearing layers if you start in the morning, as the air can warm quite quickly.

This article is presented by KEEN Footwear. Shop KEEN’s hiking boots, water shoes, and other hiking shoes here.

Related Reading:

• 9 Best Hikes On The U.S. Gulf Coast From Pensacola To New Orleans
• The App Every Hiker Needs To Find Great Trails And Stay Safe
• Hiking Over 50: 12 Things to Know Before Your First Trek

Cruises and water sports may not be top of mind when planning a trip to Phoenix or Scottsdale, Arizona. Despite its desert climate, you’ll find several lakes and reservoirs created by dams built to control river flow and provide irrigation. Saguaro Lake in Tonto National Forest is one of these. Located approximately 40 miles east of downtown Phoenix, 20 minutes east of Mesa, Arizona, along the North Bush Highway, the lake was created by the construction of the Steward Mountain Dam on the Salt River. Completed in 1930, it was the last of four reservoirs formed by the damming of that river.

The 1,200-acre lake is 10 miles long and reaches depths of more than 110 feet at its deepest point. Its 22 miles of shoreline include rocky crags, canyon walls, marshland, and desert shrubland. Saguaro Lake offers a variety of recreational activities and is the site of a scenic and educational riverboat cruise.

For those reasons, it makes a very fine day trip from Phoenix.

1. The Desert Belle

The Desert Belle riverboat has provided a pleasant and relaxing way to enjoy the beauty of Saguaro Lake for over fifty years. On this 90-minute, narrated cruise, you’ll see rugged desert and mountain beauty, birds and wildlife. The two-level boat seats 145 passengers inside an air-conditioned lower cabin, on an open deck at the front of the boat, and on the covered open-air upper deck. Seating is first come, first serve. There are bathrooms and a snack bar on board.

The Captain narrates your ride from the upper deck via an intercom system. The ride would be enjoyable even without the narration as you lean back and take in the fresh air and dramatic scenery, but it is worth paying attention to what is being said. Not only does the Captain point out places of interest and wildlife you might otherwise miss, he provides interesting information about the history, geology, plants, and wildlife of the lake, along with fun Arizona myths and trivia.

With only snacks available on the Desert Belle, you may wish to have a more substantial meal before or after your cruise. The Lakeshore Restaurant at the Marina overlooks the lake and offers indoor and outdoor dining. You can take in panoramic views of the mountains or watch the ducks in the water closer to shore.

The Desert Belle sails two to three times a day, depending on the season. Although tickets can be purchased at the walk-up ticket booth if there is still room on the boat, buying advance tickets is recommended to guarantee a seat. Note that payment at the ticket booth is via credit card, check, or traveler’s check. Cash is not accepted at the booth. Credit/debit cards are not accepted on the boat. Snacks and drinks must be purchased with cash. The boat is accessible to people with disabilities. In addition to its regular, narrated cruises, the Desert Belle has special wine, craft beer, and live music sailings. Check the website for details.

2. See Saguaro Cacti

Saguaro Lake is named for the saguaro cactus. The Sonoran desert is the only natural habitat of this iconic symbol of the American west. Although saguaros can reach heights of 40 to 60 feet, they are very slow-growing; a ten-year-old saguaro may be less than a couple of inches tall. It takes 75 to 100 years for saguaros to grow the first of their signature arms. Mature saguaros may have a dozen arms. Others grow none. White saguaro blooms appear on the top of the cactus in May or June, and sometimes as early as April. The fleeting blooms open at night and last through midday. The saguaro flower is the state flower of Arizona.

The scenery changes as you cruise around the lake. Given the lake’s name, you may not be surprised to see saguaros of varying sizes dotting the cliffs and flatlands amid other desert shrubs and cacti. At times, a lone saguaro appears to be growing out of pure rock. However, it may surprise you to discover diverse ecosystems in the lake basin. You’ll pass stands of mesquite and ironwood trees and marshlands filled with cattails.

3. View Wildlife

Many types of birds live here. You may see bald eagles, woodpeckers, hawks, vultures, blue herons, cactus wrens, cardinals, quail, or thrashers. You may also spot wildlife along the shore and up the sides of the mountains. Bighorn sheep are the most common, but the area is also home to coyotes, bobcats, mountain lions, and deer. Bring binoculars.

4. Water Activities

For those who are interested in more active water activities, Saguaro Lake offers opportunities for boating, kayaking, sailing, waterskiing, and jet skiing. The lake is also a popular fishing hole. It is known for its largemouth bass, but carp, bluegill, rainbow trout, crappie, catfish, walleye, and other kinds of bass are also found. The Arizona Fish and Game Department stocks rainbow trout. (Note that an Arizona fishing license is required.)

Find boat rentals and fishing supplies at Precision Marine at Saguaro Lake Marina.

5. Hiking

For those interested in walking through the scenic Sonoran desert surrounding the lake, Butcher Jones Trail skirts the edge of the lake and winds in and out of the many coves. Suitable for all skill levels, the trail is a total of four miles in and back. It has minimal elevation changes and offers beautiful mountain and lake views. Burro Cove at the end of the trail is a popular fishing spot.

The trailhead is located in the Butcher Jones Recreational Area where you’ll also find a beach and a picnic area.

6. Overnight At The Lake

Bagley Flat Campground is located about four miles from the dam. The 30-site campground is accessible only by boat. There are picnic tables, grills and toilet facilities, but no drinking water and no trash facility. Bring your own drinking water and take your trash with you when you leave.

For overnight accommodations accessible by land and with more amenities, consider Saguaro Lake Guest Ranch. Saguaro Lake Ranch was created out of the work camp built in 1927 for workers building the Stewart Mountain Dam. It later operated as a fishing lodge before it became a guest ranch. Its twenty rustic ranchette cottages feature traditional Western decor. There is a buffet-style dining hall. Amenities to keep you active include a swimming pool, a shuffleboard court, a ping pong table, badminton, and volleyball. Try your hand at kayaking or tubing in the warmer months. Go horseback riding for an “Old West” experience. Trail rides, available full-time from October through April, take you through the majestic Goldfield Mountain range and along the Lower Salt River.

7. Dine With A View

Enjoy a magnificent view of the lake and the mountains while dining at Shiprock Restaurant. Located at Saguaro Lake Marina, the restaurant offers both indoor and patio seating. It is open for breakfast and lunch daily. Early dinners (the restaurant closes at 7 p.m.) are available on Fridays and Saturdays.

Saguaro Lake is located in Tonto National Forest. A park pass is not required to take the Desert Belle tour or to visit the marina restaurant, but you need a Tonto National Park pass to enter the area for all other activities, including boating, fishing, hiking Butcher Jones Trail and camping. Although the passes are not expensive, they need to be purchased before you get to the lake. Passes are available at a number of gas stations or stores in town. Details can be found on the USDA Forest Service website.

Related Reading:

• 10 Phoenix Snowbird Rentals You Need To Book Now For This Winter
• The One Phoenix Train Trip That’s Perfect For Art Lovers
• My 8 Favorite Chihuly Glass Art Pieces At Phoenix’s Desert Botanical Garden

Arriving at Waterside at Royal Malewane — a fabulous safari lodge that’s recently opened in Thornybush Private Game Reserve bordering South Africa’s famous Kruger National Park — we were delighted to see several spiral-horned nyala antelopes wandering through camp, many with babies in tow, making themselves at home as they browsed on the indigenous flower beds and took sips from the suites’ private pools. Shaded by a grove of towering fever trees, and beside a broad waterhole where wildlife come to drink, the lodge is unfenced and game animals can, and do, pass through freely.

Waterside is an ultra-luxurious lodge, a spacious sanctuary, and one that has been meticulously planned and executed. It ensures maximum comfort, privacy, and a truly unforgettable safari experience. For anyone contemplating an African safari, this is a destination that should be right at the top of your wish list.

Why We Chose Waterside

We chose Thornybush Private Game Reserve, where Waterside is one of a dozen lodges, for our visit. Thornybush, renowned for its focus on conservation, stretches 29,000 acres and is home to such an abundance of wildlife. Here, you’re almost guaranteed to spot the Big Five (lion, leopard, elephant, rhino, and buffalo) on your visit — making it an ideal safari destination for experts and novices alike. It’s even been the setting for a number of wildlife documentaries.

The Lodge Itself

The exterior of this safari lodge is cleverly designed to blend into the surrounding scenery. Meanwhile, the interiors are colorful, contemporary, and full of carefully curated artworks and décor.

It’s Family Friendly

Waterside welcomes multigenerational families and accepts children of all ages. There’s an excellent kids’ program to keep the little ones entertained between game drives.

Pro Tip: While the kids are otherwise occupied, a visit to the lodge spa for a soothing wellness treatment is highly recommended for parents and grandparents.

Dining

Dining at Waterside is a memorable experience. The menu changes on a daily basis. Every meal is special — and made even more so by the exhaustive wine and cocktail list that includes an impressive range of craft gins, whiskies, and South African wines. Enjoy it all while the sunbirds flit in nearby aloes and the weaver birds chatter in the trees overhead.

Activities And Amenities

From twice-daily game drives to spa visits, world-class wine tastings to spending time in the gym or the yoga/meditation room, curling up with a book in the library to simply unwinding by the pool, Waterside offers endless opportunities to relax and reconnect. 

If you feel like venturing a little further afield, various other activities can be added to your itinerary, including helicopter flights over Blyde River Canyon, the world’s deepest green canyon; golf at Leopard Creek, Africa’s most exclusive bushveld golf course; or perhaps a visit to Moholoholo Wildlife Rehabilitation Centre for injured and abandoned wildlife.

Waterside’s Guides And Wildlife Encounters

The safari guides at Waterside are some of the most qualified, passionate, and experienced in Africa. The guiding team has over 300 years of African bush experience between them, and Waterside, combined with its sister lodge Royal Malewane, has three of only seven living Master Trackers in the world. The Waterside guides are also passionate about photography, and have the patience, dedication, and knowledge to anticipate the behavior and movements of the creatures you are hoping to photograph.

On a game drive, you’ll experience the thrill of encountering wildlife in its natural environment. Case in point: We were on a morning game drive at 8 a.m., and my husband and I were seated in the game drive vehicle. Our binoculars were trained on a herd of 200 or more buffaloes, all making their way down to the waterhole. Big and small, adult and calf, male and female, the herd approached the water. As they lowered their mouths to drink, something startled them and they raised their heads in alarm. A pack of 11 African wild dogs also approached the waterhole, hoping for a drink. The wild dogs were nervous about the buffalo and decided to detour around them. Reaching the other side of the waterhole, they spotted a group of six hyenas lying in the mud. Coming to a sudden halt, the wild dogs looked uncertainly at one another before slipping away into the bush. They were clearly planning to return to the waterhole only once the “crowds” had moved on!

Between the waterhole encounter, finding a pair of lions feasting on a zebra, a leopard stalking an impala in a dry river bed, and another pride of lions lying bloated and full around the carcass of a buffalo, we had incredible wildlife encounters here. Elephants were plentiful, both coming down to the lodge’s waterhole to drink and when we were out on drives. Tracking a pair of rhinos — mother and calf — on foot was another highlight of our visit. Colorful birds, towering giraffes, and a family of warthogs running through the grass with their long tails sticking up above the grass like antennae — the wildlife experiences here were fantastic.

Pro Tip: Alternatively, going on a guided walking safari will give you a detail-focused experience that gets you up close to creatures great and small.

Birding

If birding is your thing, and you’ve got a bird bucket list to work on, you’ve come to the right place. There are over 300 different bird species that call this place home.

Children will find this the perfect place to get an exciting introduction to nature. And for those interested in something extra spectacular, there is also the option of taking to the air and flying by helicopter over the reserve, looking down on the landscape and wildlife below.

More On Kruger National Park And The Greater Kruger

At 4.8 million acres (7,580 square miles), Kruger National Park in northeastern South Africa was the first national park established in South Africa and remains the country’s largest. It is the sixth largest of all of Africa’s game reserves. Originally founded as a nature reserve by Paul Kruger in 1898, it was enlarged in 1926 and made into a national park. In 1927, the park was opened to the public and an entry fee of one British pound was charged (the equivalent of around $100 today). Only a handful of cars visited the new park that year, but by 1935, around 26,000 people were passing through the gates annually. Today, the total number of visitors is around one million a year.

With a size roughly that of Israel or Wales, all of Africa’s iconic safari species — elephant, lion, leopard, cheetah, rhino, buffalo, giraffe, hippo, and zebra — can be found in Kruger. The park is home to over 12,000 elephants, 27,000 buffalo, 2,000 leopards, 2,800 lions, and around 2,500 rhinos. Kruger National Park offers a wildlife experience that ranks among the best in Africa.

Need To Know: The area known as the Greater Kruger comprises Kruger National Park and a cluster of private game reserves on the park’s borders. While the national park itself is perfect for self-drive safaris and budget package tours, the adjacent private reserves offer more exclusive safari experiences, with excellent trackers and guides and expertly guided game drives in open vehicles.

There are several private game reserves in the Greater Kruger area, the main ones being Balule, MalaMala, Sabi Sand, Manyeleti, Klaserie, Timbavati, and Thornybush. The fences between these reserves and the national park itself have been removed, forming one vast ecosystem and allowing for the free movement of wildlife. The area is home to the widest diversity of wildlife in South Africa, and some of the finest game viewing on the continent.

Why A Private Game Reserve?

You may be wondering, Why choose a private game reserve over the actual national park? Public parks tend to be more crowded, meaning you can well find yourself stuck behind a convoy of other vehicles out on safari. It can be frustrating and sometimes mean you miss out on some animal sightings. There are also strict times when you’re allowed to be out on the roads in public parks.

However, staying in one of the private game reserves that share an unfenced border with Kruger National Park gives you a more exclusive experience. Lodges in the private game reserves tend to be more luxurious, and because they are on private land, when you go out on drives, you can go “off-road” for a closer look at special wildlife sightings. With no set opening times, you can even head out after dark should the fancy take you. Private game reserves also limit the number of vehicles that can be at each sighting, meaning you’ll have an uninterrupted view.

Whatever your reason for planning a safari, Waterside is the perfect destination for couples and families who value memorable experiences and the opportunity to reconnect, relax, and spend time together. Fantastic wildlife sightings are right on your doorstep (quite literally at times!) and the guides are some of the best in Africa. Combine this with a great year-round climate, wonderful personalized service, gourmet food, and the beautifully stocked bar, and Waterside is the ideal African safari holiday destination, providing everything you need for a truly memorable safari.

For more on safaris and wildlife in Africa, consider

• 9 Key Tips For Your First Tanzanian Safari According To Experts
• Why This Luxurious New Safari Lodge Should Be On Your Bucket List
• Why This Great African Destination Is The Perfect Place For A Safari

Cherry blossoms, or sakura, have a special place in Japanese culture. They usher in the arrival of spring, the beginning of the farming season, and a time to congregate with friends and family to enjoy the pleasant weather. Many Japanese hold parties to celebrate hanami, the practice of watching the blossoms and contemplating life.

I visited in April of 2019, just in time to see the cherry blossoms and decide for myself whether they were worth the hype. Spoiler alert: They are. In fact, you could visit Japan just to see the cherry blossoms in full bloom, provided that you know where, when, and how to plan your trip. Here’s everything you need to know about cherry blossom season in Japan.

1. Peak Season Is Late January Through Early May

Booking your trip for optimal cherry blossom viewing will require some planning since sakura season starts early in southern Japan and then gradually moves north. According to the Japan Meteorological Corporation (JMC), in 2023 “Northern Japan and eastern Japan will see flowering earlier than normal, while western Japan will see flowering at the same level as normal.”

In the south, Okinawa sees its first blooms in late January while Kyushu cities such as Fukuoka will start to see blooms in mid-March. Around Tokyo, the sakura bloom in mid to late March, while the Osaka area sakura trees begin blooming at the end of March. In mid-April, head to Aomori in the Tohoku region to see Ashino Park’s cherry blossoms. Sapporo cherry blossoms are expected to bloom in late April, while other areas of Hokkaido pop in early May.

If you’re planning a trip to a specific city, check the Japan cherry blossom forecast when booking your trip. It has data for cities such as Yokohama, Nagoya, Kumamoto, Kanazawa, Kyoto, and Kagoshima listed by region, including the Shikoku regions (home to Hiroshima) and the Kanto region (home to Tokyo), and more. The first forecasts of the year are typically released in early January.

When in doubt, book a few days later than the expected bloom date. Cherry blossoms only bloom for a week or two, and you’ll want to land in Japan during the peak bloom period when most of the cherry blossom trees are flowering.

2. Different Varieties Bloom At Different Times

Because the cherry blossom season is fairly short, you might miss the peak bloom even if you plan carefully. The good news: Different varieties of cherry blossoms bloom at different times. Late bloomers and early bloomers aren’t too difficult to find, and if you head to an area with a large number of trees, you’ll still have a perfectly pleasant experience.

In Tokyo, for instance, Shinjuku Gyoen has more than 1,000 cherry trees of different varieties, so you’ll see at least some of them blooming for at least a week after the peak bloom. If you miss the bloom in Nagano, you can head to Takato Castle Ruins Park, which has about 1,500 cherry trees.

When in doubt, ask the locals where to go or head to the largest public park you can find. As long as you’re within a week or so of the bloom, you’ll find some cherry trees showing their colors.

3. Be Flexible When Booking Your Accommodations

One morning in Tokyo, I started my day with a walk through Shinjuku Gyoen. Rows of beautiful cherry trees waved in the breeze, and I finally felt like the trip was worth the jet lag.

That incredible experience was an accident; I booked the cheapest hotel room I could find, which happened to be a few blocks away from Shinjuku Gyoen. When booking your accommodations, exercise a little more planning than I did. Look for hotels near parks or public transit lines. Japan’s excellent public transportation infrastructure makes the latter fairly easy, but if you’re hoping to stay near a park, you’ll need to do some research.

More importantly, recognize that flexibility is key. You might need to change your flight or your hotel reservations to ensure that you actually arrive in cherry blossom season — a cold snap could delay your trip by a few days — so look for hotels that allow for late changes or cancellations. If your airline offers an add-on that allows you to change your flight for free, pay for it.

4. More Than 30,000 Cherry Trees Bloom On Mount Yoshino

Located in Nara Prefecture, Mount Yoshino is one of the most popular spots for cherry blossom seekers. More than 30,000 cherry trees bloom here each spring, covering the mountain in extraordinary color.

This is also a great place to try an onsen, or natural hot spring bath. The nearby town, Yoshinoyama, has quite a few hot spring hotels, and some allow travelers to use their onsen for a small fee. Take a stroll by the mountain, snap a few pictures, and then find a hotel with an onsen where you can relax and reset.

5. See Nakameguro Cherry Blossom Illuminations Mid-March Through Early April

Tokyo has plenty of beautiful outdoor spaces like Yoyogi Park and Shinjuku Gyoen, and if you head to the capital city, you’ll have plenty of viewing spots to choose from.

However, one of the best places to experience hanami is the Meguro River near Nakameguro. Each year, a small portion of the river is lit with red lanterns; the sakura reflect off the water, creating a truly enchanting sight.

Pro Tip: One of the best cherry blossom spots in Tokyo is Ueno Park, which is home to the Ueno Zoo, museums, and over a thousand cherry trees.

6. Expect Crowds At Takato Castle Park In Nagano

The ruins of Takato Castle in Nagano Prefecture are well worth visiting at any time of year, but they’re truly incredible in spring. Book in advance, since the castle is extremely popular during sakura season owing to the 1,500 blossoming trees that cover the trails.

You’ll also get great views of the ruins, and if you’re interested in Japanese history, you’ll want to stop by the Takioyagura drum tower and the Shintokukan, a former samurai house. There’s even an art museum onsite, so plan on spending quite a bit of time here.

Pro Tip: Takato Castle Park just has the remains of a castle, but Hirosaki Castle Park in the Aomori Prefecture, another popular place for cherry blossom viewing, boasts a three-story castle complete with petal-filled moat and a botanical garden.

7. Some Over-The-Counter Allergy Medicine Is Illegal In Japan

When you’re surrounded by thousands of blossoms, they can certainly irritate your allergies. Of course, you can simply load up on allergy medication before your trip, but be careful. Some allergy medicines — including over-the-counter medications — can’t be brought into Japan legally in large quantities. Check out the U.S. Embassy’s page on the topic before your trip, and be sure to declare any and all medications when passing through customs.

You could also buy over-the-counter products during your trip, but note that they won’t include stimulants like pseudoephedrine, so they may make you drowsy. This Japan Drugstore Guide has an overview of Japanese allergy medications, along with pictures of their packaging (extremely useful if you don’t speak Japanese).

8. Cherry Blossoms Make Sweet Treats

Given that Japan has something of an obsession with cherry blossoms, it should come as no surprise that sakura-flavored desserts are a big deal throughout the country. To truly embrace the spirit of the season (and satisfy your sweet tooth), stop by a bakery and look for items adorned with cherry blossom petals.

If you’re looking to try something you can’t find anywhere else, stop by a café that serves sakura yokan. Yokan is a jelly made from the sweet red azuki bean mixed with honey or sugar. It’s similar to gelatin but much, much more flavorful. Sakura mochi, or sweet rice cakes, are also fairly easy to find during cherry blossom season.

Wrap up your meal with a sakura sake or a sakura tea. Both have a light, fragrant quality to them, though sakura tea is a bit easier to find (and a bit easier to drink, if you’re not a fan of rice wine).

Pro Tip: Be sure to follow proper dining etiquette; try to clean your plate completely, and if you use chopsticks, don’t raise them above your mouth.

9. Cherry Trees Have Special Significance In Japanese Culture

Every city will have public celebrations of hanami, including cherry blossom festivals. Regardless of where you head on your trip, you’ll encounter plenty of locals enjoying the sakura season.

For the Japanese, springtime isn’t just a time to enjoy pretty views; it’s a time to think about change and the impermanent nature of life. It’s a bittersweet time; high school students are graduating and leaving for college, the winter is ending, and unlimited possibilities are on the horizon.

To put it another way, sakura season is a time to walk slowly, breathe deeply, and enjoy every moment. It’s a time to stop and smell the flowers, literally. Keep that in mind during your visit, and you’ll see why cherry blossoms are so enchanting — and why they’re such an indispensable part of Japanese culture.

Pro Tip: How To Get The Best Photos Of Cherry Blossoms

If you’re planning on photographing the trees — and you absolutely should, by the way — you’ll want to turn off the automatic option on your camera or smartphone. Cherry blossoms tend to be light pastel colors, and cameras have trouble distinguishing them from the sky. If the blossoms make up the majority of your shot, it might end up looking underexposed.

Use your camera’s manual exposure mode to change the aperture and shutter-speed settings. Generally speaking, a slower shutter will give you a better result. Consider picking up a tripod to accommodate the slower shutter speeds.

Experiment with different settings, but don’t worry about editing your photos onsite. Try to shoot as much as possible. Remember, you can always edit out the mediocre pictures on your (extremely long) plane ride home.

One of the world’s wonders, Hopewell Rocks Provincial Park in New Brunswick is home to 23 standing sea stacks called “flowerpots” peppered over a mile-long shoreline. The enormous tides that roll up the Bay of Fundy twice a day are the main attraction; they have sculpted their masterpiece at Hopewell Rocks for thousands of years. The New Brunswick shore of the upper Bay of Fundy was designated by UNESCO as a World Biosphere Reserve in 2007, part of a network of 19 biosphere regions across Canada. Here are nine unique experiences in the park.

More than 30,000 people visit the park each year. Here are ## experiences not to miss. 

My visit to Hopewell Rocks Provincial Park was hosted by Tourism New Brunswick, but all opinions are my own.

1. Bay Of Fundy High Tide

The Bay of Fundy formed billions of years ago when the continents were connected and broke apart. Volcanic eruptions shaped the landmass and the ice age catalyzed massive glaciers. When they melted, the receding ice carved the bathtub-shaped bay creating the highest tides in the world. 

At its start, the bay was more than 62 miles wide and 600 feet deep. As it progresses 190 miles up to Hopewell, it gets narrower and shallower, and the constricted funneled water has nowhere else to go but up. The flood waters take about 6 hours to come up the bay from the tide circulating in the Atlantic Ocean.

2. Demoiselle Lookout 

The main deck viewing platform at the top of the cliff provides dramatic views of the seafloor and the flowerpot rocks below. Check the tide table before you arrive; you will know the correct times to experience this unique place, especially to see the tide coming in and going out. The spacious viewing platform at the top has a clock that shows the time until the following tide changes. 

The Demoiselle Lookout is spectacular. Located at the top of the cliff, the expanse below spreads out at low tide as a vast pink desert of mud silt, which will soon be covered by more than 40 feet of water at high tide.

3. Walk On The Ocean Floor 

How often do you get a chance to walk on an ocean floor? Only accessible three hours before and after low tide, there are three access points. The North Beach trail grants you access to a ramp with benches strategically placed along the incline. The Demoiselle trail slopes gently toward the sea level. It’s incredible to peer up at the enormous rock formations, caves, cliffs, and the giant “flowerpots” towering above; the rocks resemble islands at high tide. 

Pro Tip: Wear sturdy footwear to explore the park. The ocean floor is muddy and can be slippery. Water cleaning stations for dirty shoes are at the top of the stairs. The North Beach ramp is suitable for wheelchairs, but many find the ocean floor too challenging to navigate on wheels.

4. Flowerpot Rocks 

Flowerpot rocks, or sea stacks, are geological formations detached from the land mass and contain vegetation at their peaks. Over time, ocean tides have carved and created sandstone and rock pillars dotted on top with balsam firs and dwarf spruce. 

The tides have eroded the rocks into extraordinary shapes you can see from underneath at low and above at high tide. The formations come in a variety of shapes and sizes. Everyone gives the flowerpot shapes a whimsical identity — usually a person or animal. We saw George Washington, a dinosaur, a bear, and even E.T. With a bit of imagination, guests are greeted by new rock characters around every corner.

5. Baymount Outdoor Adventures Guided Kayak Tour 

Baymount Outdoor Adventures offers the highest tidal guided kayaking tour in the world. This was my favorite experience at Hopewell Rocks. When the tides changed, the ocean floor transformed, as I wouldn’t have thought possible just a few hours before. After safety instructions from the guides, we soon paddled through and around the sea stacks and rock formations (now islets), where we walked just hours before adding a new perspective to the visit. It is even possible to experience the majestic Hopewell Rocks after dark. This unique 2-hour tour begins at dusk and paddles into the night, with the night sky as your backdrop. 

6. Nature Trails 

The park has five miles of walking trails that can be easily accessed from the center. The network of well-groomed, wheelchair-friendly trails has stunning lookouts, secluded vistas, ocean-floor access, and natural forests. The Demoiselle trail leading south from behind the interpretive center leads to ocean-floor access; it requires no stairs or ramps as the trail gently descends to sea level. The Ocean Floor Trail is an accessible gravel trail that takes you to the ocean floor for a leisurely walk. There is a half-mile-long path through the woods to a scenic overlook of the Bay of Fundy. 

Pro Tip: There are two or three guided hikes daily, usually one high tide tour and two low tide tours on the ocean floor.

7. Mudflats 

Mudflats are significant bird-watching spots. The mudflats visible from the Demoiselle Cliff lookout are prevalent in the bay’s upper reaches because of all the sediment resulting from the erosion of the sandstone. The fine sediment has turned to mud in most spots. Within this mud lurks many things, not the least of which are millions and millions of tiny mud shrimp about the size of a piece of long-grained rice. 

Mudflats are critical to a healthy ecosystem. Often called the kidneys of our planet, mudflats filter the water as it runs off the land and helps to absorb sediment, nutrients, and pollutants. The mudflats are a rare habitat critical to a great diversity of shorebirds and other intertidal creatures.

8. Sandpiper Migration 

The semipalmated sandpiper bird migration is one of the fantastic things to see at the park. Paul Gaudet, the Interpretive Services manager, told me, “Sandpipers visit the park to feast on the tiny mud shrimp. They stop here in our Shepody Bay for about two to three weeks to fulfill their migratory ambitions of getting to South America. While here, the birds do nothing but eat and rest (roost) as they double their weight to sustain their non-stop flight to South America.” 

During these roosting periods, visitors observe them and their incredible flying antics. The entire flock acts like a single entity of one mind as they perform their impressive aerobatic maneuvers. 

In late July and early August, fortunate tourists witness the awe-inspiring aerial dance thousands of migrating shorebirds perform. When they dart and dash, seemingly as one, the flashes of white and black as they fly are a sight to behold. Sometimes they all turn a certain way and disappear entirely from view for a few seconds, only to reappear and form into a giant ball. They do these “flights of fancy” when they readjust as the tide is coming in and more of the beach is lost.

9. Interpretive Center 

The interpretive center includes multimedia exhibits about the Bay of Fundy where you can learn about the tides and rock formations and watch fascinating time-lapse videos. Listen to the sounds of the whales and feel the life-like rubbery skin display of a Fundy Right Whale. I learned native Mi’kmaq legends that help explain the mysteries of Fundy. A knowledgeable team of interpretive guides share information and answer questions.

If You Go 

The park is open from May to early October and is located 40 miles from Moncton. The ticket is good for two consecutive days, so you may be better able to see both high and low tide, which is sometimes achievable in one day. Ticket prices and times are found on the website. 

You can bring your lunch and picnic in the park; a playground offers swings, slides, and climbing structures. The full-service casual restaurant with an outdoor deck is open for breakfast, lunch, and dinner. The restrooms are plentiful throughout the park. Passenger shuttle services are available for a nominal fee and run regularly throughout the day. Persons with a physical disability and their companions may ride free of charge.

East Texas is home to the crown jewels of gardens, parks, and historic home sites with masses of azaleas, dogwood trees, and spring flowers that you must see to believe. Spring flowers in East Texas begin arriving mid-March and bloom for about six weeks. Spend a few days or weekends exploring dozens of dogwood and azalea trails, gardens, festivals, and celebrations of all things in bloom.

Here are 13 of the top dogwood and azalea gardens and trails in East Texas in no particular order.

1. Davey Dogwood Park, Palestine

Dogwood, Magnolias, And Redbud Trees

March 17–April 2

Watch for white or pink blossoms everywhere in the Palestine area, but for the premier show, visit Davey Dogwood Park, a 254-acre public park at 900 N Link Street. You can hike 8 miles of trails or drive 5 miles on roads, viewing forests painted with beautiful white and pink dogwood blooms. The park is excellent for picnics, and don’t miss the view from Manley Mountain, the highest point in the county. The children will love the fairy gardens; follow the signs.

Pro Tip: See a map of the park here.

2. Dogwood Lunch Train, Palestine

Dogwoods, Magnolias, And Red Bud Trees

March 18, 25, And April 1

Ride the Dogwood Lunch Train from Palestine to Rusk on March 18, 25, and April 1, and you will enjoy a comfortable seat at the Dogwood Days springtime show. Watch the luminous pink and white dogwood blooms light up the East Texas Piney Woods as they pass by your window. Lunch will be served at the Rusk Rail Depot. Allow for a 4-hour round trip. Check the schedule for other train rides.

Shop at Wells Creek Crossing and eat pie at the hidden jewel Oxbow Bakery. Indulge in lunch or dinner at Queen Street Grille in the Redlands Hotel, 400 N Queen Street.

Featuring mile after mile of spectacular blooming azaleas, dogwoods, tulips, daffodils, and then later in April, you’ll see roses as far as the eyes can see in Tyler. Please don’t feel restricted by the dates since the flower buds arrive earlier and bloom longer. Check Tyler’s website for updates on blooming schedules.

3. Dobbs Trail And The Lindsey Trail, Tyler

Azaleas, Dogwoods, Tulips, Daffodils, And Roses

March 24–April 9

There are two azalea trails in Tyler, the Dobbs Trail and the Lindsey Trail. Both are named after the streets, each about 10 miles long, winding through the picturesque Azalea National Historic District.

Begin on the downtown square and head south on Broadway Avenue and watch for the signs that invite you to enter private backyards to see flowers. Be sure to visit the block bordered by College, Dobbs, Lindsay, and Broadway. National magazines repeatedly feature these famous yards. You’ll also see young ladies in Antebellum period clothing attending some of the gardens.

The Azalea Arts and Crafts Fair is returning to Tyler’s Bergfeld Park. You can purchase flowering plants and gather tips on growing or landscaping your garden. Shop 70 booths offering handcrafted items like quilts, pottery, paintings, jewelry, clothing, candles, and more.

4. The Goodman-LeGrand Museum And Gardens, Tyler

Azaleas And Roses

Tuesday–Saturday, March 21–April 8

Tour the Goodman-LeGrand Museum and Gardens, Tuesday through Saturday, at 624 N Broadway Avenue. You’ll see the most beautiful azaleas and rose gardens. What a treat!

5. Pyron Garden, Tyler

Azaleas, Tulips, And Roses

March 24–April 9

At 212 W Dobbs, Pyron Garden is a private backyard garden with beautifully landscaped azaleas, tulips, and roses. Unfortunately, Mr. Guy Pyron passed away in March 2020, but the private garden will live on.

6. Ina Brundrett Azalea Garden, Tyler

Azaleas

March 24–April 9

Be sure to check out the Ina Brundrett Azalea Garden (PDF) on Tyler Junior College’s campus, near the duck pond, west of the Tyler Museum of Art. You’ll find many types of azaleas, including extensive plantings of the re-blooming Encore varieties.

Azaleas do best with partial sun, morning sun, and afternoon shade. If there is too much shade, they will not bloom. Azaleas need to drain but stay moist; once established, they won’t need water as often. Azaleas grow best in acidic soil where pine trees grow. Apply pine bark mulch to hold in moisture.

7. Tyler Rose Garden, Tyler

Roses And Spring Flowers

Mid-April Through Mid-October

Explore more than 600 varieties amid 32,000 bushes that make up the nation’s most extensive collection of roses, all for free. Celebrating for over 50 years, visit the Rose Capital in the spring from mid-April through mid-October.

Pro Tip: Stay at the Woldert-Spence Manor Bed and Breakfast Inn, Tyler’s oldest bed and breakfast. The manor is a restored historical landmark with rates including a full delicious breakfast served in the formal dining room. 611 W Woldert Street. (903) 533-9057.

Janie’s Cakes opened in 1987, bakes pound cakes from all-natural ingredients, backed by skills learned at the New York Culinary Institute of America. 308 East Front Street. (903) 592-6150.

Enjoy lunch Tuesday to Friday at the Museum Cafe at the Tyler Museum of Art, 1300 S Mahon Avenue, the town’s best-kept secret. Save room for the fresh-baked cobbler.

You may hear “Have a rosy day” more than once as you explore this city of flowers.

8. Ruby M Mize Azalea Garden, Nacogdoches

Azaleas, Camelias, Japanese Maples, And Spring Flowers

March 24–April 9

The most extensive azalea garden in Texas, the Ruby M Mize Azalea Garden, is located on the campus of Stephen F. Austin State University, in Nacogdoches — or “Nac” as the locals call it—at 2107 University Drive. Guided tours of the Mize Garden are available weekdays during the season for a small fee. Be astounded by over 6,500 azaleas, 200 camellias, and 180 varieties of Japanese Maples along more than a mile of walking trails across 11 acres.

Download the Azalea Trail 2023 Brochure showing the Ruby M Mize Garden and three trails totaling 25 miles of driving routes through beautifully landscaped residential areas. Each course starts at the Visitor Center, at 200 E Main Street, near the Nacogdoches Fire Museum.

9. The Southern Indica Trail, Nacogdoches

Azaleas And Spring Flowers

March 24–April 9

The Southern Indica Trail, 8 miles featuring Indica azaleas, takes you past the Durst-Taylor Historic House and Garden, the Stone Fort Museum, and the Nacogdoches Railroad Depot, plus the Old University Building, dating back to 1859.

10. The Evergreen Azalea Trail, Nacogdoches

Azaleas And Spring Flowers

March 24–April 9

The Evergreen Azalea Trail winds 9 miles past mostly evergreen azaleas. It steers you by the Mast Arboretum and Oak Grove Cemetery, the final resting place of four signers of the Texas Declaration of Independence.

11. The Fashion Azalea Trail, Nacogdoches

Azaleas, Camelias, And Spring Flowers

March 24–April 9

The Fashion Azalea Trail, 8 miles long, takes you by The Gayla-Mize Garden and Demonstration Garden, including azaleas and camellias. Zion Hill Baptist Church is home to one of the oldest African American Baptist congregations in Texas.

12. Stephen F. Austin Mast Arboretum, Nacogdoches

Shade Plants, Gingers, Polinators, And Agaves

March 24–April 9

The SFA Mast Arboretum is just a short walk over the bridge from the Ruby M. Mize Garden, with 7,500 species of shade-tolerant plants, gingers, pollinator plants, agaves, and more across 10 acres.

Pro Tip: Stay at the Hardeman House Bed and Breakfast, 316 N Church Street, downtown, just two blocks from historic brick Main Street. (936) 205-5280.

The Fredonia Hotel and Convention Center, 200 N Fredonia, is where mid-century modern luxury meets local. Dine in the hotel at 1st City Cafe, Nine Flags Bar, or Republic Steakhouse — the place to go for a perfectly cooked steak. Fredonia was named for an 1826 rebellion when area settlers briefly declared themselves independent from Mexico as the Republic of Fredonia.

There are plenty of antique shops downtown. Or get a cupcake at Blue Horse Bakery. Sip a brew at Fredonia Brewery, have a glass of wine at Red House Winery, or visit The Bosslight, a curated bookstore with the best Texas authors. View the Cole Arts Center, the Stephen F. Austin State University School of Art exhibition center at the Old Opera House. Sample Tall Pines Vodka and other artisan craft spirits at Front Porch Distillery.

13. Mrs. Lee’s Daffodil Garden, Gladewater

Acres Of Daffodils

February And March

These aren’t azaleas, but what a best-kept secret in East Texas! Mrs. Lee’s Daffodil Garden, a private paradise tucked away on 816 acres that transform every February and March to golden cascades of yellow daffodils scattered over 28 acres. Wander along a 4-mile trail that meanders around two lakes, between wooded valleys, and around a replica pioneer log cabin. The garden opens around the middle of February and remains open through March or later, depending on Mother Nature, from 10 a.m. to 4 p.m., seven days a week.

The garden is closed if the roads are wet. Contact the Daffodil Gardens directly at (903) 845-5780 for blooming schedules and road conditions. The park’s future remaining open depends on the number of people who visit and register their attendance. The Helen Lee Foundation manages the garden at 21600 CR 3103, Gladewater.

East Texas towns like Palestine, Tyler, and Nacogdoches entice visitors year-round. Spring is a grand time to explore these bountiful pink and white dogwood blooms and azaleas adorned in colors of pink, purple, red, yellow, orange, and white.

Pro Tips: Download Before You Go

Download the Visit Nac app (available for both Apple and Google Play) for planning and trip information to Nacogdoches. Download the EGuide Tyler app (also available for both Apple and Google Play) for events and things to do in Tyler. And download the Visit Palestine, TX app for all things Palestine.

Related Reading:

• 7 Best Dogwood Festivals In The U.S.
• 9 Beautiful Spring Wildflower Drives In Texas
• 11 Small Towns With Big Texas Charm You Need To Visit

The state of Arizona has more than its fair share of great hiking. One of the best-ranked cities in the country for hiking is Tucson, Arizona. That should be no surprise considering Tucson is surrounded by four different mountain ranges: the Santa Catalina Mountains, the Rincon Mountains, the Santa Rita Mountains, and the Tucson Mountains. Mt. Lemmon, the tallest peak, soars over 9,000 feet high.

There’s no telling what you might see on a Tucson hike. Saguaro, prickly pear, and cholla are just some of the hundreds of cacti varieties native to the area. You’re bound to see desert wildlife, especially if you go near dawn or dusk. Experts say that in summer, dawn or dusk is the best time to go hiking in southern Arizona. Otherwise, it’s simply too hot. Always hike with a friend, and bring at least double (or triple) the amount of water and food you think you’ll need, sunscreen, and a hat. Shade can be hard to find!

When I was invited to Tucson, we enjoyed a lot of beautiful hikes. Here are some that are perfect for the whole family. All opinions are my own. 

1. King Canyon Trail

Saguaro National Park West

Hike Distance: 1.8-2.4 Miles

One of three national parks in Arizona, Saguaro National Park is known for the Saguaro variety of cactus. If you’ve watched a Western movie or TV show, you’ve almost certainly seen a Saguaro. Found exclusively in the Sonoran Desert, the giant Saguaro is the nation’s largest cactus and is the universal symbol of the American West, and it’s hard to imagine anyone in the United States who is not familiar with the Saguaro. Although many may not know the exact name of the cactus or how to pronounce it (it’s sa-whar-o). Established as a national park in 1994, Saguaro is one of the newer national parks. 

The park has an estimated 2 million saguaros so you’re practically guaranteed to see quite a few as you hike the trails. With over 165 miles of trails for hiking across more than 91,000 acres, you’ll have plenty of choices of trails. The King Canyon Wash trail up the sandy wash is super rocky. I didn’t take in much of the view because I was constantly looking down to watch where I was going. It would be very easy to twist an ankle on this rocky trail. The trail starts at a steep incline and there is no shade, so it’s challenging most of the way. But if you are looking for a workout, this is a good bet.

Pro Tip: Saguaro National comprises two distinct districts: Saguaro West In the Tucson Mountain District and Saguaro East in the Rincon Mountain District and the Tucson Mountain District. Both have their own visitor center.

2. Cactus Garden Trail

Saguaro National Park West

Total Distance: 0.5 Miles

The Cactus Garden Trail is an accessible 0.5-mile paved trail, located right outside the visitor center. The trail winds through beautiful desert foliage and includes exhibit signs about Sonoran Desert life. This wide and flat path has shade ramadas and benches for resting, making it perfect if you want a more relaxed hike on solid ground but still want to see beautiful desert surroundings. 

3. Hugh Norris Trail

Saguaro National Park West

Total Distance: 9.8 Miles

This trail is 4.9 miles one way and starts with a series of stone steps. Hikers love the Hugh Norris Trail as it leads to the top of Wasson Peak, the 4,687-high point for the west side of the park, where the views are fabulous. 

4. Signal Hill Trail

Saguaro National Park West

Total Distance: 0.3 Miles

This hike is all about seeing the petroglyphs at the Signal Hill Petroglyph Site. The rocky hill, just 0.25 miles north of the Signal Hill picnic area, is the largest petroglyph site in the Tucson Mountain District of Saguaro National Park. The Signal Hill Petroglyph Site consists of over 200 prehistoric Native American petroglyphs, many of which can be viewed from the visitor trail that ascends the hill. These fascinating petroglyphs were created between about 550 to 1,550 years ago. This is a quick 30-minute hike. This fun hike up the hill to the petroglyphs contains steps and also take note of the signs to beware of rattlesnakes!

5. Freeman Homestead Trail

Saguaro National Park East

Total Distance: 1.1 Miles

On the Freeman Homestead Trail, hikers can wander down this path to the site of an old homestead. You’ll see the remains of the Freeman home and plenty of large saguaros. This is a good hike for kids as it’s short and they’ll enjoy seeing the homestead ruins.

6. Tanque Verde Ridge Trail

Saguaro National Park East

Total Distance: 2.5-6.9 Miles

Many think the east side of the park is better for hiking, there are more trails as the east side is much larger than the west. Another hike on the more remote east side of the park is the Tanque Verde Ridge Trail. This one is strenuous, but the views are worth it. 

7. Canyon Loop Trail

Catalina State Park

Total Distance: 2.3 Miles

Established in the 1970s, Catalina State Park is located at the foothills of the Santa Catalina Mountains and encompasses more than 5,500 acres. With 8 different park trails, you’ll find a wide variety of terrain, difficulty level, and trail length, so experienced hikers and beginners alike will find trails that appeal. Most of the trails are multi-use trails, so you will probably see horses and bicycles on the trails as we did. 

The Canyon Loop Trail is the hike I liked the best. This 2.3-mile easy hike through the foothills begins and ends at the trailhead parking lot. The trail is pretty flat, but starting out, you will ascend a small hill. Halfway around the loop, there are about 90 stairs that we found easy to navigate. When we were there, water was flowing through the wash so our feet got wet several times, but the cold water felt good! 

Pro Tip: Leashed dogs are allowed on all trails in Catalina State Park except Romero Ruins Trail.

8. Romero Ruins Interpretive Trail

Catalina State Park

Total Distance: 0.75 Mile

This short 0.75-mile loop trail crosses a wash before climbing about 80 steps to the hilltop. The Romero Ruins archaeological site includes some of the ruins from a Hohokam village dating back to about 500 A.D. You can learn about the Hohokam culture from trailside signs as you hike.

9. Romero Canyon Trails

Catalina State Park

Total Distance: 2.8 Miles To Romero Pools 

If you’re into waterfalls, the Romero Pools hike is a must-do. This trail starts at the Romero Canyon Trailhead with an easy walk of about a mile. The last portion of the trail gets more difficult as the incline increases. However, at the end, you’ll see the gorgeous pools and have views of Mt. Lemmon. 

10. Yetman Trail

Tucson Mountain Park

Total Distance: 2 Miles To The Bowen House Or 12 Miles Total

Tucson Mountain Park is over 20,000 acres and has approximately 62 miles of shared use trails. The park’s trails are open to hikers, equestrians, and mountain bikers. A favorite hike here is the Yetman Trail to the Bowen House. This 2.6-mile out-and-back trail is super popular and leads to the ruins of the Bowen Homestead. This stone home was built back in the 1930s and today you can see portions of the stone home that are still standing. 

11. Seven Falls

Sabino Canyon Recreation Area 

Total Distance: 8 Miles

Many locals recommend Seven Falls as one of the best trails in the Tucson area. This hike is so unusual because you get to see waterfalls in the middle of the desert! Once you’re at Sabino Canyon Recreation Center, which is located at the base of the Catalina Mountains, you can choose to take the tram to the trailhead or walk. 

12. Tumamoc Hill Trail

University Of Arizona Campus 

Total Distance: 3 Miles

This hike at Tumamoc Hill is cool because it’s smack dab in downtown Tucson so you can hike right in town. Tumamoc Hill is not a true trail, but rather it’s an ecological site that’s part of the University of Arizona campus. This is a short hike with a huge incline so it’s a great cardio workout. You’ll be hiking on a paved path the entire way and you’ll probably see a lot of other people because this hike is very popular. Around sunset, it will be packed, but the sunset views are some of the best in the city. 

Enjoy visiting Tucson and taking in the desert beauty. No matter which trail you choose, the Tucson area is gorgeous with plenty of awe-inspiring views.

Kayaking is an easy and versatile way to explore destinations from a new perspective. I’ve been an avid kayaker for years and have spent countless hours on various waterways from rivers and streams to lakes and even the ocean. 

No kayak? No problem! Kayak rentals are readily available and outfitters can easily supply you with a boat and a paddle. When it comes to adventures on the water, kayaking is easy enough, but you’ll need a few things before you go.

Here’s my list of the nine must-haves for any kayaking adventure to ensure you have an incredible experience on the water.

Astral EV-Eight PFD

Shop Now

1. Personal Flotation Device (PFD)

A personal flotation device is a critical piece of equipment. Not only is it a lifesaver it’s often required by law. Your PFD should be comfortably snug without feeling too tight. Most are easily adjustable. Typically, an outfitter will supply you with a PFD if you rent a kayak from them. I like the Astral EV 8 PFD, but there are hundreds on the market to choose from in all price ranges.

Sea To Summit Dry Bags

Shop Now

2. Dry Bag(s)

Resist the temptation to use a ziplock bag or a plastic shopping bag. Use a dry bag to hold any of the possessions that you bring on board. It’s the perfect container for your keys, wallet, and other items. A dry bag, typically made of plastic, vinyl, or nylon will keep your belongings dry even if submerged. Sea to Summit sells dry bags in sets in several sizes.

Pro Tip: After you pack your dry bag, leave a little air inside like a balloon. If for some reason it falls into the water, it will float, allowing you to retrieve it and your belongings quickly.

Kayak Deck Light

Shop Now

3. Lights

Between sunset and sunrise, kayakers must have a light on their kayak. A headlamp or deck light works in this situation. This is the minimum. Red and green navigational lights are not required on kayaks. Be sure to keep your light(s) in the dry bag to avoid being stuck in the dark. 

Pro Tip: I usually err on the side of caution, especially on a full moon paddle, and use inexpensive red and green glow sticks on the front and back of my boat.

Field & Stream Waterproof Phone Case

Shop Now

4. Waterproof Phone Case

You’ll no doubt want to snap some pics on your kayaking adventure. A waterproof phone case will let you do that with minimum risk to your expensive phone. I like the Field & Stream Waterproof Phone Case. It’s inexpensive and can be worn around your neck for easy access. Some cases on the market allow the user to take photos without removing the phone. I find them challenging to use and haven’t had good luck with any I’ve tried.

I used this case on a trip down the Ouachita River in Arkansas and my phone (in this case) became trapped underwater between my kayak and a downed tree. When I finally retrieved it, there wasn’t a drop of moisture inside the case. The one caveat is that the slim fit makes it a little tricky to slide the phone in and out of the case quickly. 

Hydro Flask

Shop Now

5. Hydration

Staying hydrated during any outdoor activity is essential. When you’re out on the water having fun and enjoying the fresh air, it’s easy to forget to drink enough water. I recommend at least a liter per person. My Hydro Flask keeps it cold and even holds ice all day. If it’s sweltering, I throw a Liquid IV Hydration Packet in my bag to replenish electrolytes. It also offers a little flavor for a change of pace. 

Neutrogena Sport Oil-Free Sunscreen

Shop Now

6. Sun Protection

When you’re out on the water, you battle with the sun’s rays on two points — from the sky and reflected from the water. This double whammy makes sun protection crucial. A wide-brimmed hat, sunglasses, and a high SPF sunscreen — I like Neutrogena Sport Sunscreen for my face and Banana Boat Sport Ultra for easy touch-ups on the boat — are essential. 

Pro Tip: Apply sunscreen from head to toe for at least thirty minutes before heading out on the water. A high-SPF sunscreen spray can easily be reapplied in the boat while you’re on your adventure. 

7. Wear Light, Loose Clothing

When it comes to kayaking, chances are you’ll get a bit wet from spray or drip off the paddle. Wear clothing that allows plenty of freedom to move and dries quickly so that it won’t weigh you down. Denim is a definite no-no.

Pro Tip: I always keep a dry towel and an extra set of clothes in my car. I’ve been caught out in a rain shower and gotten soaked. The extra set of clothing made the drive home much more pleasant. 

Power Up Trail Mix

Shop Now

8. Snacks

Paddling is loads of fun. So fun that you may forget that the activity requires plenty of strength and endurance. Having some snacks on hand is nice to keep your energy up. I like easy-to-eat, individually packaged snacks like Power Up Trail Mix and Lara Bars.

LuxoGear Emergency Whistle

Shop Now

9. A Distress Signal

Distress signals such as flares or whistles are required on coastal excursions, but a whistle can be useful on rivers and lakes. The LuxoGear Emergency Whistle easily attaches to your PFD. They’re also cheap and inexpensive — an excellent tool to have on hand, just in case.

10. Duct Tape

Duct tape can fix anything. That’s what they say, and in my experience, they’re not wrong. I once kayaked on the Tennessee River in Chattanooga, Tennessee. The paddling seemed more challenging than usual, and at a rest break, I discovered a small crack in the bottom of the vessel allowing water in. Fortunately, a fellow paddler had some duct tape with them. A three-inch piece strategically placed along the crack got me ten miles down the river. Since then, I’ve been a believer and always have it in my dry bag.

I like to keep a dry bag stocked with these items. That way, I can grab it and go or even throw it in my suitcase when I travel, so I’m ready for a paddling adventure at a moment’s notice.

You’ll love exploring new destinations from the water, and with these few simple items, you can do it easily and safely.

California is a state that is blessed with a diversity of natural environments, from the deserts of Death Valley and the Mojave, the redwoods of the northwest, the high peaks and clear streams of the Sierras, and the valleys of live oak and grassland. With such differing ecosystems, we are fortunate to have an incredible number of annual and perennial wildflowers, trees, and flowering shrubs. In fact, there are more than 7,000 species of these types of vegetation in the state. Wildflowers can be spectacular in all of these regions, but their abundance and variety are linked to the amount of rain that falls, generally in the fall and winter months from November–March. 

Although rain is crucial for the growth of flowers, the timing, amount of precipitation, and temperature are critical for a super bloom to occur. For example, there must be a significant amount of moisture during September and October, which helps to rinse a bloom-inhibiting chemical from some types of seeds. Though not as important as rain, wind can also influence the abundance of annual wildflowers, as too much wind will dry out the seeds. 

Even without a super bloom, there are many places in our Golden State to see gorgeous flowers. California’s state flower, the yellow-to-deep-orange California poppy, and others still brighten the hills and valleys, if you know where to look and when their golden petals mingle with purple lupin and yellow goldfields, the sight is spectacular. 

Here are five places throughout the state that are known for their display of flowers. Even when rainfall is below normal there will be plenty to see in these natural landscapes; interesting geology and land formations, shrubs and trees, and other wildlife, such as deer, bobcats, fox and a variety of reptiles and birds. The best thing to do is to make a day of it. Bring a picnic lunch and camera and walk at your leisure in the natural world.

Southern California

1. Antelope Valley Poppy Preserve

This reserve is located at 1510 Lancaster Road in Lancaster, California. The area is considered part of the Mojave Desert Grassland habitat and lies at 2,600–3,000 feet in elevation. Here on 8 miles of trails, you are likely to see poppies, lupin, goldfields, and blue forget-me-knots. It is a beautiful reserve with a good view of the San Gabriel Mountains and there are benches located at spots along the trails for you to sit, relax, and enjoy the natural environment.

While you are there, be sure that you visit the Jane S. Pinheiro Interpretive Center which has wildlife and flower exhibits. High desert country often means unpredictable weather, so check before you arrive. It is usually windy in the spring so dress accordingly and bring plenty of water. Dogs are not allowed, and you are advised to stay on trails while taking photos to prevent damage to the flowering vegetation. This is a habitat for the Mojave green rattlesnake, and they are active on warm days, so be on the lookout as you walk. They are not aggressive and are an important part of the grassland ecosystem, keeping rodents in check.

2. Anza-Borrego Desert State Park

Anza-Borrego Desert State Park is the largest state park in California and is home to many unique plants that only grow in a desert environment. Many species bloom from March through early summer, including cactus, agave and yuccas, shrubs, and annual wildflowers. The abundance and quality of the flowers is dependent on the duration, time, and amount of rainfall, but also the wind. However, even when there is a year with less than average rain. This desert is worth a visit to find flowers. Cactus and flowering shrubs can be found in desert canyons and in washes where there is seasonal water. Cacti — such as beavertail, barrel, and cholla — and prickly pear bloom in April and May and have scarlet and shocking pink blooms, splendid to behold. The combination of bright yellow flowers, dusty sage-green leaves of brittlebush, and the deep and light purple of desert lavender and indigo bushes attract insects as well as birds. If you go, check in at the Anza-Borrego Desert State Park Visitor Center for information on where to find flowers.

Pro Tip: Flowers, if not carpeting the desert floor, can often be found in canyons and washes, sometimes where there are spots of shade.

3. Joshua Tree National Park 

Joshua Tree National Park is another great site to view wildflowers. Due to the muted colors of the Mojave Desert, the blooms of purple, red, yellow, cream, and blue flowers are especially vivid. Like other desert areas, such as Anza-Borrego State Park mentioned above, blooms vary from year to year, highly dependent on the amount of precipitation and air temperatures.

The prime wildflower season at Joshua Tree flourishes for just a few weeks, especially in the lower elevations, just enough time for the annual flowers to produce seeds. The Pinto Basin is a good place to view early blooms.

Flowers at higher elevations emerge later (March into April) but sometimes not until June. The indicator species of the park is the Joshua Tree, yucca breviola — commonly known as “desert dagger.” This is an unusual plant pollinated by moths, whose cream-colored blossoms hang in panicles. Other flowers include the large, white, trumpet-shaped Jimsonweed; the yellow-centered purple Mojave Aster; the orange-red Indian Paintbrush; and the deep blue Canterbury Bells.

Camping is allowed in the park and other accommodations including motels, lodges, and Airbnbs can be found in the towns of Joshua Tree and Twentynine Palms.

For more information, go to Joshua Tree National Park at nps.gov.

Joshua Tree is accessible from Los Angeles via Highway 10 and from San Diego on I-215 north to Highway 10. Start at the park entrance on Hwy 62 in the town of Joshua Tree.

Pro Tip: Visit the Hi-Desert Nature Museum in Twentynine Palms. It’s open Wednesday–Saturday from 10 a.m.–5 p.m.

Central California

4. Carrizo Plain National Monument

Located in San Luis Obispo County, 50 miles southeast of Paseo Robles and 100 miles northwest of Los Angeles, Carrizo Plain National Monument represents a portion of the once vast grasslands that covered parts of central and coastal California. At 250,000 acres, it is the largest remaining protected grassland habitat in California and spreads between two mountain ranges: the Temblor and the Calientes. The famous San Andreas Fault lies along the eastern edge of the mountains. This is a spectacular area that will transport you to a different era in California history.

When the rainy season is adequate, you will be rewarded with a mosaic of colors carpeting the grasslands and hills. There are fields of lupin and poppies, but also deeply pink owl’s clover, red paintbrush, and orange-tinged fiddlenecks. 

Wildflower season begins around mid-March and tapers in mid-May, as daytime temperatures rise. The best spots to see the flowers are along Soda Lake Road and Simmler Road. Besides a kaleidoscope of colors, you will enjoy the open space and quiet. And if you are lucky, an antelope, coyote, or bobcat may cross your path. You can also visit Painted Rock which contains the rock art of the Chumash and Yokut Indian tribes that once called this area their home.

Pro Tip: Be aware that there are no services in this area, so make certain that your gas tank is filled, and you bring along food and water. The road into the monument is not paved, but you do not need a four-wheel drive vehicle. Still, it’s a good idea to use a vehicle with good clearance and to check road conditions before you set out.

Central Coast

5. Fort Ord National Monument

Fort Ord National Monument is a coastal gem, and it was once a United States Army base, closed in 1994. In 2012, 14,651 acres were preserved as a national monument. It contains some of the largest coastal oak-chaparral habitats in California. Within the monument are 86 miles of trail for you to hike, bike, or horseback ride to your heart’s content. The monument’s main entrance, Creekside Trailhead, is located off State Highway 68 between the cities of Salinas, Seaside, and Monterey.

The area abounds in diverse habitats and wildlife including striking displays of annual wildflowers in the spring. The best time to view wildflowers here is early March and, depending on the amount and timing of rainfall, well into April. There are colorful and fragrant shrubs as well, like the orange sticky monkey flower and elegant red-bark manzanita with its pale-pink delicate cluster of bell-shaped petals, which bloom as early as January. You will be delighted to see hummingbirds hovering around the blossoms. There are patches of purple lupin, bright yellow buttercups, and red Indian paintbrush — even if the rainfall for the season is below average. The trails are varied in composition from dirt and sand to gravel roads. It is advised to be on the lookout for mountain bikes and horses, as the monument is a multi-use area.

Pro Tip: Follow up your hike with lunch at the Toro Café along Highway 68 just 10 minutes west of the trailhead. They have great burgers, salads, and sandwiches!

Northern California

6. Black Diamond Mines Regional Preserve

Black Diamond Mines Regional Preserve is an 8,533-acre protected area that was once mined for coal in the late 19^th century and was the site of several small towns housing the Welsh miners that came to work there. It is located near Antioch, California, in Contra Costa County. This preserve has more than 2,000 species of plants, including the rare Mt. Diablo fairy lantern and Mt. Diablo sunflower. There are remnants of coal mining here and one mine that you can tour. There is also a burial ground which was a Protestant cemetery named Rose Hill where 200 miners and their families were buried around the 1860s. Besides spring wildflowers, you may encounter something unusual: There have been many reports of ghosts in this area. 

Pro Tip: There are 65 miles of trails to explore and some of the hillside trails are steep, so you may want to bring your trekking poles.

7. Dry Creek Meadows Preserve

This protected area is a 152-acre, former gravel quarry pit located just northwest of Lemon Cove near Visalia in Tulare County. In 2004, the California Portland Cement Company donated their property to the Sequoia RiverLands Trust. The site is unique because it contains one of the few remaining alluvial woodlands in the state. A group of volunteers spent many hours over restoring the damaged areas by rerouting the streambeds and planting native trees, shrubs, grasses, and flowers that support populations of bald eagles, great blue herons, and herds of mule deer, as well as a showy display of wildflowers in the spring.

Pro Tip: Stop at The Main Squeeze Market along Highway 198 for great barbecue and mementos.

For more information about flowers in bloom all across the world:

• 7 Best European Destinations For Spring Flowers
• 5 Fantastic Locations To View Yellow Blooms During Napa Valley’s Mustard Season
• The 8 Best Tulip Festivals In The U.S.

Is there any more gorgeous a flower than the riotously colorful tulip? We adore these cheery harbingers of spring, and it turns out there’s a charming, picturesque city in Michigan that loves them just as much — if not more — than the rest of us. So much so that it hosts an 8-day bash devoted to these beautiful blooms each year, and it might just be the perfect destination for your next weekend getaway.

Holland, Michigan, located on the state’s western shore near Lake Michigan, is a 3-hour drive from Detroit and has a long and rich Dutch heritage. It’s also crazy for the flower that first became popular in Holland, a region and former province of the Netherlands. Since 1929, the Michigan town has played host to Tulip Time, a festival that features millions of blooming bulbs, art, entertainment, food, and lots of Dutch-themed fun.

Here are the best things to do during this terrific event.

1. Enjoy The Magnificent Blooms

You just can’t escape the festival’s lovely namesakes — nor would you want to! They are everywhere, a delightful riot of color spread throughout town. Holland’s parks and recreation Department plants a whopping 5 million bulbs across town every autumn. Sourced directly from the Netherlands, these beauties are typically in their full, glorious bloom the first week of May, when Tulip Time is held. Everywhere you turn, you’ll see festive splashes of red, pink, orange, yellow, and even purple, and there are perfect photo opportunities around every corner. Take in the floral splendor in parks and public spaces and along the roadsides — or tulip lanes — everywhere in town.

Tulip Time also features flower-specific activities and events for festivalgoers, including several walking tours, plus organized photo walks through the most scenic floral stretches of town. Also, back by popular demand, visitors can also take part in a special tulip immersion garden, featuring 50,000 tightly packed and perfectly planted blooms, with expert explanation and commentary from an internationally-lauded horticulturist. Talk about the perfect Instagram moment… be prepared to be dazzled!

New in 2023, you can even name a tulip bed after your family or a loved one. Talk about the perfect Mother’s Day tribute!

Even if you’re prone to allergies, you’ll have a great time: It turns out that tulips are some of the most hypoallergenic blooms out there.

2. Tulip Time Run

Want to flower-power your way through a unique and unforgettable workout? Then consider the Tulip Time Run to kick off your Holland visit. The event — which is held the first day of the festival and features both a 5k and a 10k — welcomes all paces, and you can’t beat the gorgeous views.

The race kicks off and also ends at Holland’s Kollen Park, right on the lovely shores of Lake Macatawa. You’ll run right through the tulip-lined streets of Holland, there’s terrific runner support, and we’ll challenge you to find a prettier spring race! Hint: it’s not going to happen!

3. Floral Arrangement Courses

Creating dazzling floral bouquets is an art, and if you’re inspired by Holland’s tulips to try it out, you’re in luck! Tulip Time is offering several hands-on floral arrangement sessions during the festival. In this hour-long course, you’ll learn the basics from award-winning floral designers, and even create your own masterpiece to take home. Tickets include your lesson and all the supplies you’ll need to build our own beautiful, one-of-a-kind creation.

4. Art Exhibits

Celebrating the arts has long been central to the Tulip Time Festival.

The Art in Bloem Fine Art Showcase focuses on pieces created by local artists. Here you’ll find the top 20 finalists in the Tulip Time artwork competition, and you can even participate in the Viewers’ Choice Awards by voting for your favorite image at the exhibit!

The Tulip Time Quilt Show is also a fan favorite, with the difficult and increasingly rare art form taking center stage. More than 100 hand-stitched quilts are on display, in a variety of styles, colors, and designs. Visitors can also buy raffle tickets for the chance to win a very special quilt: one created specifically to celebrate Tulip Time!

If you want to try your own hand at creating tulip-centered visual art, be sure to check out the Tulip Time Photo Walks. There, you’ll get tips and tricks from professional photographers about how to get the perfect image of these iconic flowers, and even have the chance to submit your photo to be considered for Tulip Time social media posts during the festival.

5. Windmill Island Gardens

The Only Authentic Dutch Windmill Still Operating In The U.S.

To experience Holland’s tulips in a truly Dutch setting, walk the 20 minutes from downtown to Windmill Island Gardens. The focal point of this beautiful spot is DeZwaan, the only authentic Dutch windmill operating in the United States. When we say operating, we really mean it: The mill grinds wheat flour and cornmeal that you can purchase on-site.

Climb to the fourth-floor deck for a gorgeous view of the grounds and gardens, which are perfect for strolling when the 100,000 tulips scattered across the three lush fields are in full bloom. As you can imagine, the gardens are bustling during Tulip Time, and for good reason. Tickets cost $12.

6. Tulip Time Parades

Volksparade

You’ll want to make time for at least one of the parades that take place during Tulip Time. The Volksparade is a traditional Dutch march that encourages crowd participation. First, the mayor dons ceremonial white gloves to inspect the cleanliness of the route. If the streets need scrubbing (and they most likely will!), you’ll see folks in traditional Dutch costumes bring out buckets and brooms for the spring cleaning needed for the parade to step off. After that, you’ll be treated to dozens of bands, community floats, and other entertainment. There’s also a Dutch dance performance just prior to the parade kick-off. 

Kinderparade

The Kinderparade — or children’s parade — is a sweet Tulip Time tradition for Holland’s youngest residents. Elementary school children will line up with their teachers and school administrators in full costume and march together through downtown Holland. Each school and grade will have its own theme that celebrates Dutch heritage.

Be sure to head downtown early to claim a spot for whatever parade you choose to view.

7. Traditional Dutch Dancing

Dutch dancing returns in a big way during the 2023 Tulip Time festivities. Costumed performers will show off traditional Dutch dance steps at Centennial Park in the middle of town. Expect lots of clomping in those clogs! There are also performances featuring far younger dancers as children from 3rd through 8th grade will also show off their talents. There are dance demonstrations each day during Tulip Time; be sure not to miss them!

Eating In Holland

During the Tulip Time Festival, Dutch cuisine takes center stage.

DeBoer Bakery is locally owned, and the people who live in Holland know that its two locations are the best places to go for pastries sweet and savory, including buttery krakelingen filled with almond paste and saucijzenbroodjes, or Dutch pigs in a blanket. Russ’, another locally owned favorite, features Tulip Time’s favorite Dutch pea soup.

Of course, you can enjoy Dutch cheese, beer, and sausage from vendors in and around downtown. And if you feel like mashing up your Dutch and Italian food faves, head to Hops at 84 East. Located downtown, this spot bakes up wood-fired pizzas with crusts made by DeBoer Bakery from flour milled at the local windmill. It’s truly full-circle cuisine!

Shopping In Holland

The shopping scene in Holland during Tulip Time tends to focus on all things floral, with artwork, textiles, and other home goods emblazoned with the bright spring blooms the festival celebrates. You’ll find tulip-themed gifts in nearly every downtown Holland boutique. You can also take home some tulip bulbs to plant in your own yard or garden once fall comes around.

You’ll find special Tulip Time souvenirs and much more, at the Artisan Market on the grounds of Beechwood Church. More than 150 juried artisans will offer their wares for sale at the market. If you work up an appetite while shopping, no worries, as food trucks will also be on site. And as an extra bonus: Dutch dancing demonstrations will take place during the duration of the market!

Where To Stay In Holland

There are three downtown hotels in Holland, which tend to book up fairly quickly for Tulip Time: the newly revamped Haworth Hotel on the campus of Hope College, a Courtyard by Marriott property conveniently located along the main parade route, and the modern, chic CityFlatsHotel.

If you can’t snag a room downtown, don’t worry: There are 2,000 additional hotel rooms within 3 to 4 miles of downtown, with accommodations to fit every budget. Homesharing sites like Airbnb and Vrbo are other options to consider, especially if you’re traveling with a larger group.

What To Know Before You Go

There’s no getting around the fact that there will be crowds at Tulip Time, especially on the weekends. Saturdays tend to be the busiest. Be sure to pack your patience, and just focus on having a terrific time! 

Also, this should go without saying, but we’ll go ahead and mention it: Although it might be quite tempting to do so, do not pick or cut any of the tulips on display in Holland unless you have express permission. It’s the only way to keep the blooms beautiful for everyone who visits during this special event.

Related Reading:

• How To Spend A Beautiful Weekend In Charming Holland, Michigan
• The 8 Best Tulip Festivals In The U.S.
• How To Visit Washington’s Skagit Valley Tulip Fields
• 7 Gorgeous Gardens To Visit In Michigan

It’s virtually impossible to rank the properties in the United States National Park System — that’s an incredibly subjective topic. With 423 national parks that span more than 84 million acres, each park is unique in its own way, offering unique sights, amenities, and experiences. Personally, showing off my inherent bias as a native St. Louisan, it’s easy for me to name my favorite — it’s the Gateway Arch National Park. This park features, you guessed it, the Gateway Arch. 

There’s plenty to do other than go up the Gateway Arch in the park, including exploring walking trails, watching a history video, or visiting the Old Courthouse (subject to reopening after restoration), and you can’t beat the view from the top if you do go up to the top of the arch.

We asked a pair of retired park rangers, Phil Selleck and Marilyn Irwin, to give their thoughts on what they consider their favorite park and favorite sight within that park. Yes, you can definitely visit many national parks in the winter and have an amazing time.

1. Mexican Freetail Bats

Carlsbad Caverns National Park

Located in Carlsbad, New Mexico, Carlsbad Caverns National Park contains 113 underground caves including Lechuguilla Cave, the deepest and fourth longest limestone cave in the United States at 1,567 feet. Irwin suggests that you can visit the park any time of year, but notes that summer offers the greatest variety of activities. 

She said that reservations are required and must be made before heading to the park, but well worth what she described as an emotional experience. “The cave is exciting with its many intricate formations of stalactites and stalagmites,” she said. “Visiting the underground features with a ranger is informative and an adventure, but exploring the cave’s interior is only a preamble to the real show. Do not overlook the evening entertainment at dusk as around 400,000 Mexican freetail bats exit the cave to begin their nightly quest for millions of flying insects. Visiting the caverns is not the main reason I go to Carlsbad Caverns. Seeing the bats exit the caves in the evening is a favorite part of my time there.”

She noted that you will want to stay until dusk and sit quietly in the outdoor amphitheater to see the bats emerge from the cave. This is a sight best experienced in the summer.

2. The Carriage Trails

Acadia National Park

Acadia National Park, the first park east of the Mississippi River, offers hiking, biking, camping, lakes, and more. Made up of a cluster of islands along the coast of Maine, Acadia National Park has more than 130 miles of hiking trails and 45 miles of carriage roads that can be traveled by bike. Irwin recommends taking a ride on what she describes as “roads of broken-stone paving” that were made especially for horse-drawn vehicles. Automobiles are not allowed on carriage roads.

3. Jordan Pond And Jordan Pond House

Acadia National Park

She also said visitors can’t skip the Jordan Pond and Jordan Pond House, established in 1893 and famous for its tea and popovers. Due to the popularity of the Jordan Pond House, Irwin recommends you check the hours and consider arriving before 11 a.m. or after 4 p.m. He offered a tasty tip — “Just don’t miss the yummy popovers!” This journey is also best taken in the summer months.

4. Ute Trail

Rocky Mountain National Park

Established in 1915, Rocky Mountain National Park offers mountain climbing, hiking, camping, fishing, breathtaking views, mountain lakes, and so much more. With elevations ranging from 8,000 feet to 14,529 feet, the park is open year-round, hosts over four million annual visitors, and has different views and points of interest throughout the year. Irwin recommends taking a moment to view the canyon and hiking the Ute Trail along Trail Ridge Road.

“My favorite thing to do is to take a thermos of coffee and a sweet treat, find a soft rock along the trail, and enjoy my snack while gazing into the canyon far below,” she said. “For me, a summer when I do not experience the Ute Trail is not complete.”

Pro Tip: Trail Ridge Road is closed to through traffic during the winter. It typically opens the last week in May.

5. Anacapa Island

Channel Islands National Park

Channel Islands National Park is made up of three islands named East, Middle, and West Anacapa Islands that are almost five miles long and have a total land area of about 700 acres. Used by thousands of birds as a nesting area, the rocky shores of Anacapa are a popular resting and breeding area for California sea lions and harbor seals. Selleck said you must see Anacapa Island and seize the chance to take a hike. 

“The island is a treat when seabirds are nesting or wintering,” he said. “However, be ready for the smell of guano wherever you go. The island is small, so it is easy to hike around it up top for great ocean views, close-ups of sea and shorebirds, cliffside views down to sea lions basking on the beach, and the kelp beds around the island. As you approach or leave the island, there is a great stone arch that tells you it is Anacapa.”

6. View From The Top

Washington Monument At The National Mall

As the centerpiece of The National Mall, the Washington Monument offers spectacular views of the Lincoln Memorial, The White House, and the United States Capitol Building. It is the tallest structure in Washington, D.C., completed in 1894. Selleck recommends that you visit The National Mall and head to the top of the Washington Monument. 

“You can’t miss the view from the top,” he said. “It is a wonderful panoramic view of one of the most historic cities in the world. You’ll get a dramatic view of L’Enfant’s design for the city and how some of the most famous and historic buildings are connected by that design. A sunny morning or late afternoon, when the light is softer, is a great time to see it. You’ll be one of a small percentage of visitors to Washington, D.C. who will be privileged to see it.”

7. Kachina, Owachomo, And Sipapu Natural Bridges

Natural Bridges National Monument

Natural Bridges National Monument sits 6,500 feet above sea level, is home to a variety of plants and animals, and is the oldest National Park Service site in the state of Utah. Offering the chance to explore three natural bridges, Kachina, Owachomo, and Sipapu Natural Bridges National Monument was formed where streams eroded the canyon walls. The monument was established in 1908. Selleck describes the monument as a great out-of-the-way find. 

“Bridges are different from arches in their formation; carved over streams that have eroded them as opposed to arches, which are formed by seeping water and frost,” he said. “So, you have beautiful bridges over a stream bed, which change in appearance according to time of day, time of year, and viewpoint. The arch is off the beaten path, so there is more opportunity for an uncrowded, quiet tour of a unique landscape.”

Pro Tip

There are a couple of things our experts noted or that are recommended in general when it comes to visiting national parks.

• Check out all of the passes available to you, each of which has its benefits.
• Download the NPS app for your smartphone. This app gives you access to over 400 national parks right at your fingertips and comes with lots of great features to enhance your experience.
• Check calendars, websites, hours, closures, and anything else noted online about your park of choice before you visit.

It is difficult to think about San Francisco without an image of the Golden Gate Bridge popping into your mind. A fantastic view of the icon is the icing on the cake of an incredible hike along the Lands End Trail. The walk winds along the coastal edge of Lincoln Park, a bump in the land west of the Presidio of San Francisco.

1. Sutro Baths And Point Lobos

In 1894, the millionaire Adolph Sutro had the vision to create a recreational space for the inhabitants of and visitors to San Francisco. He built a vast complex of public baths with seven swimming pools of different temperatures. The glass enclosure was large enough for 10,000 bathers to enjoy the pools, slides, and diving boards.

Concert space and restaurants added to the appeal. Over the years, the baths faded in popularity and were no longer profitable, especially during the Great Depression. Developers started demolishing the building in 1964 with the plan to place high-rise apartments on the site. A fire completed the destruction in 1966 and the plans fizzled, leaving only a small trace of what once existed.

At the west end of the Lands End Trail, a wide wooden staircase descends to the Sutro Bath remnants and the natural pools that surround them. Colorful graffiti adorns the cement blocks, adding proof of the appeal of this location to artistic visions. A small beach is currently all that is available for enjoying the water.

To the east of the ruins, Point Lobos juts out and provides the first glimpse of the Golden Gate Bridge. The site takes its name from the Spanish for sea wolves, now more commonly called sea lions, that would come ashore here and fill the air with barking. Around the far side of the promontory, steep steps invite you up to the Coastal Trail.

2. Coastal Trail

Along the rocky coast, the Coastal Trail winds through the shade of cypress trees with occasional views of the ocean waves. The lovely stands of grey, naked trunks curve up to a spray of forest green canopy. For centuries, the Ohlone and Miwok peoples lived in this area, hunting, fishing, and gathering food from the local plants. The ferries and cliffside railroad brought visitors to the park in the late 19^th century. The trail follows the abandoned rail bed along the cliff edge.

Much of the trail is a wide, flat dirt path and easy to traverse. Many highlights of the park are directly on the trail and can be enjoyed even if you do not wish to brave the steps down to the beach areas.

3. USS San Francisco Memorial

After a short walk, the Eastern Coastal Trail Overlook provides a spectacular view of the entire Golden Gate Bridge. A long flight of stairs opposite the overlook leads up to the USS San Francisco Memorial. A small parking lot off El Camino Del Mar also allows access to this site.

The actual bridge of the USS San Francisco stands on the cliff as a vivid reminder of the violence of war. Jagged holes pepper the wall of the hull of this memorial. On the night of November 12, 1942, the Battle of Guadalcanal commenced. The USS San Francisco was damaged by enemy fire and a plane that crashed into the ship, but it was able to continue sailing. Rear Admiral Callaghan and 76 sailors died during the fighting. For her role in this battle and one the previous month, the ship received the Presidential Unit Citation.

In front of the ship pieces, plaques show the complete battleship and describe the Battle of Guadalcanal and the memorial.

4. Mile Rocks Lighthouse And Shipwrecks

One mile from the San Francisco Bay’s main shipping channel, the aptly named Mile Rocks — in partnership with weather conditions — have caused numerous shipwrecks. In 1901, the City of Rio de Janeiro ran aground due to the dense fog and sank within 8 minutes. Over half of the 210 people on board died. This led to the planning of a lighthouse with a fog whistle despite the treacherous conditions for the construction out on Mile Rock. A three-tiered structure, referred to as the “steel wedding cake,” was eventually completed. The Coast Guard automated the station in the 1960s and removed the top two tiers to create a helicopter landing pad.

Today, the white and orange bands of the lighthouse base are visible from the Lands End Trail. During low tide, remnants of the shipwrecks can be glimpsed near the shore.

5. Mile Rock Beach

Nearby, the challenge of the descent down more than 100 steps is worth a visit to Mile Rock Beach. This relaxing spot provides great views of Mile Rocks Lighthouse, Marin Headlands, and the Golden Gate Bridge. Large boulders dot the shoreline and dozens of rock cairns amass on the beach. You can build your own cairn or just take in the views with a continuous soundtrack of waves crashing ashore.

Near the top of the path back to the trail, Lands End Lookout juts out into the water. It is worth a stop for more photos of the Golden Gate Bridge and the miles of California coast visible on a clear day.

6. Eagle Point

At the western edge of Lands End Trail, Eagle Point offers a few benches to rest up for the walk back. This spot offered a spectacular view of the Golden Gate Bridge and many people milled about, taking photos. Beyond this point lies a residential area before reaching the Presidio of San Francisco. After basking in the scenery for a bit, I turned onto the paved path that parallels El Comino Del Mar to walk toward the Legion of Honor.

7. Memorial For Peace

In the shade of a few pine trees along this path, a small memorial provides a quiet space for reflection. A stone bench offers a place to rest and contemplate the upright six-foot slab of the Memorial for Peace that was added to the park in 1984. A small engraved rock at the front calls attention to the quest for world peace. It reads, in part, “we recognize once again the true fundamental of the human soul that pursues the truth, implements the good, creates beauty, and renews his will to step forward.”

8. Legion Of Honor

When first seeing the Legion of Honor listed on the map of the park, I assumed it was a monument and planned a brief stop to see it. I was surprised to find an incredible museum filled with fine art. Several galleries on the first level and 19 on the second level offer Impressionist paintings, medieval and Baroque art, and porcelain dishware. Three galleries house an impressive display of Rodin sculptures, including a larger-than-life bronze of Three Shades beneath a domed ceiling.

Adolph B. Spreckels and his wife, Alma, created the museum to reflect the French Pavilion at the 1915 San Francisco’s Panama-Pacific International Exposition. Alma had adored the pavilion and wanted to recreate it to showcase French art. The Legion opened in 1924 and was dedicated to the memory of the 3,600 California men who lost their lives in France in World War I.

The neoclassical architecture of the Legion of Honor, surrounded by manicured grounds, gives the feel of touring a European capital. Two rows of columns flank the tall arched entryway. A Greek-styled frieze adorns each end of the front of the building. A stone lion on either side of the low fence keeps guard. Statues of Joan of Arc and El Cid stand on the groomed lawns on each side. The columns extend into the open courtyard where Rodin’s The Thinker welcomes visitors. A smaller version of the Louvre’s glass pyramid leads you to the entrance of the museum.

After being immersed in fine art, you emerge to a spectacular view of the natural world of trees and water. A circular pool with a fountain also sits before the Legion of Honor. A short walk brings you back along the Lands End Trail to where you began.

One of the best hikes in San Francisco brings you through beautiful stands of cypress trees, down to relaxing beaches, and past interesting cultural sights. Lands End Trail showcases the natural beauty along the coast of San Francisco while highlighting the icon Golden Gate Bridge. You will leave with wonderful memories and incredible photos.

John F. Kennedy said it this way, “Nothing compares to the simple pleasure of a bike ride.” I’d have to agree.

In my home state of Minnesota, biking opportunities abound. The League of American Bicyclists ranks Minnesota fifth in the nation in cycling, and rightly so.

The land of 10,000 lakes also feels like the land of 10,000 bike trails. Personally, my favorite trails are paved and off-road. I love the transformation from an old, abandoned railroad bed to a beautiful Minnesota bike trail, and that’s the story of many of them!

Another appeal of biking is that it is uncomplicated. Sure, you can gear up, spend a bundle, and get a bunch of gadgets — we own some ourselves. But at the end of the day, it’s pretty much just you, your helmet, and your bike; and hopefully, someone to share the experience with, which makes it all the richer.

Here are 15 beautiful trails (listed alphabetically by trail name) to get you started on biking in Minnesota.

1. Cannon Valley Trail

Cannon Falls To Red Wing (Southeastern MN)

19.7 Miles, Paved

The Cannon Valley Trail is one of our favorite “rails to trails” bike trails. It’s built on a former Chicago Great Western Railroad line, which means a low grade, or a fairly flat ride. We love it because it runs right along the Cannon River and the mature trees create a canopy overhead. We often start this ride at the halfway point in Welch, where there’s ample parking and sweeping valley views. One of the trail anchors is Red Wing, which is an old river town popular for its stunning bluffs, shops, and history.

Pro Tip: From April 1–November 1, those 18 and older need to purchase a Wheel Pass when using this trail. Wheel pass fees are $5 a day or $25 a season, are available along the trail, and are subject to change.

2. Central Lakes State Trail

Osakis To Fergus Falls (North Central MN)

55 Miles, Paved

Another former railroad bed turned paved bike trail, the Central Lakes State Trail was built on an abandoned Burlington Northern Railroad corridor. It winds past lakes (no surprise), farm fields, open grasslands, wetlands, and forests. I loved biking past the old granaries, standing tall against a clear summer sky. The trailhead in Fergus Falls has a lot of parking and we found that the trail south of Fergus Falls is one of the most scenic parts.

Bonus: This trail connects to the Lake Wobegon Trail. If you’re feeling ambitious, you’ve got 120 miles of paved trail ahead of you!

Fergus Falls is in Otter Tail County, and apparently, proud of it. At 40 feet long, Otto the otter is quite impressive!

Pro Tips: No fees or passes are required for cyclists to use state trails. Settle the trail dust with a cold brew from Copper Trail Brewing, Alexandria. For great eats and fresh juices of all kinds, try The Fabled Farmer in Fergus Falls, on the opposite end of the trail.

3. Dakota Regional Trail

Wayzata To St. Bonifacius

13.5 Miles, Paved

Once again, we have an old railroad to thank for beautiful biking on the Dakota Regional Trail. It delivers gorgeous views of the bays and inlets of Lake Minnetonka, plus golf courses, Gale Woods Farm, bridges, and wooded areas.

Bonus: West of St. Bonifacius, you can pick up an additional 12.5 miles of paved trail into the town of Mayer.

Pro Tip: There is no fee for general use of Three Rivers parks and trails, but special activities may require either a pass, permit, or parking fee.

4. Gitchi-Gami State Trail

Split Rock Lighthouse To Beaver Bay (Northeastern MN)

33 miles, Paved

The Gitchi-Gami State Trail is still in development, but the part that’s finished is already spectacular. When completed, it will cover 86 beautiful miles along Minnesota’s gorgeous North Shore of Lake Superior, connecting Two Harbors to Grand Marais. 33 miles are complete now, and smaller northern sections are also complete. Another plus, it’s great for summer biking because Lake Superior keeps excessive heat and humidity away.

5. Glacial Lakes State Trail

Willmar To The Kandiyohi/Stearns County Line (Western MN)

22 miles, Paved

Another rails-to-trails option is the Glacial Lakes State Trail, located on a former Burlington Northern Railroad bed. We started our ride in Hawick, small town USA, and rode through Spicer set on scenic Green Lake, all the way to Willmar (38 miles round trip). This trail takes its name from the work of glaciers that moved through this area thousands of years ago. As we biked, wildflowers lined the path and we passed picturesque farms. The trail is especially scenic in the southern end, with more shaded canopy for summer rides.

6. Grand Rounds

South Minneapolis (Uptown Area)

51 Miles, Paved

If you want to see the best of Minneapolis, check out the Grand Rounds bike trail that follows the scenic byway of the same name. This urban bike loop gives you a taste of great scenery, historic sites, art, gardens, shopping, and dining. It follows the Chain of Lakes (Lakes Nokomis, Harriet, Bde Maka Ska, and Lake of the Isles), past Minnehaha Creek, Minnehaha Falls, and the downtown riverfront along the Mississippi River.

Flower lovers can’t miss the wildflower garden at Theodore Wirth Park — the oldest public wildflower garden in the U.S. — or the Lyndale Park Rose Garden at Lake Harriet. On the way, ride or stroll across the iconic 1883 Stone Arch Bridge (pedestrian/bike only and the only one of its kind over the Mississippi).

Pro Tip: The Twin Cities has an extensive network of bike trails. This one is a superstar, but there’s a lot more where this came from.

7. Harmony-Preston Valley State Trail

Harmony To Preston (Southeastern MN)

18 Miles, Paved

The Harmony-Preston Valley State Trail is another railroad-grade trail that passes through lush wooded areas and rich farmland. Harmony is the southern trailhead and claims to be the “Biggest Little Town in Southern Minnesota.” It’s also Amish country. Enjoy — and likely, give your credit card a workout — the quality woven baskets, wooden toys, furniture, rugs, and baked goods for sale in shops and farmers markets.

Bonus: The Harmony-Preston Valley State Trail also intersects with the 42-mile Root River State Trail.

Pro Tip: Check the trail map (PDF) for steep hills at the southern end of this trail, and plan accordingly. An “out-and-back” always works here.

8. Heartland State Trail

Park Rapids To Cass Lake (Northwestern MN)

49 Miles, Paved

The Heartland State Trail was one of the first rail-to-trail projects in the country. It’s marked by glacial lakes, flowing streams, and the Chippewa State Forest, which has a large population of bald eagles there and in the surrounding area.

Bonus: The Heartland State Trail connects with the Paul Bunyan State Trail and other regional trails. It is only 21 miles from Itasca State Park and the headwaters of the Mississippi River. 

9. Luce Line State Trail 

Plymouth To Cosmos (Twin Cities And West)

63 Miles, Various Surfaces

The Luce Line State Trail is another former railroad-grade trail. The ride starts in a wooded setting with sugar maple and basswood trees then advances west into the tallgrass, open prairie. This trail also gives you the chance to ride your bike on every kind of cycling surface:

• Plymouth 30 miles west to Winsted – crushed limestone
• Winsted to Hutchinson – paved
• Hutchinson to Cedar Mills – crushed granite (larger than crushed limestone so the biking is more rugged)
• Cedar Mills to Cosmos – natural trail (mowed grass)

Pro Tip: For prairie areas without a lot of shade cover, be sure to have sunscreen and plenty of water and snacks.

10. Medicine Lake Regional Trail

Plymouth To Maple Grove

20.7 Miles, Paved

The Medicine Lake Regional Trail connects both Elm Creek Park Reserve and Fish Lake and French Regional Parks. It provides great views of Rice Lake in Maple Grove and Medicine Lake in Plymouth. The ride around Medicine Lake is very scenic, with towering trees, beautiful homes, parks, beaches, and even a covered bridge.

Bonus: The trail gives you access to the Bassett Creek and Luce Line Regional Trails, as well as many community trails.

Pro Tip: Both the Medicine Lake Regional Trail and the Dakota Regional Trail are a part of the Three Rivers Park District.

11. Mississippi River Trail/US Bicycle Route 45 – Minnesota Segment

Itasca To The Iowa Border, Following The Mississippi River

Roughly 600 miles, Paved With Road Riding

Imagine exploring the Mississippi River on a bicycle, from the river’s headwaters, through 10 states, all the way to the Gulf of Mexico! Minnesota’s segment of the Mississippi River Trail (MRT) links 10 state parks, state and regional trails, five campuses, plus scenic overlooks, historic and geological markers, locks and dams, streetscapes, and more. It uses existing bike trails where possible but also follows the shoulders of low-traffic, paved roads. This path is the granddaddy of them all and incorporates some of the other Minnesota bike trails already named.

12. Paul Bunyan State Trail

Brainerd To Bemidji (North Central MN)

100 Miles, Paved

The Paul Bunyan State Trail traverses through unique small towns, mighty forests (this is the north country, after all), clear blue lakes and rivers, and more. The 9-mile segment through the Chippewa National Forest has rolling hills, curves, and an 8 percent grade, which is significant, depending on fitness level. Although not without hills, one alternative is to use the Shingobee Connection paved trail to Walker.

Bonus: This trail intersects with the Mississippi River Trail and the Heartland State Trail.

Pro Tip: Don’t miss the charm of small-town Minnesota with such wonders as a giant Paul Bunyan and his sidekick, Babe the Blue Ox. Bemidji claims to be Paul’s birthplace, and who am I to argue? The 18-foot statue is quite convincing.

13. Root River State Trail 

Fountain To Houston (Southeastern MN)

42 Miles, Paved

The Root River State Trail is a gem, with its dramatic bluffs, meandering river views, and southeastern Minnesota charm. Watch the steep, half-mile segment between Vinegar Ridge and Houston. The incline to Fountain can also be challenging.

Pro Tip: Lanesboro is a delightful town with shops, restaurants, a theater, and lodging of every kind, from charming bed and breakfasts to woodland cabins and inns. It’s a great place to explore or stay overnight if you’re in the area.

14. Sakatah Singing Hills State Trail

Mankato To Faribault (Southern MN)

39 Miles, Paved

This bike trail and corresponding Sakatah Lake State Park take their name from the Dakota tribe, translated “Singing Hills.” Indeed, the hills sing here, courtesy of ancient glaciers that dropped mounds of rocks and minerals (called moraines) to create rolling hills. Fear not, the Sakatah Singing Hills State Trail is on a former railroad bed and fairly flat. It follows a stretch of the Cannon River and passes by many lakes and farmland.

15. Willard Munger Trail

Hinkley To Duluth (East Central/Northeastern MN)

70 Miles, Paved

The Willard-Munger State Trail is another “rails to trails” and a great choice for biking. The trail has a lot of variety with rock walls and sweeping views passing near Banning, Moose Lake, and Jay Cooke State Parks.

Trail Maps

Maps for most of the trails can be found on the official website of the Minnesota Department of Natural Resources. Other trail maps can be found here:

• Cannon Valley Trail
• Dakota Regional Trail
• Grand Rounds
• Medicine Lake Regional Trail
• Mississippi River Trail/US Bicycle Route 45

Do you ever feel like you’re flying when you’re on your bike? Turns out, you’re in good company. For inspiration, Wilbur and Orville Wright considered the humble bicycle and made a creative connection between cycling and flying. When riding a bike, it’s essential to lean to retain balance, and they realized they could apply that same concept to flight. And the rest, as they say, is history.

So go ahead, the next time you get on your bike, fly. (Even if it’s only in your mind.) You can’t go wrong when you hit any of the beautiful bike trails in Minnesota, land of 10,000 lakes.

Twelve miles from Charleston, South Carolina, approximately 30 minutes by car, sits the largest live oak tree east of the Mississippi River. Angel Oak, located on Johns Island, is also known locally as “The Tree.” This historical site is considered a Low Country treasure. An estimated 40,000 visitors arrive each year to wander under its impressive branches and contemplate life in their shade.

It is reported to be anywhere from 300 to 500 years old, but many consider the tree to be ancient, claiming it’s 1,500 years old. This must-see tree continues to be popular because of its age, beauty, and the legends surrounding it. The weather is hot and humid during the summer in the Charleston area, so visit in the spring or fall to truly enjoy the majesty of Angel Oak. Here are seven things to know before you go.

1. It Is A Southern Live Oak

Angel Oak is a Southern live oak, or Quercus virginiana. Live oaks are evergreen, which means they remain green and alive throughout the winter. They do drop some leaves in the spring but tend to replace them quickly. They offer lovely shade. Native to the Lowcountry, the area along the South Carolina coast, they can live for hundreds of years, and most grow out wide rather than up. It is believed that this type of tree does not usually grow tall, but Angel Oak is so mature that it grows both up and out. Angel Oak’s branches reach in all directions; some even dive underground and then grow up again. The wood is so hard that the USS Constitution, which was built of Southern live oak, earned the nickname “Old Ironsides” because cannonballs bounced off its sides.

2. Angel Oak’s Namesake

The tree got its name from plantation owner Justus Angel. It was initially on the property of Abraham Waight, recorded in 1717 as part of a land grant. Mr. Waight held a lot of land and several plantations in the area. He was incredibly wealthy. Angel Oak was on the property for four generations of Waights but was transferred to Justus Angel, Martha Waight’s future husband, as a part of Martha’s wedding settlement.

3. Admission Is Free

Angel Oak Park is owned by the City of Charleston, and there is no charge to visit, but donations are accepted to help preserve it for future generations. There is a parking lot outside the fence and just a short walk into the park to see this natural beauty. It is open seven days a week (except for holidays).

A gift shop is located on the property and picnic tables are available around the park’s perimeter. The gift shop provides more information about Angel Oak and merchandise, including the gorgeous sweetgrass baskets handmade by local artisans. You are not permitted to take photos in the shop, but you are welcome to take pictures of the tree with hand-held cameras. Tripods are prohibited. Bring a picnic and sit at one of the tables. Visitors aren’t permitted to put blankets under the branches or have any food or drinks near the tree. Leashed pets are allowed in the picnic area.

Permits are required for weddings and photoshoots and are provided by the City of Charleston Parks and Recreation Department.

Pro Tip: The ground may be uneven around the trunk, so watch your step, look up, and marvel at her size and strength.

4. Angel Oak’s Impressive Size

Angel Oak has been growing for at least three centuries and has had a lot of time to mature. The tree is 65 feet tall and the trunk has a circumference of 25.5 feet. Dripping in Spanish moss, the canopy offers over 17,000 square feet of shade. The most extended branch reaches 187 feet from tip to end. There are supports under some of the most massive branches or wires attached to the tree to help keep the giant limbs from breaking. Typically, live oak branches will grow underground and then come back up and grow outward. Some of Angel Oak’s branches do this as well. This feature makes the tree look almost otherworldly.

5. It Has Survived Many Storms

Angel Oak has seen its share of storms, floods, and even earthquakes, and it has remained standing. The only hurricane to cause the tree damage in recent history was Hurricane Hugo. Hugo was devastating to South Carolina as it made landfall as a category 4 storm near Sullivan’s Island on September 22, 1989. The wind speeds were clocked at 140 miles per hour, and the storm surge pushed up the rivers, especially the nearby Ashley River, which is 12 miles away. The water flooded the lowlands. The damage caused by the storm exceeded $7 billion to property and agriculture. While many local trees were snapped in half or blown down by the winds, Angel Oak did not topple over.

Despite Hugo’s severity, the damage to Angel Oak was not severe, and the tree continues to thrive and grow. The most recent threat to the tree was a housing development planned in 2012. Luckily, a group called Save the Angel Oak and the Coastal Conservation League argued that the groundwater would be compromised if apartments were built near the site. In 2013, the Lowcountry Land Trust preserved 17 acres around the tree, which protected it from future development.

6. A Symbol Of Strength In Books And Television

Angel Oak was featured in a novel by author Emily Nelson entitled The Heart of a Child. It was also used as a backdrop for an Allstate Insurance television commercial during Hurricane Florence’s aftermath in 2018. The advertisement begins with a panoramic shot around the tree’s entire span. The voiceover speaks to the resilience of South Carolina residents, likening their strength to that of the Angel Oak.

7. The Tree Is Rumored To Be Haunted

It is no secret that there are ghostly stories that surround the tree. For her book Ghosts and Legends of Charleston, South Carolina, Denise Roffe interviewed an old African American woman, a descendant of slaves who once labored on the land near Angel Oak. She recounted a legend that the tree was home to giant vultures who feasted on the bodies of slaves who were hung from the branches. She said that the tree has a curse on it due to the violence that occurred there, and that slaves felt that the tree was a bad omen. She also claimed that Native Americans met underneath the tree and made it a sacred burial ground and believed it was the spirits of Native Americans that protected the tree and kept it alive and safe.

In recent years, reports of glowing lights and faces have been reported. In 2008, a couple was married under the tree and returned a few months later during a full moon to have a romantic moment where they were married. They reported seeing glowing human forms gathered around the trunk and some up in the branches.

Another couple visited the tree one evening. The husband tried to carve a heart into the bark as a symbol of their love but stopped when he heard noises nearby. The wife was feeling uneasy, and she asked him to put his blade away. She claims she saw a fiery face appear in the branches. She said she saw another anguished face in the surrounding trees. As they ran back to the road, they looked back to see a group of lighted souls gathered around the trunk.

Whether you believe the lore or not, one can’t visit the incredible Angel Oak without feeling something stir deep in their soul. I always feel a sense of peace there. I have been to see Angel Oak many times and it still overwhelms me. The sheer age and size of this natural specimen make it feel like you are visiting a sacred spot where all the earliest days’ knowledge is housed inside the trunk and limbs. I have never seen it during the evening, as the park closes at 5 p.m. Visitors are not permitted to congregate in the park after closing time, and signs remind people not to deface the tree.

Way up north, on the southern shores of Lake Superior sits Marquette, Michigan. This charming Upper Peninsula town was built on iron ore. The Marquette Ore Dock is a behemoth that rises from the water dominating the shoreline with its interesting and graceful design. Abuzz with nature-focused outdoor activities in the summer, visitors happily make the trek for Marquette’s exciting winter outdoor activities too.

Cross-country skiing marathons, ice fishing, ice racing, snowshoeing, and all things snow can be accessed in the area. Grab your charcoal hand warmers, electric jackets, and fashionable faux fur hat — it’s time to venture outside on the Lake Superior edge of the Upper Peninsula.

Note: Some information in this piece was obtained during a sponsored press trip, but all recommendations are my own.

1. Noquemanon Ski Marathon

The Noquemanon Ski Marathon has run for over two decades, welcoming novice and experienced skiers alike. Known as the Noque to avid cross-country skiing fans, the racers enter 1K, 3K, 12K, 24K, and 50K classic and freestyle cross-country ski journeys. There is even a 15-mile snowshoe race. Imagine skiing 50K (approximately 31 miles) in the freezing cold — a true test of stamina and internal fortitude. Bravo!

I had the opportunity to connect with one seasoned racer, Anja Erickson. I think her sentiment is shared by many of the racers I spoke with. Erickson said, “I competed in the 12K skate race. My family has made the trek up to Marquette every year for the past 4 years, since my freshman year at NMU, to compete in the race. As a senior now, I am happy to have this tradition and continue it even after my time at Northern. For us, it’s not about how we place, it’s about spending quality time together, doing what we love.”

In temperatures below freezing, sometimes way below freezing, these hardy souls pump their arms and glide their skis across a frozen trail to the finish line at the Superior Dome on the Northern Michigan University campus.

2. Cross-Country Skiing

According to The Canadian Encyclopedia, cross-country skiing is thought to have originated in Scandinavia over 5,000 years ago. Used mainly as a source of transportation, cross-country skiing has morphed into an outdoor winter season activity that can be a solitary adventure or a family-friendly experience. Enjoying quiet winter moments while breathing clean, fresh air and exercising your muscles is a wonderful way to enjoy pristine snow-covered scenery.

Well-drafted cross-country trail maps outline the Marquette County area and highlight 17 different trails to explore. You may just fall in love with Marquette County’s cross-country trails and sign up for the next Noque race (highlighted above).

3. Ice Racing

Upper Michigan Ice Racing Association

Fast-paced, adrenaline-pumping, wheels skimming a snow-covered track — and that’s the spectators’ experience — is ice racing at its best.

The Upper Michigan Ice Racing Association organizes bike and quad races during the winter months. Large trailers towed by massive pickup trucks house an assortment of motorized toys ready to take on the slippery track. While the trucks and trailers line the buzzing pit area of the track, spectators arrive early for front-row parking allowing them to keep warm while watching the whirling madness of vehicles whizzing past.

Most of the ice races are during the daylight hours, however, several times a season night races are scheduled. Under the black northern Michigan sky with track lights illuminating the way, intrepid drivers put the pedal to the medal for winners bragging rights. Nighttime ice racing is a must-do for any vicarious thrill seeker. You will feel the need for speed.

4. U.S. Ski & Snowboard Hall of Fame Ishpeming

The U.S. Ski & Snowboard Hall of Fame is in the nearby city of Ishpeming. Ishpeming is recognized as the birthplace of organized skiing in America with the 1905 founding of the National Ski Association.

Rows of inductees’ photos create a maze-like experience as you meander through the Hall of Fame. Punctuated with antique skis, gear, and a replica of an old ski shop, the stories and history of skiing and snowboarding come to life. Many recognizable sports people grab your attention along with stories of unsung heroes and people behind the scenes.

5. Downhill Skiing

Marquette Mountain Resort

A few miles outside of downtown Marquette is a local ski resort perfect for a fun day of downhill skiing. Marquette Mountain Resort offers day skiing and nighttime under-the-lights downhill. When you are ready for a break, head over to the T-Bar for some apres ski munchies and adult beverages.

For a reasonable fee, you can rent all the ski gear you need to ride the lift and swoosh down beginner, intermediate, or black diamond runs. With 29 trails and three chairlifts, the resort is manageable for even newbie downhillers.

6. Snowshoe The Noquemanon Trail Network

Michigan’s upper peninsula is heaven for snowshoe enthusiasts. The Noquemanon Trail Network is the perfect resource to plan your snowshoe adventure. Simply placing one snowshoe-covered foot in front of the other is a solid cardio workout. Use poles for balance and plod along beautiful woodland trails for a few hours of outdoor fun.

If you don’t want to pack your snowshoes, you can rent them at the Forestville Trailhead. They are available on a first come, first served basis, so you’ll want to get on the road early to discover the fresh tracks.

7. Ice Fishing

Colorful ice shanties dot frozen lakes sheltering huddling winter anglers enjoying a chilly day on the water. There is a varied assortment of fish being caught including walleyes, northern pike, perch, and others depending on your ice-fishing lake of choice.

Lake Superior rarely freezes over, so it is not entirely safe for ice fishing. However, many of the area’s lakes are perfect for casting a line through the frozen water. You can see heavily dressed fishermen and fisherwomen dragging shanties across the ice in search of the perfect fish-are-biting spot.

8. Iron Ore Dock

A stroll around Marquette’s historic waterfront will ultimately lead you to the massive Iron Ore Dock. Still in operation, the Iron Ore Dock was built in 1911 and has a hold capacity of a whopping 50,000 tons of ore.

The imposing dock has a graceful winged design that disguises its functional quality. Standing like a giant guard over Marquette’s harbor, it is a symbol of the history and fortitude of the Upper Peninsula and her people. Known fondly as Yoopers, the local Upper Peninsula residents are the friendliest people on the planet.

9. Presque Isle Park

In the summer, Presque Isle Park is a hub of outdoor fun in the sun. During a winter trip, the park is perfect for enjoying the view of the harbor’s breakwater lighthouse with your morning coffee and a handheld pie from IronTown Pasties.

The park is a lovely spot for enjoying the hiking trails, even in winter. Fat tire bikes, hiking, and other outdoor winter adventures are ready and waiting for you to explore. It can be very cold, so dress with keeping toasty warm in mind.

Stay At The Landmark Inn

Perched at the top of downtown Marquette is the charming brownstone, the Landmark Inn. Opened in 1930 as the Northland Hotel, it became the Landmark Inn after an extensive renovation in 1995. Walking distance to the center of everything Marquette’s busting center has to offer, the historic hotel has housed many famous guests. Celebrities staying at the historic hotel include Amelia Earhart, Abbott & Costello, Jimmy Stewart, Lee Remick, and George C. Scott.

With beautiful views of Lake Superior from the sixth-floor Crow’s Nest, it is the perfect spot to relax and rejuvenate after a day of exploring winter in Marquette.

Visit Downtown Marquette

Along with the waterfront, downtown Marquette is full of charming shops: unique and interesting music shops, souvenir stores, and an assortment of other whimsical boutiques.

The dizzying array of restaurant options in Marquette will fill your tummy and warm your soul. Visit our Marquette dining favorites for a taste of Upper Peninsula cuisine.

Visit Travel Marquette to explore all your adventure possibilities. You will be surprised at the variety and amount of activities available.

Pro Tip: It can be seriously cold on the Upper Peninsula, so weather-appropriate outerwear is key to enjoying your visit. Fashionably warm snow boots, along with other top-notch gear will enhance your outdoor enjoyment.

In April, we eagerly shed our winter gear, welcome the warm weather, and breathe in the sweet spring air. Dogwood festivals around the country are a way to join together with family and friends and celebrate the arrival of spring. From grand events to small-town gatherings, you will find a Dogwood festival to suit your adventurous spirit.

1. Atlanta Dogwood Festival 

Atlanta, Georgia

Head over to Piedmont Park for the Atlanta Dogwood Festival. One of the largest in the country, it is known for its art exhibits and juried art show. Over 200 artists participate in the Fine Artist Market showcasing traditional paintings and photography along with goods made from wood and leather, plus pottery, jewelry, glass, and more. Another highlight of the event is the two performance stages that provide continuous live music. The Atlanta Dogwood Festival is scheduled for early April.

Where To Stay: Gracious Southern hospitality, beautiful furnishings, and a short walk to Piedmont Park make Stonehurst Place the perfect spot to rest and rejuvenate after a day at the Dogwood Festival.

Where To Eat: Get the real flavor of Atlanta with a food tour. Enjoy a full-course meal including Low Country shrimp and grits with beverage pairings on this Atlanta Food and Cocktail Tour.

Pro Tip: Use public transportation. MARTA is the most convenient way to get to and from the festival. Parking near Piedmont Park will be very difficult.

2. Dogwood Arts Festival

Knoxville, Tennessee

Join in the flower fun at the Knoxville Dogwood Arts Festival that takes place in mid-April. Situated in the heart of downtown Knoxville, the festival is a celebration of fine art, live music, and fun for the young and young-at-heart.

Just in time for the spring blooms, Knoxville’s dogwood trails invite you to enjoy more than 85 miles of scenic walking and biking paths.

Where To Stay: The Tennessean Hotel offers luxurious Southern hospitality with the convenience of a downtown address close to great restaurants, pubs, and shopping. It is the perfect spot to rest after a day of festivities.

Where To Eat: The Central Filling Station rotates over three dozen food trucks, ensuring the selection changes daily and offers a variety of unique culinary creations for the foodie fanatic. Their online calendar lists “trucks of the day,” so you don’t miss your favorite foodie fix.

Pro Tip: World’s Fair Park, home of the 1982 World’s Fair Exhibition, in downtown Knoxville is anchored by the Sunsphere. The newly renovated Sunsphere is 26 stories tall and the fourth-floor Observation Deck shows off the city and surrounding Smoky Mountains with a 360-degree view.

3. Fayetteville Dogwood Festival 

Fayetteville, North Carolina

The Fayetteville Dogwood Festival is scheduled for late April. It kicks off Friday night with a concert series that runs the entire weekend featuring local bands. Saturday and Sunday there is a midway with carnival rides, arts and crafts, a car show, and lots of food. If you are looking for an old-fashioned festival, this is it.

Where To Stay: If you love nature but need one step above camping, try glamping. Find great camping and glamping options with HipCamp. No need to pack your gear. Find one where you can bring your toothbrush and everything else is already waiting for you.

Where To Eat: For a traditional Southern dinner, try Fayetteville’s Texas Roadhouse. You will leave with your tummy and wallet satisfied.

Pro Tip: The US Army Airborne and Special Operations Museum brings the history of these dedicated men and women alive. The main exhibit hall begins with the 1940 U.S. Army Parachute Test Platoon and follows it up with a series of significant events to current-day operations. It is a testament to these highly trained soldiers.

4. Vinton Dogwood Festival

Vinton, Virginia

Located in the heart of the Blue Ridge Mountains is the Vinton Dogwood Festival. The festival is over 65 years old and offers quintessential hometown events including the crowning of the Vinton Dogwood Festival Queen, the Dogwood Festival Parade, and a car show. The town of Vinton comes together at the end of April for this spring celebration.

Where To Stay: Vinton is located just outside of Roanoke, where you can find lots of great name-brand hotels that offer great stays for an exceptional value. The Hampton Inn and Suites Downtown Roanoke is centrally located for easy access to all your Blue Ridge Mountain entertainment.

Where To Eat: With a focus on prime Virginia sourced products, Alexander’s offers fine dining in an elegant, relaxed restaurant.

Pro Tip: Read Mountain is 253 acres of preserved natural forest that includes several hiking trails. The two-mile trail to the summit, Buzzards Rock, affords a spectacular view of the Roanoke Valley.

5. Farmville Dogwood Festival

Farmville, North Carolina

The Farmville Dogwood Festival is held in late April in the town commons where you can enjoy the beautiful dogwoods and azaleas in bloom. The festival showcases eastern North Carolina artisans, music at the town’s gazebo, and a carnival.

Where To Stay: Find a charming log home — a dream cabin dropped in the North Carolina woods just a few miles out of town. Enjoy a relaxed, cozy stay while visiting the Farmville area.

Where To Eat: The best place to eat in Farmville is the Plank Road Steakhouse. This is a meat lover’s paradise, offering a grilled 14-ounce rib-eye steak.

Pro Tip: To sample a variety of the local barbecue and craft brews, take the Pitt County Brew and ’Cue Trail. Collect your “Passpork” at one of the establishments on the trail and begin your Southern pork and craft brew adventure.

6. Dogwood Festival

Camdenton, Missouri

The Dogwood Festival in Camdenton has been around for over 70 years. Come to this Lake of the Ozarks town for the pageant and parade and stay for the fish fry! Planned for mid-April, you will love the hometown Camdenton pride.

Where To Stay: A unique Vrbo stay overlooking the Big Niangua arm on the Lake of the Ozarks while enjoying the view from your two-bedroom house in the Sugarloaf Vineyards is the perfect stay in Camdenton.

Where To Eat: The Trophy Room at Old Kinderhook is the perfect place to enjoy an evening meal with friends. With everything from wings and burgers to perfectly cooked steaks and seafood, you will be delighted by the delicious options.

Pro Tip: Get outside at Ha Ha Tonka State Park, where you can enjoy a hike and explore castle ruins, caves, and sinkholes. It’s always a good day to get out and breathe some fresh air.

7. Grant Dogwood Festival  

Pollock, Louisiana

Down in Pollock, Louisiana, the Grant Dogwood Festival is ready with a warm welcome and lots of southern fun. Hosting a parade, vendors, classic car show, and a 5K fun run, there is tons of small-town fun to experience.

Where To Stay: Less than 20 miles down the road from Pollock is The Hotel Bentley, an early 1900s grand hotel in Alexandria, Louisiana.

Pro Tip: There are plenty of state parks in the area to plop a bobber in the water and try to hook a big one.

Final Bloom

Whether you are looking for a large, city-sponsored festival or a small, hometown gathering, one thing is certain: The blooming dogwood trees mean it’s time for celebrating spring and all the promise she brings.

You can also find fantastic dogwoods (and azaleas) in East Texas; our own Janie Pace has more.

Want to see cherry blossoms, too? Read up on the Cherry Blossom Festival in Washington D.C.

Whether you are a novice or a seasoned hiker, the U.S. Gulf Coast is normally off the radar for a hiking destination, especially when thinking about hiking in Florida. What could Florida possibly offer? There are no mountains. There are no canyons. But get that thinking right out of your head. Florida offers some incredible hiking experiences, especially along the panhandle from Tallahassee to the Alabama state line where beautiful and unexpected natural wonders will be found around every bend.

When traveling the I-10 corridor across the Florida panhandle, take time to pull off the highway and visit one of these six incredible hikes — you won’t regret it.

1. Leon Sinks Geological Area

Tallahassee, Florida

4.4-mile moderate loop

While Florida may not be known for rugged mountains, it does offer some unique geology to explore. Located in the Apalachicola National Forest, the Leon Sinks Geological Area provides hikers with a chance to view what is known as karst geology, a large area of soft limestone that is porous and that has been cut over the centuries by the elements to form sinkholes, natural bridges, and streams that disappear underground.

This erosion has created massive sinkholes, some over 300 feet deep, that are filled with crystal-clear water. The erosion has also created the longest underwater cave system in the United States.

While you can’t explore the watery caverns, you can view the beauty nature has created from above ground by connecting three trails. Use the Sinkhole Trail to visit several beautiful watery “ponds” including Hammock, Big Dismal, and Black Sink sinkholes. A short connector trail, the Crossover Trail, connects Sinkhole to the Gum Swamp Trail for incredible wildlife viewing over boardwalks through a cypress and gum swamp.

Pro Tip: There is a small day-use fee per vehicle for entry into Leon Sinks. Trails are easy to follow using paint blazes to show the way and have informative interpretive signage along the route that describes the geology and the wildlife you will find here in greater detail. The larger sinkholes have viewing platforms that overlook the shimmering waters.

2. Garden Of Eden Trail (Apalachicola Bluffs And Ravines Preserve)

Bristol, Florida

3.3-mile moderate to difficult out-and-back with loop

One of the more difficult and challenging hikes in the Sunshine State, the Garden of Eden Trail at the Nature Conservancy’s Apalachicola Bluffs and Ravines Preserve is a roller coaster of a walk that starts along a wiregrass and pine tree-lined trail then makes its way steeply down and back up ravines to an unbelievably beautiful view of the Apalachicola River from the top of Alum Bluff.

If hiking this trail in the spring, say March or April, the path comes alive with a splash of color provided by red Florida anise blooming trailside.

Pro Tips: This is an environmentally sensitive area and as such, dogs are not allowed. Due to the difficulty rating of this trek, be prepared to spend at least 2 hours on the trail. Bring plenty of water and snacks for this one as well. There is no admission fee charged.

3. Ochlockonee State Park

Sopchoppy, Florida

2.6-mile easy loop

At the confluence of the Dead and Ochlocknee Rivers, there is a beautiful little out-of-the-way park: the 543-acre Ochlockonee River State Park. Its small size is more than made up for with a hike along the banks of the park’s beautiful namesake river over a trail lined with tall pine trees and swaying savannah grasses punctuated with patches of saw palmetto.

This hike uses two trails — the Ochlockonee River and Pine Flatwood Nature Trails — to create this loop where you will undoubtedly meet white tail deer, hawks soaring high above, and maybe even a gopher tortoise. A real highlight of this walk through the pines is a visit to Reflection Pond, a beautiful grass pond with a dazzling mirror-like surface that reflects the deep blue Florida sky and passing puffy white clouds.

There is a small per-vehicle entry fee charged. Swimming is allowed at the designated location on the banks of the Dead River.

Pro Tips: There are some truly unique events held in the small town of Sopchoppy including the annual Worm Gruntin’ Festival held each year on the second Saturday in April. “Worm gruntin’” is a traditional method of using a couple of stakes to make a noise in the ground that drives worms to the surface to use as fishing bait. Besides worms, the festival features live music and plenty of delicious local food. And each month, local talent is showcased at the Sopchoppy Opry.

4. Wiregrass Boardwalk Trail

Chipley, Florida

2.0-mile easy to moderate out-and-back

A waterfall? In Florida? You bet, and it’s found at Falling Waters State Park.

Once again, the karst geology I mentioned earlier is at play here forming a 100-foot deep, 20-foot wide cylindrical sinkhole that’s impressive to view from an observation. But this sinkhole is different. It has a 73-foot cascading waterfall that plunges down its vertical limestone walls before disappearing into a hidden underground cave. It’s not the only waterfall in the state, but it is definitely the highest.

To access the waterfall, use the park’s Wiregrass Boardwalk Trail which will lead you to two viewing platforms. The upper platform gives you a bird’s eye view of the falls from above while the second one heads down to a spot below the rim of the sinkhole where you will feel the cool mist of the water on your face.

Pro Tip: Keep in mind that this is in the South, and as such, waterfalls are seasonal — meaning that they may disappear altogether during the hot months of summer and times of drought. There is a small per-vehicle day use fee charged. A park brochure with a trail map is available online.

5. Rocky Bayou Double Loop

Niceville, Florida

2-mile easy double loop

Rocky Bayou is a finger of Choctawhatchee Bay in Niceville, Florida. Here, nestled along the banks of the bayou, is a small 357-acre state park, the Fred Gannon Rocky Bayou State Park (better known to locals simply as Rocky Bayou). It provides travelers with a beautiful easy walk in the woods along a route I call the Rocky Bayou Double Loop. And that’s what this hike is — a peaceful and calming walk where you can relax and let the troubles of the world melt away.

The loop actually uses two trails. The first is the Rocky Bayou Trail that takes you through a sand pine scrub forest and coastal flatwoods and is lined with bright green deer moss. You will have plenty of opportunities to visit the tranquil bayou itself via short side trails. Along the route, you will see numbered signage. Be sure to pick up a brochure at the kiosk at the trailhead that will identify what you’re looking at.

The second trail, the Sand Pine Trail, is a 1.1-mile loop through a magnolia, pine, and hardwood forest. When I first hiked this trail, I was excited to visit a pond along this trail called “Puddin’ Head Lake.” I mean, who wouldn’t want to see a lake with a name like that? Well, Puddin’ Head ain’t no more. Instead, it is now Puddin’ Head Stream, having been returned to its original state to protect a unique and rare habitat for many species of animals and reptiles such as cooter turtles, soft shell and box turtles, deer, raccoon, and plants like the Florida anise and pitcher plants.

A park brochure with a trail map is available online.

6. Big Lagoon State Park Trails

Pensacola, Florida

5-miles of easy walking, interconnecting trails

To say that the trails at Big Lagoon State Park are picturesque is an understatement. The 5 miles of sandy trail found here all interconnect giving you seemingly endless options as they wind their way between and around the park’s Long Pond, Grand Lagoon, and its namesake Big Lagoon. Along these paths, large blue herons stand stoically as they wade in the shallows, wildflowers adorn the trail in season with a rainbow of colors, kayakers will be seen plying the waters as they head out into the Intercoastal Waterway, and the sunsets are simply gorgeous.

The highlight of a visit to the park is a climb up the famous four-story Big Lagoon Observation Tower where you will be rewarded for your effort with spectacular panoramic views of the park, Perdido Key, and the Gulf Islands National Seashore.

Pro Tip: Big Lagoon State Park is a birdwatcher’s dream come true. Known as the “Gateway to the Great Florida Birding Trail,” the park is a prime destination for wintering and migrating birds and of course their normal yearly residents such as king rails, great blue heron, cardinal, and nuthatches. Binoculars are available for loan at the ranger station.

Siciliy’s show-stopping jewel, Mount Etna, is an active volcano looming over the city of Catania. It lies on the convergence between the African and Eurasian Plates. Etna is a stratovolcano (composite volcano) formed by many eruptions over time.

According to Earth Watch, the Mount Etna volcano is “the tallest active volcano in Europe, currently 3,329 meters high, though this varies with summit eruptions.” That equates to almost 11,000 feet tall and growing with every eruption. Etna is one of three active volcanoes in Italy and stands about two and a half times as tall as Mount Vesuvius. A UNESCO World Heritage Site, Mount Etna is one of Mother Nature’s unpredictable gifts.

I had the pleasure of touring Mount Etna with Giovanni Puglionisi, an experienced naturalistic guide and tour leader. He grew up at the base of this massive volcano and possesses an intimate knowledge of the landscape and the volcano’s pernicious moods.

1. Hiking Mount Etna

Hiking up Mount Enta is the number one thing to do for intrepid travelers. Hiking up an active volcano is too cool to pass up, even if you only opt for a short hike around one of the cinder cones. The feel of the volcanic gravel beneath your feet puts Italy’s tumultuous volcanic history in sharp perspective.

When you are planning to explore a vast and unpredictable place like Mount Etna, it is always best to explore the backcountry with a knowledgeable local guide. The volcano is constantly shifting and erupting; therefore, knowledge of what areas are open and which ones may be closed is key to a safe visit. Due to the unpredictable volatility, safety measures can change day-to-day.

When To Hike Mount Etna

I asked Puglionisi about his favorite season to hike Mount Etna. “Speaking about the top craters, the best season is the summer. Instead, for the other altitudes of the volcano, the best for hiking are spring and autumn. In spring, I suggest May and June. In autumn, the best is the foliage period, so in between the end of October and the beginning of November.”

Even beginner hikers can enjoy the majesty of Mount Etna. “One [hike] for beginners is to the Monti Sartorius,” said Puglionisi. “It is a group of lateral craters on the east side of Etna from the eruption of 1865 surrounded by our white birches and provides a great panorama.” The Monti Sartorius 2-mile loop trail is ranked as easy by AllTrails.

“For beginners with good fitness, the Schiena dell’Asino is a panoramic path on the south side that culminates in a breathtaking 360-degree view towards the Valle del Bove, the east coast, and the top craters,” explained Puglionisi. Schiena dell’Asino is, according to AllTrails, a 4.7-mile moderate loop. Hikers are challenged by some rocky scrambles and rewarded with gorgeous views.

Shorter Hikes

If you are not prepared for an all-day hike, try a more manageable hike around one of the cinder cones. A cinder cone is a steep conical hill that forms from a volcanic vent, typically formed by lava eruptions without explosive force. A volcanic crater is a near bowl-shaped depression caused by volcanic activity. Etna is dotted with cinder cones and is home to a number of craters.

The Crater Silvestri is less than a mile hike around the rim of one of Etna’s most accessible vantage points. The Crater Silvestri is ranked as easy, however, be prepared for an uphill climb and a shifting rocky surface. Leave the flip flops for the beach and be sure to wear supportive sneakers or hiking shoes. Even for this short hike — really more of a walk — you will be rewarded with glorious views of Catania and the village of Nicolosi.

2. Vineyards 

With over 180 picturesque vineyards and wineries in the Mount Etna region, visiting them all would be a herculean task. Fortunately, Sicily Active has reviewed the top seven Mount Etna wineries so we can vicariously peruse their offerings.

The rich volcanic soil makes for a perfect terroir and the high elevation is a happy growing ground for grapevines. The hot Mediterranean sun coupled with the temperate breezes extend the traditional growing season, giving the grapes more time on the vine. The temperature variation from day to night due to the high altitude also works in the vineyard’s favor.

However, the steep incline of the mountain makes tending the vines difficult. Most of the vineyard work is done by hand. Additionally, Mount Etna is a fickle and volatile volcano — the risk/reward for vineyard owners can be thrown out of balance by the volcano’s fickle whim.

If you have the opportunity to taste wine from this region, jump at the chance. It is highly memorable.

3. Ristorante La Cantoniera

A quick stop at Ristorante La Cantoniera, near the entrance of Crater Silvestri, is a perfect spot for a cappuccino and a bathroom break. Be sure to have a few coins on you, WCs (water closets) in Europe tend to charge a usage fee.

You will love ogling over the souvenirs lining the walls and display cases. They carry lots of fun trinkets to pack into your suitcase. Peruse the light dining menu; it will satisfy hungry travelers ready to sit, relax, and enjoy the view.

Be sure to sample their fiery liquor — Lava Dell’ Etna. It will warm you up on a chilling volcano hiking day. The shot is like a fireball warming you from the inside out.

4. Skiing

Skiing down a volcano is not something many of us do every winter. It’s one of those activities you pine for, plan for, and finally execute. When you do check skiing on a volcano off your bucket list, you definitely will have some amazing stories to tell.

Puglionisi recommends skiing Piano Provenzana on Etna’s north side. You can also enjoy sledding, snowshoeing, groomed cross-country skiing trails, and alpine touring.

Finish off your downhill day with a steaming cup of rich hot cocoa or a strong shot of grappa.

5. Valle Del Bove

Valle del Bove is a surreal lava valley on the eastern side of Mount Etna. This massive and rugged region should only be explored with an experienced guide.

This is one of Puglionisi’s favorite spots where he recalled his feelings. “The majesty of the place and the silence. It is a big valley created in time by the activity of Etna and even the place of old Etna volcanic buildings. All the hiking around or inside the valley is the best [on] Etna and extremely interesting.”

6. Alcantara Gorge

The Alcantara Gorge is stunning. Arrive early if you plan to spend the day. Lifts help you descend to the gorge for a day of splashing and exploring in the chilly waters. If you have the time, the Alcantara Gorge is a memorable experience from your visit to Sicily.

Puglionisi said, “Alcantara is the river that comes from Nebrodi mountains, surrounding Etna along the north side in about 62 kilometers [about 39 miles] and ends on the east coast. A several-thousand-year-old lava flows with prismatic columns of basaltic lava, often with a six-angle section. It is possible in summer to explore the first meters of the canyon with [a] swimsuit in the cold water of the Alcantara River that crosses the canyon for 800 meters [about 2,600 feet]. With more technical equipment and guides, the interior of the canyon is accessible using wetsuit helmets and even ropes and harnesses.” 

7. Lava Flows

Watching a lava flow is mesmerizing. The slow, deliberate path of destruction that typifies Mount Etna’s molton march to sea level is beyond your imagination.

“The lava in here flows down like honey, just to give you an idea,” said Puglionisi. “It is moving, warm, and making noise like broken glasses, because it is rich in silicates… to suggest to you that is something living! Forget the avalanche of hot material that runs down chasing you, in here, many times, we can stay so close to feel the heat, but paying close attention. And very few times, opening a lateral crater at a lower altitude, it could be able to reach a town; powerful but slowly giving time for the evacuation.”

Puglionisi’s description of his beloved mountain is beautifully poetic.

Visit Mount Etna

This was my long-awaited, first trip to Sciliy and I loved it. We spent several days exploring and eating our way around the island; it was a magical experience. While you are visiting, you must make the time to visit Etna — even if it is for a partial hike. The view, the volcano, and the vino are well worth the trip. I can’t wait to return and explore more of this stunning island paradise. To connect with Giovanni Puglionisi and set up your personalized tour, email him at myetnaview@gmail.com. You can follow Puglionisi’s excellent adventures on Facebook — his photography is stunning.

Pro Tips: Preparing For Etna

Etna is a fickle mountain with changing weather patterns and fluctuating temperatures. For the very best experience, wearing appropriate clothing is key to enjoying all the beauty Mount Etna has to offer. Like any exploration experience, you need to carry appropriate gear for any circumstance. “Many tourists think that Etna is only its top craters and it is so much more,” said Puglionisi. “Many make the mistake of coming with the wrong shoes like sandals or flip flops and dressing incorrectly. Listen to your guide.” It can be cold at the top even in the summer months. Appropriate clothing, footwear, and outerwear will enhance your Etna adventure.

Related Reading:

• 5 Beautiful Boutique Hotels In Sicily With Stunning Views
• The 8 Most Unusual Experiences You Can Have In A Volcano
• 7 Amazing Places To Visit In Beautiful Sicily

It might be the ultimate example of repurposing: Since the 1960s, thousands of miles of old abandoned railroad lines have been converted into recreational trails.

Owing to their scenic locales and gentle grades, the Rails-to-Trails routes are perfect for an epic bike ride or a leisurely stroll. The railroad corridors offer dizzying variety: They run along the East and West Coasts, past mountains, across rivers and forests, and through bustling urban landscapes.

After hiking and biking rail trails all over the country, I’ve found that not only do the routes along old rail lines provide an opportunity for exercise in splendid outdoor settings, but they also take me back to the heyday of train travel. I often imagine passengers gawking at gorgeous seaside and mountain scenes to the rhythmic sway and lonesome whistle of the train.

Today, every state in the nation has a roster of rail trails. According to the nonprofit organization Rails-to-Trails Conservancy (RTC), there are more than 2,300 rail trails in the United States, totaling 25,370 miles.

And hundreds more are in the works. Among them is the mammoth Great American Rail Trail, which will run 3,700 miles from Washington State to Washington, D.C. Once complete, the trail will allow users to literally walk or bike across America on a seamless, scenic trail. The Great American Rail Trail is currently more than 53 percent complete.

Meanwhile, the converted rail corridors and towpaths are beloved amenities in communities all over the country. Here are 13 of the best.

Pro Tip: Detailed information about the trails, including right-of-way, restrooms, access points, accessibility for wheelchairs, multi-use status, and trail maps, is available on RTC’s website Traillink.

Some of this information was gathered during a hosted press trip. All opinions remain my own.

1. Bayshore Bikeway

California

With the Pacific Ocean on one side and the sparkling San Diego Bay on the other, the views along the 24-mile Bayshore Bikeway are virtually nonstop. The San Diego skyline gleams in the distance, and the route takes in the shores of the lovely Coronado Island as well as San Diego neighborhoods.

Along the way, trail users will pass by the legendary Hotel del Coronado. A short detour will get you to the hotel’s stunning beach and its selection of cafes and shops. It’s a great place for a leisurely lunch break and is definitely worth the splurge.

About 13 miles of the 24-mile route are car-free bicycle lanes, while the remaining 11 miles consist of on-street sections that are well-marked.

Pro Tip: If you’re staying in San Diego, take the ferry across the bay to the Coronado Ferry Landing, where bike rentals are available. It’s a good place to browse the shops, have a snack, and start your ride or walk.

2. Oak Leaf Trail

Wisconsin

The beautiful shores of Lake Michigan are front and center along nearly a quarter of the 135-mile Oak Leaf Trail. The trail meanders through the Milwaukee metro area as well as the surrounding flat rural plains and leafy green riverbeds.

The Oak Leaf Trail also briefly overlaps with Milwaukee’s Beerline Trail, a fascinating 3.7-mile trail that follows the route of an old freight-train corridor that once supplied some of Milwaukee’s famous breweries.

Pro Tip: Make time to stop at the Milwaukee Art Museum, located right on the Oak Leaf Trail. Marvel at the building’s white wings against the blue sky and wander amidst the museum’s 30,000 works of art.

3. Eastern Trail

Maine

Lighthouses, lobster rolls, and white-pine forests: These are just a few of the wonderful things you can experience along southern Maine’s Eastern Trail.

Running roughly from South Portland to Kennebunk and parallel to Maine’s Atlantic Coast, the 24-mile Eastern Trail takes in the charming towns of Saco, Biddeford, Scarborough, and Old Orchard Beach. The trail was inducted into the RTC Rail-Trail Hall of Fame in 2022.

Nearly 22 miles of the trail follow off-road sections, but some sections feature on-road bike lanes.

Pro Tip: Start your ride or hike at the northern end at the Bug Light Park Lighthouse (Portland Breakwater Light) in South Portland, where plenty of parking is available.

4. Katy Trail

Missouri

As a 2007 inductee into the Rails-to-Trails Conservancy’s Hall of Fame and a state park, Missouri’s Katy Trail is a well-known community treasure. The 240-mile trail spans nearly the full width of Missouri and is the nation’s longest continuous rail trail.

Along the way, bikers, hikers, and runners will encounter delightful small towns, rural farmland, and towering bluffs along the Missouri River. A number of centers of commerce are also accessible along the trail, adding ease to the long-distance trek. The trail features 26 trailheads and four fully restored railroad depots.

Pro Tip: The Katy Trail connects with the 47-mile Rock Island Spur in Windsor, adding another dimension to the route.

5. High Line

New York

Hailed as the “miracle above Manhattan,” New York City’s elevated High Line Trail offers a combination of urban setting, nature, art, and design.

The 1.5-mile trail runs 30 feet above the bustling Manhattan streets below. Since it opened in 2009, the High Line has become a tourist attraction in its own right. The celebrated urban park and aerial greenway route joined the Rails-to-Trails Hall of Fame in 2011.

Pro Tip: Since the High Line parallels the Hudson River, great views of the river traffic can be seen to the west.

6. Monon Trail

Indiana

For 27 miles, the Monon Trail cuts through the heart of Indiana, stretching from urban Indianapolis to suburban Carmel and north through the rural towns of Westfield and Sheridan.

Treasured as a community amenity for decades, the Monon Trail was inducted into the Rails-to-Trail Hall of Fame in 2009.

Starting in Indianapolis, the Monon Trail passes beneath interstate ramps and by community murals before transitioning to a bustling suburban scene in downtown Carmel, passing by the City Center and palatial Palladium performance hall. Soon, the route evolves again into open wooded terrain and the rural community of Westfield.

Pro Tip: Plan to stop at the Carmel City Center, where an array of festivals and markets take place, including a Saturday farmers market.

7. Cowboy Recreation and Nature Trail

Nebraska

For an Old West experience unlike any other, head to the high plains of Nebraska for the 203-mile Cowboy Recreation and Nature Trail.

The trail, which runs from Valentine to Norfolk, holds the distinction of being right in the center of the Great American Rail Trail as it passes through the Great Plains states.

Along the way, you will take in the magnificent grass-covered dunes of the Sandhills, the wild Niobrara River Valley, and the rolling grasses of the American prairie.

Pro Tip: Stop in the small town of Valentine, where you’ll find big adventures on the Niobrara National Scenic River and in Smith Falls State Park.

8. San Francisco Bay Trail

California

When it comes to massive rail-trail undertakings, the San Francisco Bay Trail ranks among the top. For decades, an effort has been underway to link 47 cities and nine counties with a 500-mile trail that encircles the San Francisco Bay.

Today, the effort is nearly three-quarters of the way complete, with more than 300 miles of trails running past San Francisco icons such as the Golden Gate Bridge and Fort Mason.

Pro Tip: Because of its size, it’s best to do the Bay Trail in segments, using buses, trains, or ferries to get to the various trailheads.

9. Great Allegheny Passage

Maryland/Pennsylvania

Showcasing the best of the terrain of the eastern United States, the Great Allegheny Passage “soars over valleys, snakes around mountains, and skirts alongside three rivers (the Casselman, Youghiogheny, and Monongahela),” says the trail’s website.

At 150 miles in length, the Great Allegheny Passage runs from Cumberland, Maryland, to Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania — making it one of the longest in America.

Pro Tip: The trail starts at the Three Rivers Heritage Trail at Point State Park, where the historic Forts Duquesne and Pitt now sit among skyscrapers and professional sports venues in downtown Pittsburgh.

10. Golden Spoke Trail Network

Utah

Linking Ogden, Salt Lake City, and Provo, Utah’s Golden Spoke Trail Network consists of more than 170 miles of paved trails. The trails take cyclists and hikers along shady river corridors, past rushing waterfalls, over pedestrian bridges, by pastoral horse farms, and through quiet neighborhoods with stellar views of the nearby Wasatch Mountain Range.

The network includes scenic stretches such as the Provo River Parkway, the Denver and Rio Grande Western Rail Trail, the Jordan River Parkway, and the Legacy Parkway.

Pro Tip: Plan to spend some time taking in the splendor of the Provo River Parkway, where the trail passes beneath the soaring Bridal Veil Falls.

11. Peavine And Iron King Trails

Arizona

The Peavine Trail in the north-central-Arizona city of Prescott stands out for a number of reasons. Not only is it one of the only rail trails in Arizona, but it also has the distinction of being a National Recreation Trail, as well as a Rails To Trails Conservancy Hall of Fame inductee from 2010.

The trail lives up to its accolades. It features sweeping views of Prescott’s picturesque Watson Lake, and it takes trail users through the distinctive orange-tinted rock formations known as the Granite Dells. The 6-mile route dates back to 1893 when it served as a section of the Santa Fe Railroad.

The Peavine Trail connects with the 4.1-mile Iron King Trail in the neighboring town of Prescott Valley, and the two scenic rail trails combine to be a popular bike path for cyclists, as well as a gathering spot for walkers, runners, and horseback riders.

Pro Tip: The Peavine Trail is less than a 10-minute drive from historic Whiskey Row, the main street of downtown Prescott, one of Arizona’s most charming downtowns.

12. Historic Railroad Trail

Nevada

Hoover Dam history, panoramic views of Lake Mead, and massive railroad tunnels all come together on the unique Historic Railroad Trail, located in Boulder City, Nevada.

The 3.7-mile trail dates back to the 1930s-era construction of the Hoover Dam, when the railroad was built to serve the construction of that mammoth project. Today, memorable trail moments along the Historic Railroad Trail include walking beneath five tunnels that burrow through the rock walls that border Lake Mead, and taking in the seemingly endless views of the blue waters of the lake.

Pro Tip: The Historic Railroad Trail is located just a 30-minute drive from the Las Vegas Strip and makes a great day trip from the city.

13. George S. Mickelson Trail

South Dakota

Winding through the beautiful Black Hills of South Dakota is a trail gem that dates back to the Wild West days of the late 1800s. The 109-mile George S. Mickelson Trail — an RTC Hall of Fame Trail inductee from 2012 — passes through territory that Old West characters such as Wild Bill Hickok and Calamity Jane once frequented.

Running from Deadwood to Edgemont, the trail has a surface of mostly crushed limestone and gravel. It crosses more than 100 historic railroad trestles along its route and takes in a variety of terrain including prairie land, forests, creeks, and meadows.

Pro Tip: Although mostly a gentle grade, some sections of the George S. Mickelson Trail exceed 4 percent and are considered strenuous.

One of the best ways to celebrate the end of winter and the arrival of spring is to attend a flower festival. Although cherry blossoms get a lot of attention, there’s nothing quite like seeing entire fields of colorful tulips blooming.

While Washington, D.C., may be known for its cherry blossoms, Washington state — and in particular the Skagit Valley — is known for its tulip fields. Hundreds of thousands of people from more than 85 countries and all 50 states attend the Skagit Valley Tulip Festival each year to see hundreds of acres of tulips and an equal number of daffodils.

Where Is The Skagit Valley Tulip Festival?

Located in the northwestern part of Washington, Skagit Valley has the largest tulip fields in North America. The area is easy to reach because it’s only 60 miles north of Seattle, adjacent to Interstate 5. Skagit Valley is only 70 miles south of Vancouver, British Columbia. Either way, it’s a perfect destination for a day trip or a longer stay. Plus, Amtrak Cascades train service runs to Mount Vernon, the closest town.

When Is The Skagit Valley Tulip Festival?

The Tulip Festival runs the entire month of April, but the best time to see the bloom varies from year to year. Some years, tulips bloom the last week of March. Depending on the weather, they might bloom as late as the second week of April. What’s more, different varieties of tulips bloom at different times — and daffodils bloom before tulips.

Fortunately, Visit Skagit Valley provides a bloom update map to help visitors make travel plans. You can also check bloom status on the festival site and check for updates on Facebook.

Pro Tip: Visit in March for the La Conner Daffodil Festival!

Know Before You Go

The Skagit Valley Tulip Festival is intended as a driving tour, and there is no one location to visit. Although the fields are centrally located in the valley, they don’t have addresses, and their location changes each year as the crops are rotated. Plus, activities and events happen all over Skagit Valley. All of this means you need to plan on using a map and consulting it frequently.

In terms of getting around, exploring Skagit Valley on foot can be a great deal of fun — if you enjoy walking long distances. And, since many of the roads on the valley floor are flat, the walking isn’t strenuous.

Festival events take place all over the valley, so many of the fields, gardens, and attractions may actually be miles apart. Exploring Skagit Valley on bicycles can also be fun — especially since the roads are flat and easy to navigate. Since the weather in April can be unpredictable, be prepared for rain and wind.

Pro Tips

As is the case with most large festivals, the least crowded times are early in the morning or late in the afternoon on weekdays. Weekends will be very busy, so if you’re planning to visit then, it’s best to arrive before 10 a.m. to beat the crowds.

Festival organizers point out that this is a rural area, and they suggest taking advantage of restrooms before making a trip to the valley. This is especially important considering that on busy days, it may take longer than expected to reach the tulip fields. All visitor information centers have public restrooms, as does the transit station in downtown Mount Vernon. Furthermore, The Shops at Burlington offer another chance to use public restrooms.

Related Reading:

1. How To Spend A Perfect Long Weekend Visiting Skagit Valley’s Tulip Festival
2. The 8 Best Tulip Festivals In The U.S.
3. 7 Fantastic Experiences At Holland, Michigan’s Famous Tulip Time Festival

The game of golf was born in Scotland, with the first ever 18-hole golf course and rules created in the 15th century. So, it’s no surprise that the country has some incredible golf courses to visit. But it’s the range of locations and the landscape they fit that’s truly spectacular. Some are right by the sea, on hilltops, on islands, and close to lochs, valleys, mountains, and moorland. Whether you’re an experienced golfer or not, the beauty of these golf courses and where they are positioned is equally breathtaking. Here are six spectacular golf courses you can visit in Scotland.

1. St Andrews Links

St Andrews

It’s at St Andrews that you’ll find the oldest golf course in the world, named “The Old Course.” In 1552, Archbishop Hamilton signed an official charter that stated the people of St Andrews had the right to play golf on the links there. Golf was played here long before that, but this is the first official mention of it. 

There are seven courses at St Andrews, with regular tournaments and incredible facilities, as you might expect from such an important golfing destination. There are three clubhouses, four shops, and a golf academy. The 18th hole on The Old Course is the most photographed hole in the world, and while there are more challenging holes on The Old Course, there’s something about the history of this one that makes it special.

Where To Stay In St Andrews: Hotel Du Vin

Perfectly placed close to the course, with amazing views over the links, beach, and sea, Hotel du Vin is a Victorian villa that’s been lovingly renovated and refurbished to create a cozy hotel with touches of luxury. It’s a lovely old hotel that feels like an old gentleman’s club, but it’s the position that really sets it apart. You can see the first tee of The Old Course from some rooms. 

2. Royal Dornoch

Dornoch

Dornoch is a beautiful, wild, and rugged destination. The two 18-hole courses at Royal Dornoch are set spectacularly by the sea. The Struie Course was originally a 12-hole ladies’ course opened in 1899 to partner the 18-hole Championship Course, but in 1999, it opened as the 18-hole course we see today. 

The 17th is the signature hole here, as the fairway drifts away from view and the beach serves as a backdrop. An aiming pole is provided since you can’t see where your shot will land. Experienced golfers will be able to feel their way forward with this shot, but for others, it’s a shot in the dark. It’s dramatic and could be one of the greatest holes in all of Scotland.

Where To Stay In Dornoch: Links House

Links House is just moments away from the course and provides a luxurious country retreat-type place to eat, drink, and sleep. The views are of the sea, though you can see parts of the golf course to the left of the hotel. Choose from hotel rooms or neighboring suites with self-catering facilities. The food here is incredible, and I definitely recommend trying the taster menu with a wine flight.

3. Balbirnie Park

Glenrothes

This single 18-hole golf course is a modest one, but Balbirnie Park’s beauty lies in its understated surroundings and quietness. Set on 140 acres of woodland, this course feels very private and much less visited than the more famous courses like St Andrews. It’s a great one for beginners to play a round on, as the trees act as a kind of wall and give you the seclusion you need to concentrate on what you’re doing. 

The course has its challenges and is quite hilly, following the natural lines of the park, but it’s certainly a fun and entertaining course. The 18th is the signature hole. Downhill and with a stream in front of the green, it’s not easy but it is stunning.

Where To Stay In Glenrothes: Balbirnie House

If you want to be right in the middle of the action, you can’t get closer to the golf course here than at Balbirnie House. This luxury country hotel sits right in the middle of Balbirnie Park, on the edge of the golf course itself. Built in 1777, this Georgian mansion still feels very much like a country stately home, and it’s very popular with wedding parties. The dining rooms give an impressive choice in where and how to dine, and the orangery is stunning.

4. The Machrie Links

Islay

Set in the dunes of Islay, The Machrie is a stylish base for golfers looking to tee off on the wild and beautiful Scottish isle. Home to an iconic championship course, golf has been played at The Machrie since 1891, with the original design by Scottish golf professional Willie Campbell. 

The 18-hole course has since been fully modernized by course architect DJ Russell and combines the best of a traditional historic links course with a modern layout and green complexes. Played on unique dune lands bordering Laggan Bay and set against the stunning backdrop of the Atlantic Ocean, The Machrie Links is an incredible location. Alongside the 18-hole links, you’ll find the Wee Course, offering six par-three holes that can be played from a multitude of tees; an all-season, five-bay driving range; and a golf simulator, trackman, and short game area.

Where To Stay In Islay: The Machrie

This is basically a golfing holiday destination. And the hotel, The Machrie, is right there by the course. When it comes to downtime and a break from golfing, The Machrie has everything you need. The hotel boasts three cozy lounges to relax in, whilst the restaurant, 18, overlooks the 18th hole of the course with panoramic views of the Atlantic. The hotel stands alone, with no other building in sight for miles. It’s a truly spectacular setting; one of privacy, wilderness, solitude, and absolute beauty.

5. Gleneagles

Perthshire

The name Gleneagles is synonymous with golf, and here, you’ll find three championship courses and one nine-hole course. Set amid brooding hills and areas of natural parkland and woodland, it’s not unusual to see a deer or two trot over the green. In fact, when you’re not playing golf, this is a great place for some wildlife spotting. 

Each hole on all three courses is named and numbered, with amusing and traditionally-Scottish titles like Needle E’e, or “needle’s eye,” and Silver tassie, or “silver cup.” The King’s Course could be the greatest moorland course in the world, with surrounding hills like no other course I can think of. The Queen’s Course is slightly easier, giving visitors good options depending on ability.

Where To Stay In Perthshire: Auchterarder House

If you’re part of a larger golfing group, or you’re visiting with family, Auchterarder House is a private house rental that sleeps up to 20 people in 10 bedrooms. It was originally built as a Victorian stately home and still retains many of its original features. There’s a gym, sauna, cinema room, and a private chef who can do all of your catering for you. Every room is luxurious and very spacious and you’ll truly feel like royalty when you stay here.

6. The Carrick Golf Course

Loch Lomond 

The Carrick Golf Course weaves through an area of outstanding natural beauty on the banks of Loch Lomond. It’s one of Scotland’s newest championship standard golf courses and, arguably, the country’s most breathtaking. Sympathetically designed in keeping with its position within Scotland’s first national park, the par-71 course follows a traditional Scottish heathland style. 

Challenging holes stretch over beautiful fairways, hug inland lagoons, and overlook the glittering waters of the loch and rugged mountains beyond. The Carrick extends 5,200 yards from the front tees and 7,086 yards from the championship tees. For a shorter challenge, guests can take on the Wee Demon course. Wee Demon by name, Wee Demon by nature, this tricky nine-hole course overlooks Loch Lomond and threads a delicate path through the estate grounds to the Boat House and Marina, constantly testing your limits. Onto the Clubhouse, located in the Cameron Club and Spa with views towards Loch Lomond and Ben Lomond, it’s the perfect 19th hole.

Where To Stay In Loch Lomond: Cameron House

Cameron House, a beautiful baronial lodge on the southwestern shores of the Loch, is an 18th-century mansion surrounded by 400 acres of beautiful Scottish countryside. The resort features an award-winning spa with a rooftop infinity pool and your choice of bedrooms and suites with views overlooking Loch Lomond. It’s located only 25 minutes from Glasgow International Airport and 30 minutes from Glasgow city center.

Related Reading:

• 7 Reasons Winter Is The Perfect Time To Visit The Scottish Highlands
• 16 Gorgeous Views During An Amazing Scottish Islands Road Trip
• Edinburgh Vs. Glasgow — 5 Differences You Need To Know Before Visiting